HP LaserJet Enterprise M406, M407

HP LaserJet Managed E40040

HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M430, M431
HP LaserJet Managed E42540

Service Manual

Second Image

www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet
www.hp.com/support/ljM406 www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP
www.hp.com/support/ljM407 www.hp.com/support/ljE40040
www.hp.com/support/ljM430MFP www.hp.com/support/ljE42540MFP
 HP LaserJet Enterprise M406, M407, HP
LaserJet Managed E40040, HP LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M430, M431, and HP
LaserJet Managed MFP E42540 Service
Manual

SUMMARY

This guide provides theory of operation, troubleshooting, and repair information.

Legal information
Copyright and License

© Copyright 2021 HP Development

Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject

to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.

Edition 3, 11/2023
Revision history

View a list of document revisions.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP
products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be
liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Table Revision history

Revision number Revision date Revision notes

3 11/2023 Updated part number for ISA

W1A73-60113 changed to 3PZ75A

Document feeder and image scanner on
page 970

2 04/2022 Updated part number for ISA to

Document feeder and image scanner on
page 970.

1 02/2021 HP LaserJet Enterprise M406, M407, HP

LaserJet Managed E40040, HP LaserJet
Enterprise MFP M430, M431, HP LaserJet
Managed MFP E42540 service manual
initial release.

iii
 Conventions used in this guide

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.

WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

iv Conventions used in this guide

HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based
Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners

1. Select Services & Support (near the top of the screen).

2. Under Services Delivery, select Technical Support.

3. Select Technical Documentation.

Find information about the following topics

● Service manuals

● Service advisories

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Warranty and regulatory information

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

v
 ● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

vi HP service and support

Table of contents

1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 1

Information (document feeder and scanner)............................................................................................................................................................ 1
Document feeder and scanner front view....................................................................................................................................................... 1
Specifications (document feeder and scanner)..................................................................................................................................................... 1
Technical specifications................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
Information (base printer)....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Printer front view (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Printer back view (SFP)................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Printer front view (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Printer back view (MFP) ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Configuration (base printer) ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
Configuration (base printer SFP)............................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Configuration (base printer MFP)........................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Specifications (base printer)................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Technical specifications (M406/M407) ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Technical specifications (E40040)........................................................................................................................................................................ 9
Technical specifications (M430/M431) ............................................................................................................................................................10
Technical specifications (E42540)....................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Printer dimensions (SFP) ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Printer dimensions (MFP) ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Printer space requirements......................................................................................................................................................................................17
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ...............................................................................18
Operating-environment range ...............................................................................................................................................................................18
Information (input devices)..................................................................................................................................................................................................18
550-sheet paper feeder front view.....................................................................................................................................................................18

2 Printer installation and maintenance.................................................................................................................................................................................19

Document feeder / scanner ...............................................................................................................................................................................................19
Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (MFP) ......................................................................19
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges....................................................................................................................................... 20
Base printer ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Remove and replace the cartridge.................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Print a cleaning page ....................................................................................................................................................................................................24
Automatic cleaning page.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad................................................................................................................................................... 26
Clean the Tray 2 rollers ...............................................................................................................................................................................................30
Input devices..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................37
Clean the Tray 3 rollers................................................................................................................................................................................................37

3 Theory of operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 45
Document feeder / scanner .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 45

vii
 Document feeder simplex operation ............................................................................................................................................................... 45
Scanning and image capture system..............................................................................................................................................................46
Base printer ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................46
Basic operation................................................................................................................................................................................................................46
Formatter-control system.........................................................................................................................................................................................48
Engine-control system ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 53
Engine laser/scanner system ................................................................................................................................................................................64
Input devices..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................74
Tray 3.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................74

4 Solve problems...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................78
HP service and support .........................................................................................................................................................................................................78
Determine the problem source ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 79
Pre-troubleshooting checklist ...............................................................................................................................................................................80
Troubleshooting flowchart........................................................................................................................................................................................81
Firmware upgrades .......................................................................................................................................................................................................83
Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools.........................................................................................................................................................87
Engine test ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................87
Pre-boot menu options ...............................................................................................................................................................................................88
Advanced configuration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) .....................................................................................105
Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP)............................................................................................................................................ 115
Defeating interlocks ....................................................................................................................................................................................................137
LED Diagnostics (formatter).................................................................................................................................................................................138
Disable cartridge check ..........................................................................................................................................................................................139
Print/stop test..................................................................................................................................................................................................................139
Individual component diagnostics...................................................................................................................................................................140
Diagrams: Block diagrams..................................................................................................................................................................................... 142
Diagrams: External plug and port locations...............................................................................................................................................147
Diagrams: Major component locations........................................................................................................................................................ 149
Diagrams: General timing chart......................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams...............................................................................................................................................................153
Internal test and information pages ...............................................................................................................................................................153
Reports menu..................................................................................................................................................................................................................158
Settings menu.................................................................................................................................................................................................................159
Supplies menu .................................................................................................................................................................................................................197
Trays menu .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................197
Support Tools menu....................................................................................................................................................................................................198
Service menu..................................................................................................................................................................................................................204
Printer resets ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................208
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions ....................................................................................................................................................210
Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems ................................................................................................................... 214
Troubleshooting an unresponsive printer.............................................................................................................................................................. 215
Engine diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................217
Engine test ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................217
Defeating interlocks ....................................................................................................................................................................................................217
Control panel troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 219

viii
 Control panel system diagnostics (MFP)..................................................................................................................................................... 219
Control panel messages document (CPMD) ....................................................................................................................................................... 231
How to search for printer documentation.................................................................................................................................................. 231
Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview ....................................................................................... 235
Solve paper handling problems ....................................................................................................................................................................................237
Clear paper jams (SFP).............................................................................................................................................................................................237
Clear paper jams (MFP)............................................................................................................................................................................................270
Printer feeds incorrect page size ....................................................................................................................................................................300
Printer pulls from incorrect tray.........................................................................................................................................................................301
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models)..................................................................................................301
Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X ...................................................................................................................................................................301
Output is curled or wrinkled.................................................................................................................................................................................302
The printer does not pick up paper.................................................................................................................................................................303
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper........................................................................................................................................303
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (MFP)...........................................................303
Paper does not feed automatically ................................................................................................................................................................304
Image-quality troubleshooting......................................................................................................................................................................................304
Print-quality troubleshooting...............................................................................................................................................................................305
Copy-quality troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 321
Performance and connectivity troubleshooting...............................................................................................................................................331
Solve fax or email problems .................................................................................................................................................................................331
Solve performance problems .............................................................................................................................................................................331
Solve connectivity problems...............................................................................................................................................................................334

5 Removal and replacement......................................................................................................................................................................................................337

HP service and support ......................................................................................................................................................................................................337
Order parts, accessories, and supplies.................................................................................................................................................................338
Ordering..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................338
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................................................................................................................338
Supplies and accessories.....................................................................................................................................................................................339
Customer self-repair parts...................................................................................................................................................................................340
HP service and support ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 341
Assembly locations............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 342
Printer front view (SFP)............................................................................................................................................................................................. 342
Printer back view (SFP).............................................................................................................................................................................................343
Printer front view (MFP) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................344
Printer back view (MFP) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................345
Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and accessories .................................................................................................................................346
Removal and replacement: RM2-5392-010CN 250-sheet paper input tray.......................................................................346
Removal and replacement: RM2-5413-000CN optional Tray 3 cassette.............................................................................349
Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67966 multipurpose tray roller......................................................................................... 352
Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67965 Tray 2 paper pickup roller assembly..............................................................357
Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67964 Tray 2 separation roller assembly..................................................................363
Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67968 optional Tray 3 paper pickup roller assembly........................................368
Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67967 optional Tray 3 separation roller assembly...............................................375
Document feeder / scanner ............................................................................................................................................................................................381

ix
 Removal and replacement: Document feeder top cover assembly with rollers............................................................381
Removal and replacement: ISA lift assembly and slider pin (MFP)..........................................................................................384
Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner assembly (MFP) ............................................................................................389
Removal and replacement: External panels, covers, and doors (base printer).........................................................................402
Removal and replacement: Damper sheets ............................................................................................................................................402
Removal and replacement: Support shaft................................................................................................................................................404
Removal and replacement: Cartridge door assembly.....................................................................................................................406
Removal and replacement: Pressure-release link................................................................................................................................. 411
Removal and replacement: Left cover............................................................................................................................................................417
Removal and replacement: Right cover .......................................................................................................................................................424
Removal and replacement: Rear door assembly.................................................................................................................................430
Removal and replacement: Cassette rear cover .................................................................................................................................439
Removal and replacement: Control panel mount top cover (MFP)..........................................................................................450
Removal and replacement: Top cover (MFP)............................................................................................................................................ 454
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................475
Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover.....................................................................496
Removal and replacement: Top cover (SFP) .............................................................................................................................................499
Removal and replacement: Keypad and indication covers (SFP)..............................................................................................508
Removal and replacement: Paper delivery tray (output bin)......................................................................................................... 519
Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base printer).................................................................................... 542
Removal and replacement: Fuser.................................................................................................................................................................... 542
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly............................................................................................................................555
Removal and replacement: Main motor (M1)............................................................................................................................................586
Removal and replacement: Power switch printed circuit assembly....................................................................................... 592
Removal and replacement: Fax PCA and cable (MFP) .......................................................................................................................601
Removal and replacement: Fax cable guide (MFP)...............................................................................................................................610
Removal and replacement: USB port and cable (MFP)......................................................................................................................618
Removal and replacement: Island of Data (IOD) ...................................................................................................................................626
Removal and replacement: embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC).........................................................................................635
Removal and replacement: Formatter PCA.............................................................................................................................................. 642
Removal and replacement: Fan (FM1) ...........................................................................................................................................................654
Removal and replacement: Fan holder (FM1)...........................................................................................................................................662
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly .......................................................................................................................674
Removal and replacement: Formatter FFC ..............................................................................................................................................698
Removal and replacement: DC controller...................................................................................................................................................726
Removal and replacement: Connecting PCA...........................................................................................................................................755
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner FFC..................................................................................................................................... 787
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply...................................................................................................................819
Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply....................................................................................................................849
Removal and replacement: Control-panel assembly (SFP)............................................................................................................881
Removal and replacement: Control panel assembly (MFP) and control panel sub assemblies........................893
Removal and replacement: Control panel interconnect board (MFP) ...................................................................................899
Removal and replacement: Control panel mount base and interconnect board chassis (MFP).......................905
Removal and replacement: Control panel cable and cable cover (MFP) .............................................................................914
Removal and replacement: RM2-5375-000CN Tray 2 sensor assembly.............................................................................928
Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder.................................................................................................................................................................... 942
Removal and replacement: D9P29-67018 optional 550-sheet paper feeder................................................................... 942
Removal and replacement: RM2-5413-000CN optional Tray 3 cassette.............................................................................946

x
 Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67968 optional Tray 3 paper pickup roller assembly........................................950
Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67967 optional Tray 3 separation roller assembly...............................................957

6 Parts and diagrams.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................965

HP service and support .....................................................................................................................................................................................................965
Order parts by authorized service providers.....................................................................................................................................................966
Ordering..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................966
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................................................................................................................966
Supplies and accessories..................................................................................................................................................................................... 967
Customer self-repair parts...................................................................................................................................................................................968
How to use parts lists and diagrams........................................................................................................................................................................969
Document feeder and image scanner.....................................................................................................................................................................970
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M406/M407/E40040)........................................................................................................................................971
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M430/M431/E42540)........................................................................................................................................973
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 3) ..............................................................................................................................................975
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 3)..............................................................................................................................................977
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 3) .............................................................................................................................................979
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers...................................................................................................................................981
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body.........................................................................................................................982
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................984
HP service and support ..........................................................................................................................................................................................965
Order parts by authorized service providers .........................................................................................................................................966
Ordering ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................966
Orderable parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................966
Supplies and accessories ......................................................................................................................................................................... 967
Customer self-repair parts........................................................................................................................................................................968
How to use parts lists and diagrams.............................................................................................................................................................969
Document feeder and image scanner..........................................................................................................................................................970
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M406/M407/E40040).............................................................................................................................971
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M430/M431/E42540).............................................................................................................................973
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 3) ...................................................................................................................................975
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 3) ..................................................................................................................................977
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 3) ..................................................................................................................................979
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers .......................................................................................................................981
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body..............................................................................................................982
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................988
HP service and support ..........................................................................................................................................................................................965
Order parts by authorized service providers .........................................................................................................................................966
Ordering ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................966
Orderable parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................966
Supplies and accessories ......................................................................................................................................................................... 967

xi
 Customer self-repair parts........................................................................................................................................................................968
How to use parts lists and diagrams.............................................................................................................................................................969
Document feeder and image scanner..........................................................................................................................................................970
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M406/M407/E40040).............................................................................................................................971
Parts and diagrams: Covers (M430/M431/E42540).............................................................................................................................973
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 3) ...................................................................................................................................975
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 3) ..................................................................................................................................977
Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 3) ..................................................................................................................................979
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers .......................................................................................................................981
Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body..............................................................................................................982

Appendix A Certificate of Volatility......................................................................................................................................................................................992

Certificate of Volatility ........................................................................................................................................................................................................992

Appendix B Glossary of terms .................................................................................................................................................................................................997

Index........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1007

xii
1 Printer information, configurations, and
specifications

Learn about printer configuration and specifications.

Information (document feeder and scanner)

Learn about the document feeder and scanner.

Document feeder and scanner front view

Learn about the document feeder and scanner components.

Figure 1-1 Document feeder and scanner front view

3
2
1
4

Item Description

1 Document feeder

2 Jam access door

3 Input tray (source documents)

4 Output bin (source documents)

5 Flatbed scanner

Specifications (document feeder and scanner)

Learn about the document feeder and scanner specifications.

Technical specifications
Learn about the document feeder and scanner specifications.

Review the technical specifications for the document feeder and scanner.

Printer information, configurations, and specifications 1

 See www.hp.com/support/ljM430MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP or www.hp.com/support/
lj42540MFP for current information.

Table 1-1 Copy and scan specifications (document feeder and scanner)

Copy and scan features M430 M431 E42540

Copies and scans up to 32

pages per minute (ppm)

50-page document feeder

with dual-head scanning for
single-pass duplex copying
and scanning

Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB,

and Scan to Network Folder
option

Information (base printer)

Learn about the base printer.

Printer front view (SFP)

Identify the parts on the front of the printer (SFP).

Figure 1-2 Printer front view (SFP)

8
1
7

6
2

1
5
2

4
3

Number Description

1 Color non-touch control panel with 10-key keypad

2 Front door release button (access to the toner cartridge)

3 Power on/off button

4 Tray 3 (optional)

5 Tray 2

2 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Number Description

6 Tray 1

7 Output bin extension

8 Output bin

Printer back view (SFP)

Identify the parts on the back of the printer (SFP).

Figure 1-3 Printer rear view (SFP)

1
7
6 2
3
5
4

Number Description

1 USB port for job storage or connecting accessories

2 USB port for direct connection to a computer

3 Ethernet port

4 Power connection

5 Tray 3 (optional)

NOTE: Tray 3 extends when legal-size or A4-size paper is loaded.

6 Dust cover for Tray 2

NOTE: Dust cover flips up when legal-size or A4-size paper is loaded.

7 Serial number and product number label

8 Rear door (access for clearing jams)

Printer front view (MFP)

Identify the parts on the front of the printer (MFP).

Printer back view (SFP) 3

 Figure 1-4 Printer front view (MFP)
2
1

11 3
10
9
4
8
1
7
2

Number Description

1 Control panel (tilts up for easier viewing)

2 Document feeder

3 Scanner

4 Front door release button (access to the toner cartridge)

5 Power on/off button

6 Tray 3 (optional)

7 Tray 2

8 Tray 1

9 Output bin extension

10 Output bin

11 Walk-up USB port (for printing and scanning without a computer)

Printer back view (MFP)

Identify the parts on the back of the printer (MFP).

4 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Figure 1-5 Printer rear view (MFP)

1
9 2

8 3

7
4

Number Description

1 USB port (for job storage and private printing)

2 USB interface port

3 Ethernet port

4 Fax "line in" port (for attaching the fax phone line to the printer)

5 Power connection

6 Tray 3 (optional)

NOTE: Tray 3 extends when legal-size or A4-size paper is loaded.

7 Dust cover for Tray 2

NOTE: Dust cover flips up when legal-size or A4-size paper is loaded.

8 Serial number and printer number label

9 Rear door (provides access for clearing jams)

Configuration (base printer)

Learn about the base printer configurations.

Configuration (base printer SFP)

Learn about the base printer SFP configurations.

Configuration (base printer) 5

 Figure 1-6 HP LaserJet Enterprise M406/M407/E40040 printer

HP LaserJet Enterprise M406

● 40/38 pages per minute (letter/A4)

● FutureSmart 5 firmware

● Trusted platform module 2.0 (security)

● HP Web JetAdmin

● Automatic duplex printing

● 700-4,000 pages per month

● 350-sheet standard capacity

● 900-sheet maximum capacity

● 68.58 mm (2.7 in) color non-touchscreen control panel

● 1.0 GB RAM memory

● 4GB eMMC mass storage

● 550-sheet paper feeder (optional)

● 508 accessibility kit (optional)

HP LaserJet Enterprise M407

● Same features as the HP LaserJet Enterprise M406

● China/India specific supplies

HP LaserJet Managed E40040

● Same features as the HP LaserJet Enterprise M406

● Managed contractual cartridge with lowest possible cost per page

● Locking tray guides

● Smart device services (SDS) firmware features

Configuration (base printer MFP)

Learn about the base printer MFP configurations.

6 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Figure 1-7 HP LaserJet Enterprise M430/M431/E42540 printer

HP LaserJet Enterprise M430

● 40/38 pages per minute (letter/A4)

● FutureSmart 5 firmware

● Trusted platform module 2.0 (security)

● HP Web JetAdmin

● Automatic duplex printing

● 50-sheet document feeder (duplex scanning)

● Single pass double sided scan/copy

● Fax

● 700-4,000 pages per month

● 350-sheet standard capacity

● 900-sheet maximum capacity

● 109.22 mm (4.3 in) color touchscreen control panel

● 1.5 GB RAM memory

● 8GB eMMC mass storage

● 550-sheet paper feeder (optional)

● 508 accessibility kit (optional)

HP LaserJet Enterprise M431

● Same features as the HP LaserJet Enterprise M430

● China/India specific supplies

HP LaserJet Managed E42540

● Same features as the HP LaserJet Enterprise M430

● Managed contractual cartridge with lowest possible cost per page

Configuration (base printer MFP) 7

 ● Locking tray guides

● Smart device services (SDS) firmware features

Specifications (base printer)

Learn about the base printer specifications.

Technical specifications (M406/M407)

Review the technical specifications for the M406/M407 printers.

See www.hp.com/support/ljM406 or www.hp.com/support/ljM407 or www.hp.com/support/ljE40040 for

current information.

Product numbers for each model

● M406dn - #3PZ15A

● M407dn - #3PZ16A

Table 1-2 Paper handling specifications

Paper handling features M406dn M407dn

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (250-sheet capacity)

Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing

Table 1-3 Connectivity specifications

Connectivity features M406dn M407dn

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server accessory for Wi-Fi Optional Optional

connectivity and an additional Ethernet port

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory for printing from Optional Optional

mobile devices

HP Jetdirect 3100w accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE, NFC, and Optional Optional
proximity badge reading

Table 1-4 Print specifications

Print features M406dn M407dn

Prints 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 40 ppm on letter-

size paper

Prints 40 ppm on A4 and 42 ppm on letter-size paper with

Speed-up Option

8 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-4 Print specifications (continued)

Print features M406dn M407dn

Job storage and private printing

Table 1-5 Other specifications

Other features M406dn M407dn

1.0 GB base memory

4 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC)

68.58 mm (2.7 in) color non-touch control panel with 10-key

keypad

HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data that

passes through the printer

HP Accessibility Kit Optional Optional

HP Accessibility Assistant Optional Optional

HP USB Universal Card Reader Optional Optional

HP LEGIC Card Reader Optional Optional

Technical specifications (E40040)

Review the technical specifications for the E40040 printer.

See www.hp.com/support/lj40040 for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● E40040dn - #3PZ35A

Table 1-6 Paper handling specifications

Paper handling features E40040dn

Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (250-sheet capacity)

Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional

Automatic duplex printing

Table 1-7 Connectivity specifications

Connectivity features E40040dn

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server accessory for Wi-Fi connectivity and an additional Optional
Ethernet port

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory for printing from mobile devices Optional

Technical specifications (E40040) 9

 Table 1-7 Connectivity specifications (continued)

Connectivity features E40040dn

HP Jetdirect 3100w accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE, NFC, and proximity badge reading Optional

Table 1-8 Print specifications

Print features E40040dn

Prints 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

Prints 40 ppm on A4 and 42 ppm on letter-size paper with Speed-up Option

Job storage and private printing

Table 1-9 Other specifications

Other features E40040dn

1.0 GB base memory

4 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC)

68.58 mm (2.7 in) color non-touch control panel with 10-key keypad

HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data that passes through the printer

HP Accessibility Kit Optional

HP Accessibility Assistant Optional

HP USB Universal Card Reader Optional

HP LEGIC Card Reader Optional

Technical specifications (M430/M431)

Review the technical specifications for the M430/M431 MFP printers.

See www.hp.com/support/ljM430MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP or www.hp.com/support/

lj42540MFP for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● M430f - #3PZ55A

● M431f - #3PZ56A

Table 1-10 Paper handling specifications

Paper handling features M430f M431f

Tray 1 (50-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (250-sheet capacity)

Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing

10 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

Table 1-11 Connectivity specifications

Connectivity features M430f M431f

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0

Walk-up USB port

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server accessory for Wi-Fi Optional Optional

connectivity and an additional Ethernet port

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory for printing from Optional Optional

mobile devices

HP Jetdirect 3100w accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE, NFC, and Optional Optional
proximity badge reading

Table 1-12 Print specifications

Print features M430f M431f

Prints 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 40 ppm on letter-

size paper

Prints 40 ppm on A4 and 42 ppm on letter-size paper with

Speed-up Option

Job storage and private printing

Table 1-13 Copy and scan specifications

Copy and scan features M430f M431f

Copies and scans up to 32 pages per minute (ppm)

50-page document feeder with dual-head scanning for single-

pass duplex copying and scanning

Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, and Scan to Network Folder

options

Table 1-14 Other specifications

Other features M430f M431f

1.5 GB base memory

eMMC 16GB

Color touchscreen control panel

Fax features

HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data that

passes through the printer

HP Accessibility Kit Optional Optional

HP Accessibility Assistant Optional Optional

HP USB Universal Card Reader Optional Optional

Technical specifications (M430/M431) 11

 Table 1-14 Other specifications (continued)

Other features M430f M431f

HP LEGIC Card Reader Optional Optional

Technical specifications (E42540)

Review the technical specifications for the E42540 MFP printer.

See www.hp.com/support/ljE42540MFP for current information.

Product numbers for each model

● E42540f - #3PZ75A

Table 1-15 Paper handling specifications

Paper handling features E42540f

Tray 1 (50-sheet capacity)

Tray 2 (250-sheet capacity)

Optional 550-sheet accessory tray Optional

Automatic duplex printing

Table 1-16 Connectivity specifications

Connectivity features E42540f

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0

Walk-up USB port

HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server accessory for Wi-Fi connectivity and an additional Optional
Ethernet port

HP Jetdirect 3000w NFC/Wireless Accessory for printing from mobile devices Optional

HP Jetdirect 3100w accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE, NFC, and proximity badge reading Optional

Table 1-17 Print specifications

Print features E42540f

Prints 38 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and 40 ppm on letter-size paper

Prints 40 ppm on A4 and 42 ppm on letter-size paper with Speed-up Option

Job storage and private printing

12 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-18 Copy and scan specifications

Copy and scan features E42540f

Copies and scans up to 32 pages per minute (ppm)

50-page document feeder with dual-head scanning for single-pass duplex copying
and scanning

Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, and Scan to Network Folder options

Table 1-19 Other specifications

Other features E42540f

1.5 GB base memory

eMMC 16GB

Color touchscreen control panel

Fax features

HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data that passes through the printer

HP Accessibility Kit Optional

HP Accessibility Assistant Optional

HP USB Universal Card Reader Optional

HP LEGIC Card Reader Optional

Printer dimensions (SFP)

Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.

Figure 1-8 Dimensions for the SFP printer

1 1

2 2

3
3

Printer dimensions (SFP) 13

 Table 1-20 Dimensions for the SFP printer

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Width 381 mm (15 in) 381 mm (15 in)

2. Height 220 mm (8.7 in) 241 mm (9.5 in)

3. Depth 357 mm (14 in) 781 mm (30.8 in)

Weight (with cartridge) 8.5 kg (18.74 lb) 8.5 kg (18.74 lb)

Figure 1-9 Dimensions for the optional 550-sheet tray

1 1

2 2

3 3 3

Table 1-21 Dimensions for the optional 550-sheet tray

Measurement Tray fully closed Tray fully opened

1. Width 381 mm (15 in) 381 mm (15 in)

2. Height 131 mm (5.1 in) 131 mm (5.1 in)

3. Depth 357 mm (14 in) 781 mm (30.8 in)

Weight 3.7 kg (8.2 lb) 3.7 kg (8.2 lb)

14 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Figure 1-10 Dimensions for the printer with the optional 550-sheet tray (SFP)
1 1

HEWL
ETT-P
ACKA
RD

2 2

2
2

3
2 3
3

Table 1-22 Dimensions for the printer with the optional 550-sheet tray (SFP)

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Width 381 mm (15 in) 381 mm (15 in)

2. Height 349 mm (13.7 in) 372 mm (14.6 in)

3. Depth 357 mm (14 in) 781 mm (30.8 in)

Weight (with cartridge) 12.2 kg (26.9 lb) 12.2 kg (26.9 lb)

Printer dimensions (MFP)

Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.

Printer dimensions (MFP) 15

 Figure 1-11 Dimensions for the MFP printer
1

2
1
2
HEWL
ETT-P
ACKA
RD

2 3
2

Table 1-23 Dimensions for the MFP printer

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Width 420 mm (16.5 in) 453 mm (17.8 in)

2. Height 323 mm (12.7 in) 577 mm (22.7 in)

3. Depth 390 mm (15.3 in) 839 mm (33 in)

Weight (with cartridge) 13.01 kg (28.68 lb) 13.01 kg (28.68 lb)

Figure 1-12 Dimensions for the optional 550-sheet tray

1 1

2 2

3 3 3

16 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

 Table 1-24 Dimensions for the optional 550-sheet tray

Measurement Tray fully closed Tray fully opened

1. Width 381 mm (15 in) 381 mm (15 in)

2. Height 131 mm (5.1 in) 131 mm (5.1 in)

3. Depth 357 mm (14 in) 781 mm (30.8 in)

Weight 3.7 kg (8.2 lb) 3.7 kg (8.2 lb)

Figure 1-13 Dimensions for the printer with the optional 550-sheet tray (MFP)
1

2
2 HEWL
HE WLET
ETT-P
T-PAC
ACKA
KARD
RD

2 2

3
3
3
3

Table 1-25 Dimensions for the printer with the optional 550-sheet tray (MFP)

Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened

1. Width 420 mm (16.5 in) 453 mm (17.8 in)

2. Height 452 mm (17.8 in) 706 mm (27.8 in)

3. Depth 390 mm (15.3 in) 839 mm (33 in)

Weight (with cartridge) 16.71 kg (36.83 lb) 16.71 kg (36.83 lb)

Printer space requirements

Learn about the printer space requirements

HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions to make sure there is sufficient
space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation. See Printer dimensions (SFP) on page
13 and/or Printer dimensions (MFP) on page 15.

Printer space requirements 17

 Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power
specifications.

See www.hp.com/support/ljM406 or www.hp.com/support/ljM407 or www.hp.com/support/ljM430MFP

or www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljE40040 or www.hp.com/support/
ljE42540MFP for current information.

CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-26 Operating-environment specifications

Environment Recommended Storage

Temperature 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 10° to 32.5°C (50° to 90.5°F)

Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% RH

Information (input devices)

Learn about the printer input devices.

550-sheet paper feeder front view

Identify the pars on the 550-sheet paper feeder.

Figure 1-14 550-sheet paper feeder front view

Number Description

1 Drawer connector

2 Tray 3 (cassette)

3 550-sheet paper feeder (whole unit)

18 Chapter 1 Printer information, configurations, and specifications

2 Printer installation and maintenance

Learn about printer installation and maintenance.

Document feeder / scanner

Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner installation and maintenance.

Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder (MFP)
Learn about cleaning the document feeder rollers and pads.

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the document feeder rollers and pads which can affect
performance.

NOTE: The figures in this topic show a typical MFP printer. However, the procedure is correct for all
MFP printers.

1. . Lift the document-feeder latch.

Printer installation and maintenance 19

 2. . Open the document-feeder cover.

3. . Remove any visible lint or dust from each

of the feed rollers and the separation pad
using compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth
moistened with warm water.

NOTE: Lift up the roller assembly to access

and clean the second roller.

4. . Close the document-feeder cover.

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges

Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic
backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed
pages have streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.

View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.

1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.

20 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

2. Open the scanner lid.

3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft
cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.

CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly
on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the printer.

NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder,
be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).

4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges 21

 5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.

Base printer
Learn about the base printer installation and maintenance.

Remove and replace the cartridge

Follow these steps to replace the toner cartridge.

View a video of how to replace the toner cartridge

1. . Press the front door release button.

2. . Open the front door.

22 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

3. . Remove the used toner cartridge from the
printer.

4. . Remove the new toner cartridge package from

the box, and then pull the release tab on the
packaging.

5. . Remove the toner cartridge from the opened

packaging shell. Place the used toner cartridge
in the shell for recycling.

Remove and replace the cartridge 23

 6. . Holding the toner cartridge on both ends, gently
rock the cartridge end to end to distribute the
toner evenly inside the cartridge.

7. . Align the toner cartridge with the tracks inside

the printer, and install the toner cartridge until it
is firmly seated.

8. . Close the front door.

Print a cleaning page

Learn how to print a cleaning page.

Print a cleaning page from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

24 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Cleaning page, and then press the OK button.

TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then press
the OK button to print the cleaning page.

NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until
the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

Print a cleaning page from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

● Calibration/Cleaning

3. Touch Cleaning Page, and then touch the Print button to print the cleaning page.

NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until
the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.

Automatic cleaning page

Learn how to set up automatic cleaning page intervals.

Enable and configure auto cleaning from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Cleaning page, and then press the OK button.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the desired automatic cleaning page interval, and then press the
OK button to print the cleaning page.

6. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Done (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then press
the OK button.

Enable and configure auto cleaning from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

Automatic cleaning page 25

 ● Calibration/Cleaning

● Cleaning Page

3. Touch the desired automatic cleaning page interval, and then touch the Done button.

Clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad

Learn about cleaning the Tray 1 roller and separation pad.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-1 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67966 Tray 1 Pickup Roller

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove the roller

Follow these steps to remove the roller.

An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

26 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

1. Press the door-release button, and then open the toner-cartridge door

Figure 2-1 Open the toner-cartridge door

2 1

2. Release two tabs between the roller collar and roller, and then rotate the top of the roller out and
away from the printer.

Figure 2-2 Release the roller

Remove the roller 27

 3. Remove the roller.

Figure 2-3 Remove the roller

Clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad

Carefully clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad.

■ Clean the Tray 1 roller and separation pad.

NOTE: With the Tray 1 roller removed the separation pad is accessible in the printer (it does not
need to be removed to be cleaned.

■ Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

CAUTION: When handling the roller and pad, avoid touching the spongy surfaces. Skin oils and
fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems.

Figure 2-4 Clean the roller and pad

28 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

Install the roller
Follow these steps to install the roller.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

1. Position the pickup roller with the pins in the provided slots on the holder, and then rotate the top of
the roller up and toward the printer.

Figure 2-5 Install the roller

2. Continue to rotate the top of the roller toward the printer (callout 1), until two tabs (callout 2) snap
into place.

Figure 2-6 Engage two tabs

Install the roller 29

 3. Close the toner-cartridge door

Figure 2-7 Close the toner-cartridge door

Clean the Tray 2 rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 2 rollers.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

IMPORTANT: The originally installed Tray 2 pickup roller might look different than what is included in
the kit below (3PZ15-67966). However, the roller supplied in the kit is correct for the 4001-4004 and
4101-4104 printers.

For more information, see the Additional information section at the end of this topic.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-2 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67965 Tray 2 Pickup Roller

3PZ15-67964 Separation assembly (Tray 2)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

30 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Additional information
The following figure and table describe the design differences for the Tray2 pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-8 Tray 2 pickup roller

3
5
4

Table 2-3 Tray 2 pickup roller differences

Item Description

1 Tray 2 pickup roller: Included in kit 3PZ15-67966.

2 Tray 2 pickup roller: Installed in 4001-4004 and 4101-4104 printers during manufacturing.

3 Feed roller: Rubber reduction in width (0.33mm).

4 Pick roller: Rubber reduction in width.

5 Pick core: Thrust decision changes to accommodate rubber width reductions.

Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 31
 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-9 Remove the tray

Remove the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2).

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

1. Carefully rotate the printer backward.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the rear cassette cover, keep it in the closed position

Figure 2-10 Tilt the printer backward

32 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

2. Continue rotate the printer backward until it rests on the rear cover, bottom-side face forward.

CAUTION: MFP printers only: The document feeder is not captive and can unexpectedly open
when the printer is tilted backward.

Figure 2-11 Place the printer bottom-side face forward

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the roller holder toward the left side of the printer to
release it.

Figure 2-12 Release one tab

Remove the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2) 33

 4. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 2-13 Remove the roller assembly

Clean the Tray 2 rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 2 rollers.

■ Clean the Tray 2 rollers.

NOTE: The roller in the tray (cassette) can be cleaned without removing it from the tray.

■ Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

Figure 2-14 Clean the rollers

Install the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2)

Follow these steps to install the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2).

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

34 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

1. Position the roller holder assembly in the printer as shown, and then slide it toward the right side of
the printer.

Figure 2-15 Install the roller holder

2. Make sure that the tab snaps into place.

Figure 2-16 Check the tab

Install the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2) 35

 3. Carefully rotate the printer forward.

Figure 2-17 Rotate the printer forward

4. Continue rotate the printer forward until it rests in the operational position.

Figure 2-18 Place the printer in the operational position

Install Tray 2
Follow these steps to install Tray 2.

36 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 ■ Slide the tray straight into the printer to install it.

Figure 2-19 Install the tray

Input devices
Learn about input device installation and maintenance.

Clean the Tray 3 rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 3 rollers.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

If the part is damaged and cannot be cleaned, use the table below to identify the correct part number
for your printer. To order the part, go to www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-4 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67968 Tray pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Input devices 37
 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

Remove optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to remove optional Tray 3.

1. Pull the tray straight out of the printer until it stops.

Figure 2-20 Pull the tray out of the printer

38 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 2. Slightly lift up on the front of the tray to release it, and then continue to pull the tray out of the
accessory to remove it.

Figure 2-21 Release and remove the tray

Remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

1. Carefully turn the accessory over to expose the roller assembly.

Figure 2-22 Turn the accessory over

Remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 39

 2. Slide the roller holder to the right to compress the spring-loaded shaft and release the assembly.

Figure 2-23 Release the roller assembly

3. Rotate the end of the assembly up and away from the accessory.

Figure 2-24 Rotate the assembly up

40 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 4. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 2-25 Remove the roller assembly

Clean the 550-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3) rollers

Learn about cleaning the Tray 3 rollers.

TIP: The roller in the tray (cassette) can be cleaned without removing it from the tray.

■ Clean the 550-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3) rollers.

■ Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

Figure 2-26 Clean the rollers

Install the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Follow these steps to install the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

Clean the 550-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3) rollers 41

 CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

1. Install the right end of the assembly on the spring-loaded shaft (callout 1), and then slide it to the
right to compress the shaft (callout 2).

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the pin on the back of the holder (callout 3) is inserted in the slot
(callout 4) in the lever arm. If the pin is not correctly installed, the accessory will not pick paper.

Figure 2-27 Install the roller assembly

2
3

2. Rotate the left end of the assembly down and into place (callout 1), and then slide the assembly to
the left (callout 2) to engage the drive end of the assembly with the drive shaft (callout 3).

Figure 2-28 Engage the assembly

42 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

 3. Push down and then release the tray-roller actuator (callout 1) and observe the roller assembly. It
should move up and down (callout 2) in response to the actuator.

NOTE: If it does not, remove the roller assembly and reinstall it making sure that the pin on the
back of the assembly is in the lever arm. See the previous steps in this section.

Figure 2-29 Check the installation

2
1

Install optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to install optional Tray 3.

1. With the tray at a slight angle, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the accessory, and then
partially slide the tray into the accessory.

Figure 2-30 Install the tray

Install optional Tray 3 43

 2. Push the tray straight into the accessory to close it

Figure 2-31 Close the tray

44 Chapter 2 Printer installation and maintenance

3 Theory of operation

Learn about the printer theory of operation.

Document feeder / scanner

Learn about the printer document feeder and scanner components.

NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.

Document feeder simplex operation

Learn about document feeder operation.

The document feeder will not function when the document feeder cover is open. The paper path is
incomplete if the document feeder cover is lifted from the glass.

When the printer duplex scans from the document feeder, the paper moves through one time, because
the document feeder has a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner for side two which is scanned
simultaneously with side one.

NOTE: Duplex scanning is model specific. Some printer models might not support duplex scanning
and printing.

The standard operation of the document feeder consists of the standby (paper loading) mode, pick, feed,
and lift steps:

● Standby (paper-loading) mode

In standby mode, the lift plate is in the down position. When a document is loaded into the input tray,
the paper-present sensor detects its presence.

When a copy/scan is initiated, the document feeder motor engages the gear train and raises the lift
plate until the document makes contact with the pick roller. The document feeder then begins the
pick, feed, and lower sequence.

● Pick

The pick roller rotates and moves one or more sheets forward into the document feeder where
the sheets engage with the separation roller. The separation roller contacts the document feeder
separation pad, which separates multiple sheets into a single sheet.

● Feed

The single sheet continues through the document feeder paper path (aided by the pre-scan rollers)
until the leading edge of the page activates the top-of-form sensor. Activation of this sensor initiates
the scan process, and the scanner acquires the image as the document moves over the document
feeder glass. The post-scan rollers then eject the sheet into the output area. The pick and feed steps
are repeated as long as paper is detected by the paper-present sensor.

● Home

Theory of operation 45
 When the top-of-form sensor detects the trailing edge of the last page, the last sheet is ejected and
the motor turns on a sequence that rests the separation floor back down in standby mode, which
allows it to detect when more media is loaded.

Scanning and image capture system

Learn about the scanning and image capture system.

NOTE: This section is for MFP printers only.

The flatbed image scanner captures an electronic image of the document on the glass. The scanner
does this by illuminating the document with LEDs (red, green, and blue) and capturing the image in the
image sensor to create an electronic format of the document. The flatbed scanner consists of three
main elements.

● CIS scanner

The CIS (contact image sensor) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red,
green, and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line),
and the optical system captures each color in a single row of CCD sensors that cover the entire
page width. Because only one color is captured for each line per exposure, the three colors are
recombined electronically to create the full color image. For monochromatic scans or copies, all
three LEDs are illuminated to create a white light for the scan so the raster line can be captured in
one exposure.

● Mechanical drive system

The drive system moves the CIS scanner along the document length to create the image. In this
printer, the drive system consists of a small DC motor with an optical encoder, a drive belt, and
a guide rod. The speed of the drive system is proportional to the scan resolution (300 ppi is
much faster than 1200 ppi) and also proportional to the type of scan (color scans are slower than
monochromatic scans).

● Image processing system (formatter)

The formatter processes the scanner data into either a copy or a scan to the computer. For copies,
the image data is sent directly to the printer without being transmitted to the computer. Depending
on user selections for the copy settings, the formatter enhances the scanner data significantly
before sending it to the printer. Image data is captured at 300 ppi for copies and is user selectable
for scans to the computer. Each pixel is represented by 8 bits for each of the three colors (256 levels
for each color), for a total of 24 bits per pixel (24-bit color).

Base printer
Learn about the base printer components.

Basic operation
Learn about the basic operation of the printer.

The printer routes all high-level processes through the formatter, which stores font information,
processes the print image, and communicates with the host computer.

The basic printer operation comprises the following systems:

46 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 ● The engine-control system, which includes the high-voltage and low-voltage power supplies (HVPS
and LVPS), fuser control circuits, and the DC controller printed circuit assembly (PCA)

● The laser/scanner system, which forms the latent image on the photosensitive drum

● The image-formation system, which transfers a toner image onto the paper

● The pickup, feed and delivery system, which uses a system of rollers and belts to transport the
paper through the printer

● Accessory (optional paper feeders)

Figure 3-1 Relationship between the main printer systems

Laser scanner system

Image-formation system

Engine-control system

Pickup, feed, and delivery system

Accessory

Sequence of operation
Learn about the printer sequence of operation.

The DC controller PCA controls the operating sequence, as described in the following table.

Table 3-1 Sequence of operation

Period Duration Description

Waiting From the time the power is turned on, the door is ● Heats the fuser film in the fuser
closed, or when the printer exits sleep mode until
the printer is ready for printing. ● Detects the toner cartridge

● Rotates and stops each motor

● Rotates and stops each fan

● Cleans the transfer roller

Sequence of operation 47
 Table 3-1 Sequence of operation (continued)

Period Duration Description

Standby From the end of the waiting sequence, the ● Is in the Ready state
last rotation until the formatter receives a print
command, or until the printer is turned off. ● Enters Sleep mode if the formatter sends the
sleep command

● Rotates and stops each fan

Initial rotation From the time the formatter receives a print ● Rotates each motor
command until the paper enters the paper path.
● Rotates each fan

● Activates the high-voltage power supply

● Prepares the laser/scanner unit

● Warms the fuser to the correct temperature

Printing From the time the first sheet of paper enters the ● Forms the image on the photosensitive drums
paper path until the last sheet has passed through
the fuser. ● Transfers the toner to the paper

● Fuses the toner image onto the paper

Last rotation From the time the last sheet of paper exits the fuser ● Stops each motor
until the motors stop rotating.
● Stops each fan

● Moves the last printed sheet into the output

bin

● Stops the high-voltage power supply

● Stops the laser/scanner unit

● Turns the fuser heater off

● If another print command is received, the

printer enters the initial rotation period when
the last rotation is complete.

Formatter-control system
Learn about how the formatter operates.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of
printer it is installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.

Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:

● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges information
change and might make a product unusable

● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors

If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in
the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used
formatter is installed.

48 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 IMPORTANT: When a formatter PCA or DC controller is replaced a pairing operation must be
completed to make the printer functional.

The formatter performs the following functions:

● Controls the sleep delay function

● Receives and processes print data from the various printer inputs

● Monitors control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel
and the network or bi-directional interface

● Develops and coordinates data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA

● Stores customer configuration settings and paper types.

● Stores font information

● Communicates with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface

The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into image
information and instructions that control the printing process. The DC controller PCA synchronizes the
image formation system with the paper input and output systems, and then signals the formatter to
send the print image data.

Power management
Learn about printer power management.

Use the following power management settings to select power saving options:

Single function printer (SFP)

● Sleep delay

● Shutdown mode

● Disable shutdown

Multi function printer (MFP)

● Sleep mode

● Shutdown after sleep

● Disable shutdown

Power management conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable length of time.
When the printer is in sleep mode, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the printer retains all
printer settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is a 1-minute idle time. The setting
can be changed or turned off from the control-panel menus.

The printer exits sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs.

● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the serial port.

● A print job is received via wireless or fax.

● The control panel is touched (button press or touchscreen touch depending on model).

Power management 49
 ● The power button is pressed for 3 seconds or less.

● A document is loaded in the document feeder (MFP only).

● An operational live network Ethernet cable or fax line is attached.

● Inserting a USB drive in either the front USB port or the USB port on the back of the device.

● Connecting a USB cable to an operating computer.

● Opening the cartridge (front) door or the rear door.

TIP: Error messages override the sleep delay message. The printer enters sleep mode at the
selected time, but the error message continues to appear.

Non-touchscreen control panels

1. At the control panel, press the OK button to access the Setup menu.

2. Open the following menus:

● Power Management

● Sleep Delay

3. Use the arrow keys to select the time for the Sleep Delay, and then press the OK button.

Touchscreen control panels

1. From the printer control panel, swipe down and then select the Setup icon.

2. Open the following menus:

● Power Management

● Sleep Mode

3. Set the time for the Sleep Mode function.

Printer job language (PJL)

Learn about printer job language (PJL).

PJL is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL and PostScript (PS). With
standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions.

● Dynamic I/O switching: The printer can be configured with a host on each I/O by using dynamic
I/O switching. Even when the printer is offline, it can receive data from more than one I/O
simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full.

● Context-sensitive switching: The printer can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of
each job and configure itself to serve that personality.

● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next: For example, if a print job is
sent to the printer in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are
formatted for landscape printing.

Printer management language (PML)

Learn about printer management language (PML)

50 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 PML allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back from the printer through the I/O
ports.

Control panel
Learn about the control panel.

The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from the control panel.

Walk-up USB
Learn about the walk-up USB function.

NOTE: Touchscreen models only.

This printer features printing from a USB flash drive. This printer supports printing the following types of
files from the USB flash drive.

● .pdf

● .jpg

● .prn and .PRN

● .pcl and .PCL

● ps and .PS

● doc and .docx

● .ppt and .pptx

When a USB flash drive is inserted into the front of the printer, the control panel will display the USB
Flash Drive menu. The files present on the USB flash drive can be accessed from the control panel.

NOTE: The USB flash drive must be formatted using the FAT32 format. Drives formatted with NTFS
will not work.

Any files in a supported format on the USB flash drive can be printed directly from the printer control
panel. Pages also can be scanned and saved to the USB flash drive from the control panel.

Low end data model (LEDM) overview

Learn about the low-end data model (LEDM).

The low-end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the
dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol,
event, security, and discovery methods.

CPU
Learn about the printer microprocessor.

The formatter incorporates a 1200 MHz processor.

Input/output (I/O)
Learn about printer I/O functionality.

Control panel 51
 NOTE: Some of the following printer I/O functions are model specific. For example, not all printer
models have a fax function.

Universal serial bus (USB)

The printer includes a USB 2.0 connection.

Universal serial bus (USB) hosts

The printer includes USB hosts for USB flash drive and job storage.

10/100/1000 networking
The printer includes a 10/100/1000 network (Ethernet) connection.

Fax
The printer includes a fax phone line connection.

NOTE: For some fax model printers, the telephone extension port is plugged and not operational.

Walk-up USB
The port is located on or near the control panel.

NOTE: Model specific feature.

Wireless
Wireless products contain a wireless card to enable 802.11b/g/n wireless communication with dual band
support for 2.4Ghz and 5 Ghz.

NOTE: Wireless models only.

Memory
Learn about printer memory functionality.

NOTE: Some of the following printer memory functions are model specific. For example, not all printer
models have Flash memory.

Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and
upgrade the firmware.

NOTE: For more information about a specific printer model, see the Printer information,
configurations, and specifications section in the service manual.

Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM)

The printer uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print environment
configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected.

52 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Flash memory
NAND: Stores fax memory.

Random access memory

The printer uses the following RAM:

● SFP: 1.0 GB

● MFP: 1.5 GB

HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)

The HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a
variety of font- and data-compression methods.

NOTE: MEt is available only in PCL mode; it is not functional when printing in PS mode.

Engine-control system
Learn about the printer engine control system.

The engine-control system receives commands from the formatter and interacts with the other main
systems to coordinate all printer functions.

Figure 3-2 Engine-control system

Engine-control system
Laser scanner system

DC controller

Image-formation system
Low-voltage power supply

Formatter

High-voltage power supplies

Pickup, feed, and delivery
system

Fuser power supply

Accessory

DC controller
Learn about the DC controller.

Engine-control system 53
 The DC controller controls the operation of the printer and its components. The DC controller starts the
printer operation when the printer power is turned on and the power supply sends DC voltage to the
DC controller. After the printer enters the standby period, the DC controller sends out various signals to
operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based on the print command and image data
that the host computer sends.

Figure 3-3 DC controller block diagram

Motor

Switch
Clutch

Fan High-voltage Solenoid

power supply
Transfer roller
Photointerrupter

Cartridge Switch

DC controller LED

Sensor

Accessory

Fuser Control panel

Low-voltage Formatter
AC input power supply

Laser scanner ass’y

Table 3-2 Printer electrical components

Component type Abbreviation Component name

Motor M1 Fuser motor

Motor M3 Scanner motor

Fan FM1 Main fan

54 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-2 Printer electrical components (continued)

Component type Abbreviation Component name

Solenoid SL1 Cassette pickup solenoid

Solenoid SL2 Tray 1 (MP) tray pickup solenoid

Solenoid SL3 Duplex switchback solenoid (duplex models only)

Clutch CL1 Duplex re-pickup clutch (duplex models only)

Switch SW1 Power switch

Switch SW101 Cartridge (front) door switch

Photo interrupter PS1a Media width sensor

Photo interrupter PS2b Duplex feed sensor (duplex models only)

Photo interrupter PS1 Cassette media out sensor

Photo interrupter PS2 Top sensor

Photo interrupter PS3 Tray 1 (MP) tray media out sensor

Photo interrupter PS4 Output bin media-full sensor

Photo interrupter PS13 Fuser output sensor

Sensor TH1 Environment sensor

LED LED1 Power supply LED1

Motors
Learn about the printer motors.

The printer has two motors. The motors drive the components in the paper-feed and image-formation
systems.

The DC controller monitors the fuser motor and the scanner motor to determine if a motor has failed. It
notifies the formatter when it encounters the following conditions:

● Start up failure: the motor does not reach a specified speed within a specified time from when the
motor starts.

● Rotational failure: the rotational speed of the motor is not in the specified range for a specified time
after the motor reaches a specified speed.

Table 3-3 Motors

Abbreviation Name Purpose Failure detection

M1 Fuser motor Drives the pressure roller Yes

and delivery roller; the
pressurization and release
of the pressure roller;
and the engagement and
disengagement of the
primary and secondary
transfer rollers

M3 Scanner motor Drives the scanner mirror Yes

Motors 55
 Fans
Learn about the printer fans.

The printer has one fan for preventing the temperature from rising in the printer and for cooling the
printed pages.

The DC controller determines if there is a fan failure and notifies the formatter if the fan locks for a
specified time from when the fan starts.

Table 3-4 Fans

Abbreviation Name Cooling area Type Speed

FM1 Main fan Inside of printer Intake Full

Solenoids
Learn about the printer solenoids.

The printer has three solenoids.

Table 3-5 Solenoids

Abbreviation Component name

SL1 Cassette pickup solenoid

SL2 Tray 1 (MP) tray pickup solenoid

SL3 Duplex switchback solenoid (duplex models only)

Clutches
Learn about the printer clutches.

The printer has two clutches.

Table 3-6 Clutches

Abbreviation Component name

CL1 Duplex re-pickup clutch (duplex models only)

CL2 Feed clutch

Switches
Learn about the printer switches.

The printer has two switches.

Table 3-7 Switches

Abbreviation Component name

SW1 Power switch

SW101 Cartridge (front) door switch

56 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

Sensors
Learn about the printer sensors.

The printer has one sensor.

Table 3-8 Sensors

Abbreviation Component name

TH1 Environment sensor

Low-voltage power supply

Learn about the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

The low-voltage power-supply (LVPS) circuit converts the AC power from the wall receptacle into the DC
voltage that the printer components use.

Sensors 57
 Figure 3-4 Low-voltage power-supply circuit
AC input

Low-voltage power supply

Fuse
FU101
Fuser control Fuser
circuit

Fuse
FU102 Power switch
SW1

Frequency FREQSNS_LVT
detection circuit
PWRSW

+24VD
Rectifying
circuit +24VA
+24VA DC controller
FET

+24V
generation
circuit

+3.3VC +3.3VB

+3.3VA +3.3VA
FET FET

+3.3V
generation
circuit
+24VBSNS

Protection +24VC
circuit +24VB +24VA

FET

Interlock switch
SW101

High-voltage power supply

Table 3-9 LVPS voltages

DC power supply Reference item Description

+24V +24VA Constantly supplied

NOTE: Becomes 4.5V during active OFF or inactive

OFF.

+24V +24VB Stopped when cartridge door is opened. (SW101)

NOTE: Stopped during active OFF or inactive OFF.

58 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-9 LVPS voltages (continued)

DC power supply Reference item Description

+24V +24VC Stopped when cartridge door is opened (SW101)

NOTE: Stopped during active OFF or inactive OFF.

+24V +24VD Constantly supplied

NOTE: Stopped during active OFF or inactive OFF.

+3.3V +3.3VA Constantly supplied

+3.3V +3.3VB Constantly supplied

NOTE: Stopped during active OFF or inactive OFF.

+3.3V CL1 Constantly supplied

NOTE: Stopped during active OFF or inactive OFF.

Over-current/over-voltage protection
Learn about low-voltage power supply over-current/over-voltage protection.

The low-voltage power supply has a protective function against overcurrent and overvoltage conditions
to prevent failures in the power supply circuit. If an overcurrent or overvoltage event occurs, the system
automatically cuts off the output voltage.

If the DC power is not being supplied from the low-voltage power supply, the protective function might
have activated. In this case, turn off the power switch, and then unplug the power cord. Do not plug in the
power cord or turn the power switch on again until the root cause is found.

In addition, two fuses in the low-voltage power supply protect against an overcurrent event. If an
overcurrent event occurs in the AC line, the fuse blows and cuts off the power distribution.

Safety
Learn about low-voltage power supply safety operation.

For personal safety, the printer interrupts +24VB and +24VC power when the cartridge door detection
switch is turned off. This stops DC power supply to the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).

The remote switch control circuit turns on or off the printer power so that the AC power flows even the
power switch is turned off. Unplug the printer power cord before disassembling the printer.

Low-voltage power supply functions

Learn about low-voltage power supply functions.

The printer has the following low-voltage power supply functions.

Table 3-10 Low-voltage power supply functions

Failure detective function Applied

Sleep mode No

Power supply voltage detection No

Automatic power OFF No

Over-current/over-voltage protection 59
 Table 3-10 Low-voltage power supply functions (continued)

Failure detective function Applied

Automatic power ON/OFF No

Active OFF Yes

Inactive OFF Yes

Network mode No

Power switch illumination Yes

Low-voltage power supply failure detection Yes

Power save mode No

High-voltage power supply

Learn about the high-voltage power supply.

The DC controller controls the high-voltage power supply (HVPS) to generate biases. The high-voltage
power supply delivers the high-voltage biases to the following image-formation components used to
transfer toner during the image-formation process:

● Primary charging roller (in the toner cartridge)

● Developing roller (in the toner cartridge)

● Transfer roller

● Pressure roller

High-voltage power supply circuits

Learn about high-voltage power supply circuits.

The high-voltage power supply contains the following separate circuits.

60 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-5 High-voltage power supply circuits
DC controller High-voltage power supply

Cartridge
Primary
PRI
charging bias To primary charge roller
circuit
To developing roller

Developing DEV Photosensitive drum

bias circuit
Transfer roller

Transfer bias TR
circuit

Table 3-11 High-voltage power supply circuits

Circuit Description

Primary-charging-bias generation The primary charging bias negatively charges the

surface of the photosensitive drum to prepare for image
formation.

Developing-bias generation The developing bias adheres toner to an electrostatic

latent image formed on the photosensitive drum.

Transfer-bias generation The primary transfer bias transfers the toner from each
photosensitive drum onto the page.

Fuser bias
Learn about high-voltage power supply fuser bias.

The printer uses on-demand fusing. The fuser bias is DC positive for improved print quality. The fuser
bias circuit is located in the high-voltage power supply, HVPS (T).

Fuser control
Learn about fuser control functions.

The DC controller and components in the fuser perform the following functions related to fuser
operation:

● Control fuser temperature

● Detect fuser failures

● Prevent excessive temperature rise

Fuser bias 61
 ● Detect remaining life in the fuser

● Determine if the correct fuser is installed

Fuser circuits
Learn about the fuser circuits.

The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit control the fuser temperature
according to commands from the DC controller. The fuser consists of the following major components.

Figure 3-6 Fuser components

Fuser film
H1

TP1

TH1
Pressure roller

FUSER TEMPERATURE signal

FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal

Fuser heater Fuser heater

DC controller control circuit safety circuit

Fuser control circuit

Low-voltage power supply

Table 3-12 Fuser components

Component type Abbreviation Name Function

Heaters H1 Fuser main heater Heats the center of the

fuser film assembly

Thermistors (contact type) TH1 Main thermistor Detects the center

temperature of the fuser
heater

Thermoswitch (contact TP1 Thermoswitch Prevents an abnormal

type) temperature rise in the
fuser heater

Fuser control functions

Learn about the fuser control functions.

62 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

The fuser uses the following control circuits.

Figure 3-7 Fuser control

Low-voltage power supply DC controller

Fuser control

Current detection FREQSNS

circuit

Fuser heater FSRD

control circuit
+24V

RLYD
Relay control
circuit
RL101

Fuser heater FSRTH

safety circuit

Fuser film ass’y

TH1 TP1 Fuser heater (H1)

TP1: Thermal switch

TH1: Thermistor

Pressure roller

Fuser

Table 3-13 Fuser control functions

Failure detection function Applied

Fuser temperature control Yes

Fuser failure detection Yes

Fuser control functions 63

 Table 3-13 Fuser control functions (continued)

Failure detection function Applied

Frequency detection circuit failure detection Yes

Fuser pressure release mechanism failure detection No

Fuser type discrepancy detection No

Fuser type identification detection Yes

Fuser presence detection No

Fuser life detection No

Relay failure detection No

Pressure roller cleaning Yes

Fuser heater protection

Learn about fuser heater protection.

Fuser heater protection is a feature that detects excessive temperatures in the fuser and interrupts the
power supply to the fuser heater.

The following three protective components prevent the fuser heater from excessive rising temperature:

● DC controller: When a thermistor or sub-thermistor detects a temperature above a certain

threshold, the DC controller interrupts power to the specific heater.

● Fuser-heater safety circuit: The fuser heater safety circuit monitors the detected temperature of the
sub thermistors.

● Thermoswitch: If the temperature in the heaters is abnormally high, and the temperature in the
thermoswitch exceeds a specified value, the contact to the thermoswitch breaks.

Engine laser/scanner system

Learn about the printer laser/scanner system.

The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum(s) inside the
toner cartridge(s).

The DC controller receives instructions from the formatter regarding the image of the page to be
printed. The DC controller signals the lasers to emit light, and the laser beams pass through lenses
and onto the scanner mirror, which rotates at a constant speed. The mirror reflects the beam onto the
photosensitive drum in the pattern required for the image, exposing the surface of the drum so it can
receive toner.

The main components of the laser/scanner system, which are controlled by signals sent from the DC
controller, are:

● Laser assembly

● Scanner motor assembly

● Beam detect (BD) sensor

● Scanner mirror

64 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-8 Laser/scanner system

DC controller

Laser ass’y

Scanner mirror
BD sensor

Scanner motor ass’y

Photosensitive drum

Laser/scanner failure detection

Learn about laser/scanner failure detection.

The DC controller determines an optical unit failure and notifies the formatter of the error status for the
following supported conditions.

Table 3-14 Laser/scanner failure detection

Failure detective function Applied

featureBeam detect (BD) failure detection: A specified Yes

BD interval is not detected within a specified period
during the scanner motor drive.

Laser/scanner motor startup failure: The scanner motor Yes

does not reach a specified rotation frequency within a
specified period of time from when the laser/scanner
starts up.

Laser/scanner motor abnormal rotation: The laser/ Yes

scanner motor does not reach a specified rotational
frequency within a specified period of time during a print
operation.

Laser scanner failure detection: A specified laser No

intensity is not detected.

Laser/scanner failure detection 65

 Safety
Learn about laser/scanner safety operation.

The laser/scanner assembly has a mechanical laser shutter. For the safety of users and service
technicians, the laser shutter interrupts the optical path of the laser/scanner assembly when the top
door is opened (SW101).

Image-formation process
Learn about the image-formation process.

The image-formation system creates the printed image on the paper. The system consists of the
following components:

● Toner cartridge

● Transfer roller

● Fuser

● Laser/scanner

● High-voltage power supply

The DC Controller controls the internal components of the image formation system (according to
commands received from the formatter) to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum surface.
The toner image is then transferred to the print media and fused.

Figure 3-9 Image-formation system

The fuser motor (M1) drives the following image formation components:

● Photosensitive drum

● Developing roller (located in the toner cartridge)

66 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

● Primary charging roller (follows the photosensitive drum; located in the toner cartridge)

● Transfer roller (follows the photosensitive drum)

● Pressure roller

● Fuser film (follows the pressure roller)

Figure 3-10 Fuser motor (M1) and image formation components

M1

DC controller

Abbreviation Component

M1 Fuser motor

The following figure shows the toner-level sensor for the image-formation system.

Image-formation process 67
 Figure 3-11 Toner-level sensor

Toner level
sensor

DC controller

Abbreviation Component

NA Toner-level sensor

The image-formation process consists of seven steps divided into five functional blocks.

Figure 3-12 Image-formation process overview

: Paper path Latent image formation

: Direction of drum rotation 2. Laser beam exposure

: Functional block

1. Primary charging
: Step Developing

3. Developing
Drum cleaning
7. Drum cleaning

Delivery 6. Fusing 5. Separation 4. Transfer Pickup

Fusing Transfer

Table 3-15 Image formation process

Functional block Step Description

Latent image formation 1. Primary charging An invisible latent image forms on

the surface of the photosensitive
drum.

Latent image formation 2. Laser-beam exposure An invisible latent image forms on

the surface of the photosensitive
drum.

68 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-15 Image formation process (continued)

Functional block Step Description

Development 3. Development Toner adheres to the electrostatic

latent image on the photosensitive
drum.

Transfer 4. Transfer The toner image transfers to the

paper.

Transfer 5. Separation The toner image transfers to the

paper.

Fusing 6. Fusing The toner fuses to the paper to make

a permanent image.

Drum cleaning 7. Drum cleaning Residual toner is removed from the

drum.

Step 1: Primary charging

Learn about the image formation primary charging step.

To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform
negative charge. The primary charging roller receives the primary charging bias, and then the roller
charges the drum by direct contact.

Figure 3-13 Primary charging

Primary charging roller

Primary charging bias

Photosensitive drum

Step 2: Laser-beam exposure

Learn about the image formation laser-beam exposure step.

The laser beam strikes the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge on the portions of the
drum surface where the image will form. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge
was neutralized. The neutralized areas on the drum are ready to accept toner.

Step 1: Primary charging 69

 Figure 3-14 Laser-beam exposure

Step 3: Development
Learn about the image formation development step.

A developing bias is applied to the developing roller. The toner acquires a negative charge as a result
of the friction from the developing roller rotating against the developing blade. Because the negatively
charged surface of the photosensitive drums were neutralized where they have been struck by the laser
beam, the toner adheres to those areas on the drums. The latent image becomes visible on the surface
of the drum.

Figure 3-15 Development

Developer roller
Developer blade

Developing bias

Photosensitive drum

Step 4: Transfer
Learn about the image formation transfer step.

The transfer bias is applied to the transfer roller to give the paper a positive charge. The positively
charged paper attracts the negatively charged toner from the photosensitive drum surface.

70 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-16 Transfer

Photosensitive
drum

Paper
Transfer roller

Transfer bias

Step 5: Separation
Learn about the image formation separation step.

The elasticity of the paper and the curvature of the photosensitive drum cause the paper to separate
from the drum surface. The static charge eliminator reduces back side static discharge of the paper for
stable paper feeding and image quality.

Figure 3-17 Separation

Photosensitive
drum

Paper
Static charge eliminator
Transfer roller

Step 6: Fusing
Learn about the image formation fusing step.

The printer uses an on-demand fusing method to adhere the toner image onto the page. As the page
passes through the heated and pressurized rollers in the fuser the toner melts onto the page. The toner
image is now permanently fused to the page. A fusing bias applied to the pressure roller improves image
quality.

Step 5: Separation 71
 Figure 3-18 Fusing
Fuser heater

Fuser film

Paper

Pressure roller

Step 7: Drum cleaning

Learn about the image formation drum cleaning step.

The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum and deposits
it in the toner collection portion of the cartridge or in an external toner collection unit (TCU). The drum is
now clear and ready for the next image-formation process.

Figure 3-19 Drum cleaning

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive
drum

Residual toner collection box

Toner cartridge
Learn about the toner cartridge.

The following sections discuss the printer toner cartridge.

Design
Learn about toner cartridge design features.

The toner cartridge is filled with toner and consists of the following components:

● Photosensitive drum

● Developer

● Primary-charging roller

● Memory chip

The DC controller rotates the drum motor to drive the photosensitive drum, developing roller, and the
primary-charging roller.

72 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-20 Toner cartridge system

DC controller

E-label

Cartridge

Primary charging Developer roller

roller

Photosensitive drum
M1

Table 3-16 Toner cartridge functions

Function Applied

Toner cartridge presence detection Yes

Toner level detection Yes

Toner cartridge life detection Yes

Toner cartridge mis-installation detection No

Drum discharge No

Transfer cleaning Yes

Memory chip
Learn about the toner cartridge memory chip.

The memory chip is non-volatile memory that stores information about the usage of the toner cartridge
and helps protect the customer from counterfeit cartridges. This chip is also used to detect the
presence of a cartridge within the printer or when a cartridge is installed in the wrong slot. The printer
reads and writes the data in the memory chip.

Toner cartridge seal

Learn about the toner cartridge seal.

The toner cartridge seal is opened automatically when the toner cartridge is installed into the printer.

Toner level and cartridge life detection

Learn about the toner cartridge toner level and life detection functions.

Memory chip 73
 Toner level detection: The DC controller detects the remaining toner in a cartridge by the optical
detection method and then notifies the formatter of the remaining toner level.

Cartridge life detection: The DC controller detects the cartridge life by monitoring the total operating
time or remaining toner level of the toner cartridge. The DC controller determines a cartridge end of life
and notifies the formatter when total operating time of the cartridge reaches a specified time or the
cartridge runs out of toner.

Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.

NOTE: All printer models might not support the Dynamic security feature.

Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a
non-HP chip or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work
in the future.

As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues
to use security measures to protect the quality of our customer experiences, maintain the integrity
of our printing systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication
methods that change periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in
the future. HP printers and original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When
cartridges are cloned or counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks,
compromising the printing experience.

*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP
cannot guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you
are using non-original HP cartridges, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an
original HP security chip or unmodified HP electronic circuitry.

Input devices
Learn about the input devices.

Tray 3
Learn about the paper feeder(optional Tray 3).

The 550-sheet paper feeder is optionally installed at bottom of the printer. It picks up the print media and
feeds it to the printer. The paper DC controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder.

Paper path
Learn about the Tray 3 paper path.

The figure below shows the optional Tray 3 paper path.

74 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Figure 3-21 Optional Tray 3 paper path

Paper feeder control

Learn about the paper feeder controller.

The figure below shows the paper feeder controller block diagram. The table in this topic describes the
paper feeder electrical components. The paper feeder controller controls the operational sequence of
the paper feeder.

Figure 3-22 Paper feeder controller

550-sheet paper feeder

Motor
+3.3VB

+24VD
Clutch

Solenoid
DC controller Paper feeder controller

Photointerruptor

Switch

Paper feeder control 75

 Table 3-17 Electrical component list, paper feeder

Component type Abbreviation Component name

Motor M5 Lifter motor

Solenoid SL4 Cassette pickup solenoid

Clutch CL2 Feed clutch

Switch SW3 Cassette detection switch

Photo interrupter PS460 Media surface sensor

Photo interrupter PS461 Cassette media out sensor

Motor control
Learn about the Tray 3 motor control.

The paper feeder uses one motor for the cassette lift-up operation.

NOTE: The paper feeder does not detect motor failures.

Table 3-18 Motor, paper feeder (Tray 3)

Abbreviation Component name Components driven

M5 Lifter motor Lifts up the cassette

Electrical components, pickup and feed

Learn about the Tray 3 electrical components.

The figure below shows the paper feeder electrical components. The table in this section describes the
electrical components.

Figure 3-23 Electrical components, pickup and feed

M1

SL4

SW3 PS460
PS461

M5

76 Chapter 3 Theory of operation

 Table 3-19 Electrical components, pickup and feed (Tray 3)

Abbreviation Component name

M1 Fuser motor

NOTE: This motor is located in the printer.

M5 Lifter motor

SL4 Cassette pickup solenoid

SW3 Cassette detection switch

PS460 Media surface sensor

PS461 Cassette media out sensor

Other functions
Learn about the Tray 3 functions.

The paper feeder has the following pickup and feed functions.

Table 3-20 Other functions, paper feeder (Tray 3)

Function Applied

Cassette lift-up control Yes

Cassette presence detection Yes

Cassette media size detection No

Cassette media stack surface detection Yes

Cassette media out detection Yes

Cassette media level detection No

Multiple-feed prevention Yes

Automatic delivery Yes

Jam detection
Learn about the Tray 3 jam detection.

The DC controller in the printer detects jams during the paper feeder pickup and feed operation.

Other functions 77
 4 Solve problems

Learn about solving printer problems.

HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based
Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners

1. Select Services & Support (near the top of the screen).

2. Under Services Delivery, select Technical Support.

3. Select Technical Documentation.

Find information about the following topics

● Service manuals

● Service advisories

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Warranty and regulatory information

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

78 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 ● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

Determine the problem source

When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts
the user to the situation.

This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flow chart to filter out many
possible causes of the problem.

● Use the pre-troubleshooting check list to gather information about the problem from the customer.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the
malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: To print a configuration page using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine
original HP toner cartridges installed, must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP
Plus account (for more information, go to hp.com/plus).

NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good
condition.

Determine the problem source 79

 Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help define the problem(s).

Table 4-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist

General topic Questions

Environment ● Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)?

● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?

● Is the power-supply plug inserted in the printer and the wall outlet (not a surge
protector)?

● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters?

● Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers
or office cleaning materials?

NOTE: Diazo copiers produce ammonia gas as part of the copying processes.
Ammonia gas (from cleaning supplies or a diazo copier) can have an adverse
effect on some printer components (for example, the toner cartridge or
cartridges OPC).

● Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?

● Is the printer exposed to an air conditioning or heating vent that can cause
temperature fluctuations?

Media ● Does the customer use only supported media?

● Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)?

● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?

Input trays ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?

● Is the media correctly placed in the tray?

● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack (no gaps in the stack or excessive
pressure causing the stack to bow)?

● Is the tray (or trays) correctly installed in the printer?

Toner cartridge ● Is the toner cartridge (or cartridges) installed correctly?

NOTE: If country/region specific toner cartridges are available for the printer, make
sure the correct cartridge is installed.

Transfer unit and fuser ● Are the transfer unit and fuser installed correctly?

NOTE: For printers with an intermediate transfer belt (ITB), is the ITB installed
correctly and fully seated. If a replacement ITB was installed, was all of the
packing materials removed?

Covers ● Is the toner cartridge door closed?

Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in

winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer
on for 10 to 20 minutes.

● Was a toner cartridge (or cartridges) opened soon after being moved from a
cold to a warm room? If so, allow the toner cartridge (or cartridges) to sit at
room temperature for 1 to 2 hours.

80 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)

General topic Questions

Miscellaneous ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (toner cartridges, memory
modules, and EIO cards) from the printer.

● Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated
with the printer before beginning troubleshooting.

● For any color print-quality issues (color printers only), calibrate the printer, and
then print a diagnostics page to verify print quality.

Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes to follow to quickly isolate and solve printer hardware
problems.

Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. Follow a “yes” answer to a question to proceed to the
next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in
this chapter and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major
step in this troubleshooting flowchart.

NOTE: For solutions that require printing a page, see the following.

To print using an HP Plus printer, the printer must have genuine original HP toner cartridges installed,
must have an ongoing internet connection and an active HP Plus account (for more information, go to
hp.com/plus).

Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart

Step Question Action

1 Is the printer on and

does a readable message
Power on display?

Yes No Basic printer functions should start up when the printer

is connected into an electrical outlet and the power
switch is pushed to the on position.

During normal operation cooling fans and/or motors

should be operating. Place a hand over fan intake
or exhaust vents to determine if the fan or fans are
spinning. Lean close to the printer to hear motors
rotating.

If fans and/or motors are operating, the dc side of the

power supply is functioning.

Always make sure that the printer is plugged into

a known-functioning wall receptacle. Remove power
strips and plug the printer directly into a wall
receptacle.

After the control panel display is functional, see step 2.

2 Does the message Ready

display on the control
Control panel?
panel
messages

Troubleshooting flowchart 81
 Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)

Step Question Action

Yes No After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.

Use the control panel message document (CPMD)

section in this manual to correct any displayed error
messages.

3 Open the Troubleshooting

menu and print an event
Event log log to see the history of
errors with this printer.

Does the event log print?

Yes No If the event log does not print, check for error
messages.

If paper jams inside the printer, see the jams section of

the printer service manual.

If error messages display on the control panel when

trying to print an event log, see the control panel
message document (CPMD) section of this manual.

After successfully printing and evaluating the event

log, see step 4.

4 Open the Reports

menu and print the
Information configuration pages to
pages verify that all the
accessories are installed.

Are all the accessories

installed?

Yes No If accessories that are installed are not listed on the

configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall
it.

Make sure that the most recent firmware is installed.

See the firmware upgrade section of this manual for
more information.

After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5.

5 Does the print quality

meet the customer's
Print quality requirements?

Yes No Compare the images with the sample defects in the

Image-quality troubleshooting section of this manual.

Solve print-quality and copy-quality issues as needed.

After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6.

6 Can the customer print

successfully from the
Interface host computer?

82 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-2 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)

Step Question Action

Yes. This is the end of the No Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and
troubleshooting process. that a valid IP address is listed on the HP Jetdirect
configuration page.

If error messages display on the control panel or

appear in the event log, see the control-panel message
document (CPMD) section of this manual.

When the customer can print from the host computer,

this is the end of the troubleshooting process.

Firmware upgrades
Learn about printer firmware upgrades.

To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the printer, go to:

● In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/ljM406 or www.hp.com/support/ljM407 or www.hp.com/

support/ljM430MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljE40040 or
www.hp.com/support/ljE42540MFP.

a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the appropriate product by name.

NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so
that the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.

b. Select the driver language and operating system.

c. Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.

● Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.

– Select your country/region.

– Select Drivers & Downloads.

– Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then select Go.

TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a short video on
identifying the printer's name and number.

– Select the appropriate product by name.

NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so
that the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.

– Select the driver language and operating system.

– Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.

Determine the installed revision of firmware

Learn about how to determine the version of installed printer firmware.

Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware.

Firmware upgrades 83
 Print the configuration page from an MFP control panel
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Configuration/Status pages

3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.

4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.

Print the configuration page from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Reports, and
then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the print icon . Press the OK button to print the pages.

Figure 4-1 Configuration page firmware version

Firmware Revision
Rev
HP LaserJet M

Sep\13\2019 6:56:00 AM

HP Embedded Web Server

Learn how to perform a firmware upgrade using the HP Embedded Web Server.

NOTE: The printer should be at the Ready state.

84 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 The firmware update might take 10 minutes or longer based on the input/output (I/O) transfer rates and
the time it takes for the printer to reinitialize.

1. Open an Internet browser window.

2. Enter the printer IP address in the URL line.

3. Select the Firmware Upgrade link from the General tab or from the Troubleshooting tab.

4. Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to, and then select the
firmware file. The file has a .bdl file extension. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade.

NOTE: Do not close the browser window OR interrupt communication until the HP Embedded Web
Server (EWS) displays the confirmation page.

5. After the printer reinitializes, print a configuration page and verify that the latest firmware version
has been installed.

USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) (SFP)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update using a SFP control panel.

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3 Administrator, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +1 Download, and then press the OK button.

4. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control panel display,
try using a different portable storage device.

5. Use the arrow buttons to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then press the OK button.

6. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the .bdl file, and then press the OK button.

NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.

TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for
this printer.

7. When the message Complete displays on the control panel display, turn the printer power off, and
then on again.

8. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) (MFP)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from an MFP control panel.

1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.

USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) (SFP) 85

 2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 4-2 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3 Administrator, and then touch the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +1 Download, and then touch the OK button.

5. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control panel display,
try using a different portable storage device.

6. Use the arrow buttons to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then touch the OK button.

7. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the .bdl file, and then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.

TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for
this printer.

8. When the message Complete displays on the control panel display, touch the down arrow button
several times until the message Continue displays.

9. Touch the OK button to begin the upgrade. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to
the Ready state.

10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) (SFP)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from a SFP control panel
(FutureSmart 4 firmware or later).

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to scroll to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

● USB Firmware Upgrade

3. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the appropriate .bdl file, and then press the OK button.

86 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 5. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) (MFP)

Learn how to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from a n MFP control
panel.

1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.

2. Turn the printer on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state.

3. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

4. Open the Maintenance menu.

5. Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button.

6. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.

7. Touch the .bdl file, and then touch the Upgrade button.

TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for
this printer.

8. Select one of the following options:

● Upgrade

NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.

● Re-install

● Downgrade

9. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the Ready state.

10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

Comprehensive list of troubleshooting tools

Learn about the printer troubleshooting tools.

Engine test
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using the engine test diagnostic.

When the engine test is performed, a test page with lines prints if the engine is functioning correctly.

NOTE: Depending on printer models, either a simplex engine test page, a duplex engine test page, or
both simplex and duplex engine test pages might be available.

Depress and hold the cartridge door release button, and then open and close the cartridge door four
times within a three second time period to print a simplex engine test page. Open and close the door five
times within a three second period to print a duplex engine test page.

USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) (MFP) 87

 Pre-boot menu options
The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.

CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating
system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not
recommend this action unless it is specified as a solution in the CPMD.

TIP: The Pre-boot menu is also remotely accessible by using a telnet network protocol (Remote
Admin) to establish an administration connection to the printer.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Use the following procedure to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 4-3 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

88 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 4-4 Pre-boot menu

Button Description

Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.

5. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 89

 Open the Pre-Boot menu from an LCD control panel
Use the following procedure to open the Pre-Boot menu from an LCD control panel.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to navigate the Pre-Boot menu.

4. Press the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control
panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 4-5 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.

3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK
button.

4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to
select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

90 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK
button.

4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button to
select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version
of the printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support
these options.

Table 4-3 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu

and continues the normal boot process.

If a selection is not made in the initial menu within

30 seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the
same as selecting Continue).

If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout

does not apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is

required to open the Pre-boot menu.

Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.

If authentication is required (and the user is not

already signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The
user is required to sign in.

Administrator Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download

process. A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all
USB FutureSmart printers. USB or Network connections
are not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive

Administrator Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk
partitions.

CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item

removes all data.

A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

The system is not bootable after this action and

a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A
firmware download must be performed to return
the system to a bootable state.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel 91
 Table 4-3 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data
except the firmware repository where the master
firmware bundle is downloaded and saved).

CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item

removes all data except the firmware repository. A
delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer

configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).

This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing

the firmware image from the active directory
without having to download new firmware code
(printer remains bootable).

Administrator Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.

Administrator Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a

password from the Administrator menu. Before the
password is actually cleared, a message will be
shown asking to confirm that the password should
be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the
action.

When the confirmation prompt displays, press the

OK button to clear the password.

Table 4-4 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an
external device for job storage. Job storage is
(continued) normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will
be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed.

Administrator Manage Disk Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new
secure disk to this printer.

The secure disk already locked to this printer will

remain accessible to this printer. Use this function
to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by
the printer when using them interchangeably.

The data stored on the secure disk locked to this

printer always remains accessible to this printer.

Administrator Manage Disk Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer
will remain accessible to this printer and uses the
old disk's encryption password with the new disk.

The secure disk that is already locked to this printer

remains accessible to this printer.

92 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-4 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated
with the yet-to-be installed secure disk.

CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.

Administrator Manage Disk Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-
secure disk for this session only, and then search
for the missing secure disk in future sessions.

Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command is a one-pass overwrite, which erases the
entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically
Unlock erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.

Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is
available.

Table 4-5 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
Device device or get a status about the internal device.
(continued) (continued)

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Device Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command erases the entire disk, including firmware.
The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically
Device Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow the user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The HP High
Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is
Device available.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel 93
 Table 4-5 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk External Select the External Device item to erase the
Device external device or get status about the external
device.

Administrator Manage Disk External Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Device Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled.

The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire

disk, including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Administrator Manage Disk External Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically
Device Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Administrator Manage Disk External Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is
Device available.

Table 4-6 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode The network can be configured to obtain the
[DHCP] network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
(continued) NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition
only active when from the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network
[STATIC] addresses.
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
[STATIC]
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
[STATIC]
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

94 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-6 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode Default Use this item to manually enter the default
[STATIC] Gateway gateway.
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.
[STATIC]
NOTE: This
configuration is
only active when
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

Table 4-7 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options
that can be set for the next time the printer is
(continued) turned on and initializes to the Ready state.

Administrator Startup Options Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision
item to allow the printer to initialize and show the
firmware version when the printer reaches the
Ready state.

Once the printer power is turned on the next time,

the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the
firmware revision is not shown.

Administrator Startup Options Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address
and all customer settings. (This item also returns
all settings to factory defaults.)

NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.

Administrator Startup Options Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed
third-party applications.

Administrator Startup Options Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer
calibration for the very next power-initialization
cycle only.

Administrator Startup Options Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock
the Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot
menu and the Device Maintenance menu).

Service personnel must have the administrator

remove the Lock Service setting before they can
open the Service menu.

Administrator Startup Options Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/
ScanVolume during startup.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel 95
 Table 4-7 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the
printer to initialize as if it is the first time it has
been turned on.

For example, the user is prompted to configure

first-time settings like date/time, language, and
other settings.

Select this item so that it is enabled for the next

time the printer power is turned on.

When the printer power is turned on the next time,

this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured
settings are used during configuration, and the
first-time setting prompt is not used.

Administrator Startup Options Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable
Jetdirect Off the embedded HP Jetdirect.

By default this item is unchecked so that HP

Jetdirect is always enabled.

Administrator Startup Options WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the
wireless accessory.

Table 4-8 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are useful to diagnose hardware

components and their interface connections. Use
(continued) these items to troubleshoot specific hardware
components, and the interface between them and
other components.

Administrator Diagnostics Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Memory
diagnostic when executing multiple diagnostics.

Administrator Diagnostics Short Use the Short item to select a brief memory test.

NOTE: This test requires about four minutes to

execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Long Use the Long item to select an extended memory
test.

NOTE: This test requires about twenty minutes

to execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Disk
diagnostic when executing multiple diagnostics.

Administrator Diagnostics Short Use the Short item to select a brief firmware self-
test.

NOTE: This test requires about two or three

minutes to execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Long Use the Long item to select an extended firmware
self-test.

NOTE: This test requires about sixty minutes to

execute.

96 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-8 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Optimized Use the Optimized item to select a test that
checks the active sectors on the disk.

NOTE: This test requires about thirty minutes to

execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Raw Use the Raw item to select a test that checks
every sector on the disk.

NOTE: This test requires about fifty minutes to

execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Smart Use the Smart item to select a very brief test
that checks the drive self-monitoring analysis and
reporting technology (SMART) status—the drive
detects and reports reliability indicators to help
anticipate disk failures (SMART status).

Administrator Diagnostics CPB Use the CPB item to verify the integrity of the
copy processor board (CPB) and the formatter
PCA connections.

Administrator Diagnostics Interconnect Use the Interconnect item to verify the integrity of
the interconnect PCA (ICB) and its connections.

Administrator Diagnostics Run Selected Select the Run Selected item to execute a
selected test.

NOTE: If more than one test is selected, they are

executed in sequence.

Table 4-9 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
(continued) navigate the menu selections from a remote location.

IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the
Remote Admin function, see "Remote Admin (M506/
M507/E50145, M527/M528/E52645)" in the
Troubleshooting Manual.

Administrator Remote Admin Stop Telnet

Administrator Remote Admin Refresh IP

Administrator System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting
menu is not accessible, then use the System Triage
item to copy the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive
at the next printer start up.

The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel 97
 Table 4-9 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Change Svc Use this item to change the Service menu personal
PWD identification number (PIN).

Administrator Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number
(PIN) has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the
original PIN.

Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.

Service Tools Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these
values.

Developer Tools Netexec

Remote Admin
Learn about the printer Remote Admin function.

The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed and
enabled on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows-based system; however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.

Enable the Windows telnet client

All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 10® operating system. Screens and
menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

98 Chapter 4 Solve problems

1. Use the Start menu to open the Windows Settings dialog box, and then search for Turn Windows
features on or off. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item.

Figure 4-6 Open Windows Settings

2. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Figure 4-7 Enable the telnet client feature

Enable the Windows telnet client 99

 Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer.

The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access
network security programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Use the following procedures to connect a remote connection.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a 1/8 with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-8 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-9 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

100 Chapter 4 Solve problems

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-10 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to 7.

Figure 4-11 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Figure 4-12 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

– The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

– The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Start the telnet server function at the printer 101

 Figure 4-13 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

1. From the Start menu open the Command Prompt desktop application.

TIP: Type cmd in the application search dialogue box to find the application.

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 4-14 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 of the "Start the
telnet server function at the printer" topic.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer.

Figure 4-15 Establish a telnet connection

102 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 of then "Start the telnet server function at the printer"
topic at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See the "Start the telnet server function at the printer" topic.

Figure 4-16 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered. and the Remote Admin connection
is successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see "Pre-boot menu options" in
the printer Service Manual.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecured telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

Figure 4-17 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.

Disconnect a remote connection 103

 1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 4-18 Access the administrator menu

2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.

Figure 4-19 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

104 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-20 Terminate the telnet connection

Advanced configuration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage advanced printing functions.

Introduction
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage printing functions from a computer instead of the printer
control panel.

● View printer status information

● Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones

● View and change tray configurations

● View and change the printer control-panel menu configuration

● View and print internal pages

● Receive notification of printer and supplies events

● View and change network configuration

The HP Embedded Web Server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The
HP Embedded Web Server does not support IPX-based printer connections. Internet access is not
needed to open and use the HP Embedded Web Server.

When the printer is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available.

NOTE: The HP Embedded Web Server is not accessible beyond the network firewall.

How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

Use the following steps to open the EWS.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch
the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.

Advanced configuration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 105

 2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.

NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.

To use the HP Embedded Web Server, the browser must meet the following requirements:

Windows® 7

● Internet Explorer (version 8.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

Windows® 8 or greater

● Internet Explorer (version 9.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

macOS

● Safari (version 5.x or greater)

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

Linux

● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)

● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)

HP Embedded Web Server features

Learn about the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) features available on each tab.

106 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-21 EWS Tabs

NOTE: Copy/Print, Scan/Digital Send, and Fax tabs only appear for multi-function printers (MFPs). A
Print tab appears for single-function printers (SFPs).

Information tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Information tab.

Table 4-10 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab

Menu Description

Device Status Shows the printer status and shows the estimated life remaining of HP supplies. The
page also shows the type and size of paper set for each tray. To change the default
settings, click the Change Settings link.

Job Log Provides a list of the jobs that have been processed.

Configuration Page Shows the information found on the configuration page.

Supplies Status Page Shows the status of the supplies for the printer.

Event Log Page Shows a list of all printer events and errors. Use the HP Instant Support link (in the
Other Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages) to connect to a set of
dynamic web pages that help solve problems. These pages also show additional
services available for the printer.

Usage Page Shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed, grouped by size,
type, and paper print path.

Device Information Shows the printer network name, address, and model information. To customize
these entries, click the Device Information menu on the General tab.

Control Panel Snapshot Shows an image of the current screen on the control panel display.

Remote Control-Panel Provides a way to troubleshoot or manage the printer from a browser window on a
desktop or laptop.

Print Allows the user to send a print-ready file to the printer to be printed.

Printable Reports and Pages Lists the internal reports and pages for the printer. Select one or more items to print.

Information tab 107

 Table 4-10 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab (continued)

Menu Description

Open Source Licenses Shows a summary of the licenses for open source software programs that can be
used with the printer.

General tab
Refer to the table for settings in the General tab.

Table 4-11 HP Embedded Web Server General tab

Menu Description

Control Panel Customization Reorder, show, or hide features on the control-panel display.

Change the default display language and keyboard layouts.

Quick Sets Configure jobs that are available in the Quick Sets area of the Home screen on the
printer control panel.

Alerts Set up email alerts for various printer and supplies events.

Control Panel Settings App Shows the Settings app options that are available on the printer control panel.

General Settings Configure how the printer recovers from jams and other general printer settings.

AutoSend Configure the printer to send automated emails regarding printer configuration and
supplies to specific email addresses.

Edit Other Links Add or customize a link to another website. This link displays in the footer area on all
HP Embedded Web Server pages.

Ordering Information Enter information about ordering replacement toner cartridges. This information
displays on the supplies status page.

Device Information Name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name of the primary
contact who will receive information about the printer.

Language Set the language in which to display the HP Embedded Web Server information.

Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer firmware upgrade files.

Date/Time Settings Set the date and time or synchronize with a network time server.

Energy Settings Set or edit a wake time, sleep time, and sleep delay for the printer. Set a different
schedule for each day of the week and for holidays.

Set which interactions with the printer cause it to wake from sleep mode.

Back up and Restore Create a backup file that contains printer and user data. If necessary, use this file to
restore data to the printer.

Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to the factory defaults.

Solution Installer Install or remove third-party software packages that extend or modify the
functionality of the printer.

Job Statistics Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-statistics services, or enables
local serverless device job accounting.

Quota Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-quota services, or enables
local device quota service.

108 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Other Links list
Configure which links display in the footer of the HP Embedded Web Server by using the Edit Other Links
menu on the General tab.

NOTE: The following are the default links.

Table 4-12 HP Embedded Web Server Other Links list

Menu Description

HP Instant Support Connect to the HP website to find solutions to printer problems.

Shop for Supplies Connect to the HP website for information on purchasing original HP supplies, such
as cartridges and paper.

Product Support Connect to the support site for the printer to search for help on various topics.

Copy/Print tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Copy/Print tab.

Table 4-13 HP Embedded Web Server Copy/Print tab

Menu Description

Print from USB Drive Settings Enable or disable the Print from USB Drive menu on the control panel.

Manage Stored Jobs Enable or disable the ability to store jobs in the printer memory.

Configure job-storage options.

Default Print Options Configure the default options for print jobs.

Restrict Color Permit or restrict color printing and copying.

(Color printers only) Specify permissions for individual users or for jobs that are sent from specific
software programs.

PCL and PostScript Settings Adjust the PCL and PostScript settings for all print jobs, including copy jobs and
received faxes.

Print Quality Configure the print quality settings, including color adjustment, image registration,
and allowed paper types.

Copy Settings Configure the default options and Quick Sets for copy jobs.

NOTE: If job-specific copy setting options are not set from the control panel at the
start of a job, the default settings will be used for the job.

Expert Copy Enable or disable Expert Copy and set the initial copy view.

The Expert Copy feature is available only on some HP MFPs with larger control
panels, and is available in FutureSmart 4 firmware 24.7.3 release or later.

Manage Trays Configure settings for paper trays.

Manage Stapler/Stacker Configure settings for the stapler/stacker for printers that have this feature.

Scan/Digital Send tab

Refer to the table for settings in the Scan/Digital Send tab.

Other Links list 109

 Table 4-14 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab

Menu Description

Email Setup Configure the default email settings for digital sending, including the following:

● Settings for the outgoing mail (SMTP) server

● Settings for Email Quick Sets jobs

● Default message settings, such as the "From" address and the subject line

● Settings for digital signatures and encryption

● Settings for email notifications

● Default scan settings for email jobs

● Default file settings for email jobs

Scan to Network Folder Configure the network folder settings for digital sending, including the following:

● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a network folder

● Settings for notifications

● Default scan settings for jobs saved in a network folder

● Default file settings for jobs saved in a network folder

Scan to SharePoint® Configure the SharePoint settings for digital sending, including the following:

● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site

● Default settings for jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site

Scan to USB Drive Configure the USB settings for digital sending, including the following:

● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved on a USB flash drive

● Settings for notifications

● Default scan settings for jobs saved on a USB flash drive

● Default file settings for jobs saved on a USB flash drive

Contacts Manage contacts, including the following:

● Add email addresses into the printer one at a time.

● Import a large list of frequently-used email addresses on to the printer all at

once, rather than adding them one at a time.

● Export contacts from the printer into a .CSV file on the computer to use as a
data backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.

● Edit email addresses that have already been saved in the printer.

Preferences Manage general scanning settings.

Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Configure the printer to send scanned images as email attachments.
Setup Wizards
Configure the printer to save scanned images to network-folder Quick Sets. Quick
Sets provide easy access to files saved on the network.

Digital Sending Software Setup Configure settings related to using optional Digital Sending software.

110 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Fax tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Fax tab.

Table 4-15 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab

Menu Description

Fax Send Setup Configure settings for sending faxes, including the following:

● Default settings for outgoing faxes

● Settings for fax Quick Sets jobs

● Settings for notifications

● Default setting for sending faxes using the internal fax modem

● Settings for using a LAN fax service

● Settings for using an Internet fax service

Fax Speed Dials Manage speed dials, including the following:

● Import .CSV files containing email addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so
that they can be accessed on this printer.

● Export email, fax, or user records from the printer into a file on the computer to
use as a data backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.

Fax Receive Setup Configure default print options for incoming faxes, and set up a fax printing
schedule.

Fax Archive and Forwarding Enable or disable fax archiving and fax forwarding, and configure basic settings for
each:

● Fax archiving is a method to send a copy of all incoming and outgoing faxes to
an email address, a network folder, or an FTP server.

● Fax forwarding is a method to forward incoming faxes to a different fax device.

Fax Activity Log Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this printer.

Supplies tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Supplies tab.

Table 4-16 HP Embedded Web Server Supplies tab

Menu Description

Manage Supplies Configure how the printer reacts when supplies reach a Very Low state.

Troubleshooting tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Troubleshooting tab.

Fax tab 111

 Table 4-17 HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab

Menu Description

General Troubleshooting Use the following options as appropriate:

● Reports and Tests area: Select and print several types of reports and tests.
Some reports can be viewed in the EWS by clicking the View button.

● Fax Tools area: Configure settings for fax troubleshooting. (MFP and Digital
Sender products with HP analog fax accessory only)

● OXPd Troubleshooting area: Enable or disable the Allow a Non-Secure

Connection for Web Services option

● Auto Recovery area: Enable or disable the Enable Auto Recovery option, which
allows the printer to auto recover from errors that might require the power to
be turned off and on (for example, a 49 error).

Online Help Link to HP cloud-based online help to assist in troubleshooting printing issues.

Diagnostic Data Export printer information to a file that can be useful for HP technical support to use
for detailed problem analysis.
NOTE: This item is available only if an
administrator password is set from the
Security tab.

Calibration/Cleaning Enable the automatic cleaning feature, create and print the cleaning page, and
select an option to calibrate the printer immediately.
(Color LaserJet printers only)

Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to factory defaults.

Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer firmware upgrade files.

Security tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Security tab.

Table 4-18 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab

Menu Description

General Security Settings for general security, including the following:

● Configure an administrator password to restrict access to certain features on

the printer.

● Set a custom device Service Access Code.

● Set PJL password for processing PJL commands.

● Set file system access and firmware upgrade security.

● Enable or disable the Host USB port on the control panel or the USB
connectivity port on the formatter for printing directly from a computer.

● View the status of all security settings.

Account Policy Enable administrator account settings.

Access Control Configure access to printer functions for specific individuals or groups, and select
the method individuals use to sign in to the printer.

Protect Stored Data Configure and manage the internal storage for the printer.

Configure settings for jobs that are stored on the printer internal storage.

112 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-18 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab (continued)

Menu Description

Manage Remote Apps Manage or whitelist remote apps by importing or deleting certificates that allow
devices to use this product.

Certificate Management Install and manage security certificates for access to the printer and the network.

Email Domain Restriction If email functionality is enabled, administrators can limit the email addresses to
which the printer can send messages.

Web Service Security Allow resources on this printer to be accessed by web pages from different
domains. If no sites are added to the list, then all sites are trusted.

Self Test Verify that the security functions are running according to expected system
parameters.

HP Web Services tab

Use the HP Web Services tab to configure and enable HP Web Services for this printer. It is necessary to
Enable HP Web Services to use the HP ePrint feature.

Table 4-19 HP Embedded Web Server HP Web Services tab

Menu Description

Web Services Setup Connect this printer to HP Connected on the web by enabling HP Web Services.

Web Proxy Configure a proxy server if there are issues enabling HP Web Services or
connecting the printer to the Internet.

HP JetAdvantage Access solutions that extend the capabilities of the printer

Smart Cloud Print Enable Smart Cloud Print, which allows access to web-based apps that extend the
capabilities of the printer.

Networking tab
Use the Networking tab to configure and secure network settings for the printer when it is connected to
an IP-based network. This tab does not display if the printer is connected to other types of networks.

Table 4-20 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Configuration settings

Menu Description

Wireless Station Configure the initial wireless settings.

NOTE: The configuration options available depend on the print server model.

Wi-Fi Direct Configure Wi-Fi Direct settings for printers that include embedded Wi-Fi Direct Print
and NFC printing or that have a wireless accessory installed.

NOTE: The configuration options available depend on the print server model.

TCP/IP Settings Configure TCP/IP settings for IPv4 and IPv6 networks.

NOTE: The configuration options available depend on the print server model.

Network Settings Configure IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC, and SNMP settings, depending on the print
server model.

HP Web Services tab 113

 Table 4-20 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Configuration settings (continued)

Menu Description

Other Settings Configure general printing protocols and services supported by the print server.
The available options depend on the print server model, but can include firmware
update, LPD queues, USB settings, support information, and refresh rate.

AirPrint Enable, set up, or disable network printing from Apple-supported printers.

Select Language Change the language displayed by the HP Embedded Web Server. This page
displays if the web pages support multiple languages. Optionally, select supported
languages through language-preference settings in the browser.

Select Location Select a country/region for the printer.

Table 4-21 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Google Cloud Print settings

Menu Description

Setup Set up Google Cloud Print options.

Web Proxy Configure proxy settings.

Table 4-22 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Security settings

Menu Description

Settings View and restore current security settings to factory-default values.

Configure security settings using the Security Configuration Wizard.

NOTE: Do not use the Security Configuration Wizard to configure security settings
if using network-management applications, such as HP Web Jetadmin.

Authorization Control configuration management and use of this printer, including limiting host
access to this printer through an Access Control List (ACL) (for selected print
servers on IPv4 networks only).

Secure Communication Configure Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol and encryption options.

Mgmt. Protocols Configure and manage security protocols for this printer, including the following:

● Set the security management level for the HP Embedded Web Server, and
control traffic over HTTP and HTTPS.

● Configure the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) operation. Enable

or disable the SNMP v1/v2c or SNMP v3 agents on the print server.

● Control access through protocols that may not be secure, such as printing
protocols, print services, discovery protocols, name resolution services, and
configuration-management protocols.

802.1X Authentication Configure 802.1X authentication settings on the Jetdirect print server as required for
client authentication on the network, and reset the 802.1X authentication settings to
factory-default values.

CAUTION: When changing the 802.1X authentication settings; the printer might
lose its connection. To reconnect, it might be necessary to reset the print server to a
factory-default state and reinstall the printer.

IPsec/Firewall View or configure a Firewall policy or an IPsec/Firewall policy.

Announcement Agent Enable or disable the HP Device Announcement Agent, set the configuration server,
and configure mutual authentication using certificates.

114 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-23 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Diagnostics settings

Menu Description

Network Statistics Display network statistics that are collected and stored on the HP Jetdirect print
server.

Protocol Info View a list of network-configuration settings on the HP Jetdirect print server for each
protocol.

Configuration Page View the HP Jetdirect configuration page, which contains status and configuration
information.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP)

Learn about the control-panel Print menu (SFP) and the Copy/Print menu (MFP).

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Print menu (SFP) or
the Copy/Print menu (MFP).

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Image preview Make optional Use this menu

to configure how
MFP Require preview Copy behaves.

Disable preview

Copy Settings Copies 1-9999 Configure the

default options
MFP Default = 1 for copy jobs. If
the user does
not specify the
job options when
creating the job,
the default options
are used.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 115

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Sides Original Sides 1-sided Use to indicate

whether the
MFP 2-sided original document
is printed on one
Flip pages up or both sides.
For example, select
Original Sides 1-
sided and Output
Sides 2-sided when
the original is
printed on one
side, but you want
to make two-sided
copies.

Select Flip pages

up to print the
pages with long
edge of the in
the landscape
orientation.

Copy Settings Sides Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate

whether the copies
MFP 2-sided should be printed
on one or both
Flip pages up sides. For example,
select Original
Sides 1-sided and
Output Sides 2-
sided when the
original is printed
on one side, but
you want to make
two-sided copies.

Select Flip pages

up to print the
pages with long
edge of the in
the landscape
orientation.

Copy Settings Watermark Watermark Type None* Use to set a text

watermark.
MFP Text

Copy Settings Watermark Watermark Text Draft Select a

predefined text
MFP Confidential watermark.

Secret

Top Secret

Urgent

Copy Settings Watermark Text Font Letter Gothic* Select the font of
the text watermark.
MFP Antique Olive

New Century
Schoolbook Roman

Garamond Antiqua

116 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Watermark Text Size 30 point Select the font

point size of the
MFP 40 point* text watermark.

60 point

Copy Settings Watermark Darkness 1 - (Lighter) Select the

darkness of the
MFP 2 text watermark.

3*

5 - (Darker)

Copy Settings Stamps Stamp Content User-defined value Use to set a stamp
in any or all the
MFP None* following locations
in the document:
IP address
● Top Left
User name
● Top Center
Product information
● Top Right
Page number
● Bottom Left
Date and time
● Bottom
Center

● Bottom Right

Copy Settings Stamps Text Font Letter Gothic* Select the font of
the stamp.
MFP Antique Olive

New Century
Schoolbook Roman

Garamond Antiqua

Copy Settings Stamps Text Size 8 point Select the font

point size of the
MFP 12 point* stamp.

20 point

Copy Settings Stamps White Disabled* Select the check

background box to enable a
MFP Enabled white background
for the stamp.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 117

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Scan Mode Standard document* Use to indicate

the type of original
MFP Prompt for additional document to be
pages scanned.

Book Select Prompt for

additional pages to
2-sided ID copy or scan an
original document
that has more
pages than the
document feeder
can accommodate
at one time, or
to scan originals
of different sizes
that cannot be
scanned together,
and then combine
these separate
scan jobs into a
single job.

Copy Settings Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Scale the size of

the document up
MFP Include margins or down.

Manual To reduce the

image, select a
Default=100 scaling percentage
that is less than
100. To enlarge the
image, select a
scaling percentage
that is greater than
100.

When Include
margins is enabled,
the printer reduces
the image slightly
to fit the entire
scanned image
within the printable
area on the page.

118 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Original Size Automatically detect* Specify the size

of the original
MFP Letter (8.5x11) document.

Mixed Letter/Legal

Legal (8.5x14)

Executive (7.25x10.5)

Statement (5.5x8.5)

Oficio (8.5x13)

4x6

5x7

5x8

A4 (210x297 mm)

A5 (148x210 mm)

A6 (105x148 mm)

RA4 (215x305 mm)

B5 (182x257 mm)

B6 (128x182 mm)

10x15cm

16K (195x270 mm)

16K (184x260 mm)

16K (197x273 mm)

DPostcard JIS
(148x200 mm)

Oficio (216x340 mm)

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 119

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Paper Selection Paper Size Match original size* Select the size of
paper to use when
MFP Letter (8.5x11) printing or making
copies.
Legal (8.5x14)

Executive (7.25x10.5)

Statement (5.5x8.5)

Oficio (8.5x13)

3x5

4x6

5x7

5x8

A4 (210x297 mm)

A5 (148x210 mm)

A6 (105x148 mm)

RA4 (215x305 mm)

B5 (182x257 mm)

B6 (128x182 mm)

10x15cm

16K (195x270 mm)

16K (184x260 mm)

16K (197x273 mm)

Postcard JIS (100x148

mm)

DPostcard JIS
(148x200 mm)

Envelope #9

Envelope #10

Envelope Monarch

Envelope #10

Envelope B5

Envelope C5

Envelope C6

Envelope DL

Custom

Oficio (216x340 mm)

120 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Paper Selection Paper Type Any Type Select the type of
paper to use when
MFP Plain* printing or making
copies.
Light 60-74g

Intermediate 85-95g

Mid-Weight 96-110g

Heavy 111-130g

Extra Heavy 131-175g

Cardstock 176-220g

Mono Transparency

Labels

Letterhead

Envelope

Preprinted

Prepunched

Colored

Bond

Recycled

Rough

HP EcoFFICIENT

Light Bond

Copy Settings Paper Selection Paper Tray Automatically detect* Select which tray
to use when
MFP Manually Feed printing or making
copies.
Tray 1

Tray 2

Copy Settings Booklet Booklet Format Enabled Select to have

Booklet Format off
MFP Disabled* or on.

Copy Settings Booklet Booklet Format Borders on each Enabled Select to have
page borders printed on
MFP Disabled* the page.

Copy Settings Content Portrait* Specify the way

Orientation the content of the
MFP Landscape original document
is placed on the
page.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 121

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Pages per Sheet One* Select how many

pages to print on
MFP Two one sheet.

Four

Copy Settings Page Order Right, then down Select to print the
pages in rows or
MFP Down, then right columns.

Copy Settings Add page borders Enabled Select the Add

page borders
MFP Disabled* checkbox to add
borders to the
pages.

Copy Settings Image Adjustment Darkness 1 - (Lighter) Adjust to increase

or decrease the
MFP 2 amount of white
and black in the
3 colors.

5*

9 - (Darker)

Copy Settings Image Adjustment Contrast 1 - (Less) Adjust to increase

or decrease
MFP 2 the difference
between the
3 lightest and
darkest color on
4 the page.

5*

9 - (More)

122 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Image Adjustment Background 1 - (Normal) Adjust if you

Cleanup are having trouble
MFP 2 copying a faint
image.
3*

5*

9 - (Cleaner)

Copy Settings Image Adjustment Sharpness 1 - (Less) Adjust to sharpen

or soften the
MFP 2 image.

3*

5 - (More)

Copy Settings Optimize Text/ Text Select to optimize

Picture for the output of a
MFP Mixed* particular type of
content.
Printed picture

Photograph

Copy Settings Edge-to-Edge Normal When the Edge-

(recommended) to-Edge feature
MFP is enabled, the
Edge-to-Edge output product minimizes
margins and prints
as close to the
edge of the paper
as possible.

Copy Settings Erase Edges Use inches Enabled* Use the Erase
Edges feature to
MFP Disabled remove blemishes,
such as dark
borders or staple
marks, by cleaning
the edges of the
scanned image.

Disabling Use
inches changes
the measurements
to millimeters.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 123

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Copy Settings Erase Edges Front Side Specify a different Sets the width of
width for each edge the edge to clean.
MFP
Apply same width to
all edges*

All edges value

Default = 0.00

Copy Settings Erase Edges Back Side Specify a different Sets the width of
width for each edge the edge to clean.
MFP
Apply same width to
all edges

Mirror front side*

Copy Settings Collate Collate on* When Collate on is

selected, each set
MFP Collate off of copied pages
are assembled in
the same order
as the original
document.

Copy Settings Multi-feed Disabled Use this feature

Detection to detect
MFP Enabled* when multiple
pages are fed
simultaneously into
the ADF (automatic
document feeder)
or sheet-feed
scanner.

Copy Settings

MFP

Enable Print from Enabled Enables the printer

USB Drive to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive.

Manage Stored Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Jobs allows you list
Date* the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Manage Stored Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which

Jobs Jobs temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.

124 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Stored Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Jobs Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored
in the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Manage Stored Temporary Job Off Configure global

Jobs Storage Retention settings for
30 minutes temporary jobs
that are stored
1 hour in the printer
memory.
4 hours
The Temporary
1 day Stored Job
Retention feature
1 week specifies the
amount of time
4 weeks temporary jobs
can be stored on
3 days the printer.

Manage Stored Standard Stored Off Configure global

Jobs Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Standard

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
1 week amount of time
jobs can be stored
4 weeks on the printer.
3 days

Default Print Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default

Options number of copies
Default = 1 for a copy
job. This default
applies when the
Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.

Default Print Paper Selection Paper size Select from a list of Configures the
Options sizes that the printer default paper size,
Paper type supports. type and tray used
for print jobs.
Paper tray

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 125

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Default Print Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3.00-8.50 Configures the

Options Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 8.5 inches the user selects
Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Default Print Default Custom Y Dimension Range: 5.00-14.00 Configures the

Options Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 14 inches the user selects
Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Default Print Default Custom Use Inches Enabled*

Options Paper Size
Disabled

Default Print Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

Options whether the
2-sided original document
is printed on one or
both sides.

Default Print Edge-to-Edge Normal Use to avoid

Options (recommended)* shadows that
can appear along
Edge-to-Edge output the edges of
copies when the
original document
is printed close to
the edges.

Default Print Resolution FastRes 1200* Use to select the

Options level of desired
ProRes 1200 print quality.

Default Print Resolution Economode Enabled Text is printed

Options using less toner.
Disabled* This setting is
useful when you
are printing drafts.
You can turn
on this option
independently of
other print quality
settings.

PCL and Courier Font Regular* Select which

Postscript version of the
Settings Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.

126 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and Wide A4 Enabled Changes the

Postscript printable area of
Settings Disabled* A4-size paper. If
you enable this
option, eighty 10-
pitch characters
can be printed on
a single line of A4
paper.

PCL and Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

Postscript to select whether
Settings Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.

PCL and Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

Postscript PDF error page is
Settings Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

PCL and Personality Automatic* Configures the

Postscript default print
Settings PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL and PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font
Postscript source for the
Settings Disk resident* user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 127

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and PCL Font Settings Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font
Postscript number for the
Settings Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the
Font Source menu.
The printer assigns
a number to each
font and lists it on
the PCL font list.
The font number
displays in the Font
# column of the
printout.

PCL and PCL Font Settings Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source
Postscript option and the Font
Settings Default = 10 Number setting
indicate a contour
font, then use this
feature to select a
default pitch (for a
fixed-spaced font).

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 lines Controls the PCL
Postscript print-command
Settings Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature to
select the user soft
-default vertical
form length.

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Orientation Portrait* Select the

Postscript orientation that is
Settings Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

128 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of
Postscript symbol sets. several available
Settings symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set
is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value
for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Append CR to LF Enabled When enabled, this
Postscript option appends
Settings Disabled* a carriage return
to each line
feed encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs.

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Suppress Blank Enabled This option is for
Postscript Pages users who are
Settings Disabled* generating their
own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that
would cause blank
pages to be
printed. When the
On option is
selected, form
feeds are ignored if
the page is blank.

PCL and PCL PCL Settings Media Source Standard* Use to select
Postscript Mapping and maintain input
Settings Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer HP
LaserJet models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on HP
LaserJet 4 and
older models.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 129

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality General Toner Density A sliding bar appears Lighten or darken
with the indicator set the print on the
in the middle between page by changing
Less and More. the toner density
setting.

Print Quality General REt Disabled Use this setting

to enable or
Enabled* disable Resolution
Enhancement
technology (REt),
which produces
smoother angles,
curves, and edges.

Print Quality Image Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be

Registration adjusted
Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Depends upon the

number of trays
installed

130 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Image Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin

Registration Horizontal Shift alignment to
center the image
Front-side on the page from
Vertical Shift top to bottom
and from left to
Back-side right. You can also
Horizontal Shift align the image on
the front with the
Back-side image printed on
Vertical Shift the back.

The direction that

is perpendicular to
the way the paper
passes through
the printer is
referred to as
X. This is also
known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the
scan direction for
the first side of a
two-sided page.

The direction that

the paper feeds
through the printer
is referred to as
Y. Y1 is the feed
direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the feed
direction for the
first side of a two-
sided page.

Use the Adjust Tray

<X> menu to adjust
the registration
settings for
each tray. Before
adjusting these
values, print a
registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides
in the X and
Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments
are necessary. You
can adjust values
for X1 Shift, X2
Shift, Y1 Shift, and
Y2 Shift.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 131

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Image Print Test Page Use the Print Test
Registration Page option to
print a page to
test the image
registration. It
provides alignment
guides in the X
and Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments
are necessary.

Print Quality Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every page

Behavior
Sense first page

Sense transparency
only

Print Quality Auto Sense All Other Trays Sense first page
Behavior
Sense transparency
only

Print Quality Adjust Paper Select from a list Print mode Select from a list of Changing the Print
types of paper types paper types mode setting is
that the printer usually the first
supports. The Reset Paper Types thing to try
available to resolve print-
options are the quality problems.
same for each Problems can
paper type. include toner not
sticking well to
the page, a faint
image of the page
repeated on the
same or following
page, incorrect
gloss level, and so
on.

Print Quality Adjust Paper Select from a list Resistance mode Normal* Use this setting
types of paper types to correct print
that the printer Up 1 quality problems
supports. The in low-humidity
available Up 2 environments and
options are the highly resistive
same for each paper.
paper type.
Use the Up options
to solve print
quality problems
that are related
to faded images
or scattered toner
on certain paper
types.

The Up options
raise the
secondary transfer
bias.

132 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Adjust Paper Select from a list Paper curl mode Normal* Use this setting to
types of paper types reduce paper curl
that the printer Reduced in print jobs.
supports. The
available
options are the
same for each
paper type.

Print Quality Optimize Line Detail Normal* Use this setting if

you have scattered
Off lines in printed
pages.
Alternate

Print Quality Optimize Moisture Control Normal*

Alternate

Print Quality Optimize Envelope control Normal

Reduced Temp

Print Quality Optimize Tray 1 Normal

Alternate

Print Quality Optimize Background Normal

Alternate

Print Quality Optimize Uniformity Normal

Control
Alternate 1

Alternate 2

Alternate 3

Print Quality Optimize Cac03 Off

On

Print Quality Optimize Best Normal Off

On

Print Quality Optimize Tracking Control Off

On

Print Quality Optimize Registration Normal

Alternate

Print Quality Optimize Transfer Control Normal

Alternate 1

Print Quality Optimize Moisture Control Normal

Alternate

Print Quality Optimize Reset Optimize Reset

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 133

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Print Quality Edge Control Off

Light

Normal*

Maximum

Manage Trays Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Tray printer handles
When available jobs that have
specified a
specific input tray.
Two options are
available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.

When available:
The printer pulls
from another tray
if the specified
tray is empty, even
though the specific
tray was indicated
for the job.

Manage Trays Manually Feed Always prompt* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Prompt on mismatch appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.

Prompt on
mismatch: A
prompt displays
only if the size
or type do not
match or the tray is
empty.

134 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options are
available:

Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.

Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

Manage Trays Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on

or off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty.
Two options are
available:

Allow: When this

option is selected
the user is
prompted to either
add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray. This is the
factory default.

Do not allow: When

this option is
selected, the user
is not given the
option of selecting
a different tray. The
printer prompts the
user to add paper
to the tray that was
initially selected.

Print menu (SFP) and Copy/Print menu (MFP) 135

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Alternative Off* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
On preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you would
for printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the
speed required for
printing on both
sides.

Manage Trays Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Automatic: Choose
this option to
skip printing blank
sides during a two-
sided print job. The
printer can print
jobs faster when
blank sides are
skipped.

Always: Choose
this option to print
all sides of a two-
sided job, even
if one side is
blank. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

136 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-24 Print menu (SFP) or Copy/Print menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description

Manage Trays Override A4/ Yes* Prints on letter-size

Letter paper when an A4
No job is sent but
no A4-size paper
is loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size paper is
loaded). This option
will also override
A3 with ledger-size
paper and ledger
with A3-size paper.

Defeating interlocks
Learn about defeating printer interlocks.

Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or rear door is open.

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation.

Defeat the front (cartridge) door interlock

1. Open the front door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a strip, and insert
the strip into the slot for the front door logic switch.

Figure 4-22 Defeat the front (cartridge) door interlock

Defeating interlocks 137

 Defeat the rear door interlock
1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the rear door interlock.

Figure 4-23 Defeat the rear door interlock

LED Diagnostics (formatter)

Learn about troubleshooting the printer using formatter LEDs.

Network LEDs
The formatter has two network port LEDs. When the printer is connected to a properly working network
through a network cable, the amber LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link
status.

A blinking amber LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures,
check all of the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the network card link
speed setting by using the printer control panel.

Configure link speed setting from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Settings, and
then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Networking, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Ethernet, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Link Speed, and then press the OK button.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the desired link speed setting, and then press the OK button.

6. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Done (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then press
the OK button.

138 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Configure link speed setting from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Settings button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Networking

● Ethernet

● Link Speed

3. Touch and then touch the desired link speed setting, and then touch the Done button.

Disable cartridge check

Learn about the disable cartridge check troubleshooting diagnostic.

NOTE: This item appears in the control-panel menus. However, the function is not available for this
printer.

Print/stop test
Learn about the print/stop test troubleshooting diagnostic.

Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams
within the engine.

During this test, stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test can be programmed to
stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test
can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the
job-print time, the printer can recover in one of two ways.

Printer recovery (print/stop test)

● After the print job is completed press the OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before
the timer times out.

● After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and
return it to a normal state.

Common print/stop test timing millisecond (ms) stops

● 600 ms: The page has passed the registration area and the leading edge is just short of entering the
fuser. The image can be seen on the paper but has not fused. If the defect is visible then the cause
might be the drum, transfer roller, or a roller prior to, or in, the registration area.

● 1200 ms: The leading edge is about 18mm (0.71 in) into the top output bin. The image has gone
through the fuser. If the defect was not visible prior to the fuser, and is visible after the fuser, then
the fuser it is the likely cause of the print quality defect. Inspect the fuser for damage, debris, or
labels stuck to the fuser. Replace the fuser. Discuss media specifications and proper care of the
fuser with the customer.

Print/stop test from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

Disable cartridge check 139

 3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print/Stop Test, and then press the OK button.

Print/stop test from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Print/Stop Test

3. Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.

Individual component diagnostics

Learn about printer individual component diagnostics.

Paper path test

Learn about the paper path test troubleshooting diagnostic.

This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages. Use these pages to isolate the cause of jams.

To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, and specify the number of copies to print. Print
multiple copies to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after
beginning the diagnostic feature:

● Print Test Page: Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy.
To specify other settings, scroll down the menu, and select the setting, and then scroll back up and
select Print Test Page to start the test.

● Source Tray: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.

● Number of Copies: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500.

Paper path test from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Paper Path Test, and then press the OK button.

Paper path test from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

140 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 ● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Paper Path Test

3. Select the paper path test options for the test.

Print/stop test
Learn about the print/stop test troubleshooting diagnostic.

Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams
within the engine.

During this test, stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test can be programmed to
stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test
can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the
job-print time, the printer can recover in one of two ways.

Printer recovery (print/stop test)

● After the print job is completed press the OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before
the timer times out.

● After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and
return it to a normal state.

Common print/stop test timing millisecond (ms) stops

● 600 ms: The page has passed the registration area and the leading edge is just short of entering the
fuser. The image can be seen on the paper but has not fused. If the defect is visible then the cause
might be the drum, transfer roller, or a roller prior to, or in, the registration area.

● 1200 ms: The leading edge is about 18mm (0.71 in) into the top output bin. The image has gone
through the fuser. If the defect was not visible prior to the fuser, and is visible after the fuser, then
the fuser it is the likely cause of the print quality defect. Inspect the fuser for damage, debris, or
labels stuck to the fuser. Replace the fuser. Discuss media specifications and proper care of the
fuser with the customer.

Print/stop test from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.

4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance mode.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print/Stop Test, and then press the OK button.

Print/stop test from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

Print/stop test 141

 ● Troubleshooting

● Diagnostic Tests

● Print/Stop Test

3. Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.

Paper path sensors test

Learn about the paper path sensors test troubleshooting diagnostic.

NOTE: This item appears in the control-panel menus. However, the function is not available for this
printer.

Individual component test

Learn about the individual component test troubleshooting diagnostic.

NOTE: This item appears in the control-panel menus. However, the function is not available for this
printer.

Manual sensor test

Learn about the manual sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.

NOTE: This item appears in the control-panel menus. However, the function is not available for this
printer.

Tray/bin manual sensor test

Learn about the tray/bin manual sensor test troubleshooting diagnostic.

NOTE: This item appears in the control-panel menus. However, the function is not available for this
printer.

Diagrams: Block diagrams

View block diagrams for the printer.

Cross section diagrams

View printer and paper feeder cross section diagrams.

142 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Cross-sectional view of the printer
Figure 4-24 Cross-sectional view of the printer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13

Item Description Item Description

1 Fuser output roller 12 Feed roller

2 Duplex flapper 13 Tray 2 feed roller

3 Output roller 14 Tray 2 separation roller

4 Fuser film 15 Tray 2 pickup roller

5 Fuser 16 Duplex re-pickup roller

6 Photosensitive drum 17 Registration roller

7 Laser scanner assembly 18 Tray 2

8 Toner cartridge 19 Transfer roller

9 Registration shutter 20 Duplex feed roller

10 Tray 1 pickup roller 21 Pressure roller

11 Tray 1 separation pad

Cross section diagrams 143

 Cross-sectional view of the 550-sheet paper feeder
Figure 4-25 Cross-sectional view of the 550-sheet paper feeder
1 2 3 4 5

Item Description

1 Tray 3

2 Tray 3 pickup roller

3 Tray 3 feed roller

4 Feed roller

5 Tray 3 separation roller

Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations

View printed circuit assembly (PCA) diagrams.

144 Chapter 4 Solve problems

DC controller PCA connections
Figure 4-26 DC controller PCA connections
J5 J4

J10

J2
J6

J9

J3 J8
J1 J7

Item Description Item Description

J1 Low-voltage power supply J6 Thermistor

assembly

J2 High-voltage power supply J7 Media-width sensor

PCA

J3 Formatter J7 Duplex feed senor

J4 Laser assembly J7 TOP sensor

J5 Connector PCA J8 Cassette media out sensor

J6 Output bin media-full J9 Multipurpose tray media

sensor out sensor

J6 Fuser output sensor J10 Memory tag (E-label)

J6 Loop sensor

Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations 145

 Formatter PCA connections
Figure 4-27 Formatter PCA connections (SFP)

J3

J41
J97

J38
J7

J1 J11
J9 J10
J26 J14 J8 J13 J19

Item Description Item Description

J1 Ethernet port J3 Control-panel FFC

J7 Trusted platform module J8 DC controller

(TPM)

J9 Low-voltage power supply J10 Empty

(LVPS)

J11 Island of Data (IOD) J13 Empty

J14 Empty J19 Empty

J26 Empty J38 USB port (direct computer

connection)

J41 USB port (job storage or J97 embedded Multi-Media

accessory connection) Card (eMMC)

Figure 4-28 Formatter PCA connections (MFP)

J12 J17 J3
J18
J41 J4
J-USB
J97

J38
J7

J1 J11
J9 J10
J26 J14 J8 J13 J19

Item Description Item Description

J1 Ethernet port J3 Control-panel FFC

146 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Item Description Item Description

J4 Fax FFC J7 Trusted platform module

(TPM)

J8 DC controller J9 Low-voltage power supply

(LVPS)

J10 Empty J11 Empty

J12 Document feeder J13 Empty

J14 Empty J17 Sub scanner assembly

J18 Sub scanner assembly J19 Empty

J26 Empty J38 USB port (direct computer

connection)

J41 USB port (job storage or J97 embedded Multi-Media

accessory connection) Card (eMMC)

J-USB Walk-up USB port

1x550-sheet paper feeder PCA connectors

Figure 4-29 1x550-sheet paper feeder PCA connectors

J604 J600
J603

J602 J601

J605

Item Description

1 Tray 3

2 Tray 3 pickup roller

3 Tray 3 feed roller

4 Feed roller

5 Tray 3 separation roller

Diagrams: External plug and port locations

View printer external plugs and ports diagrams.

Diagrams: External plug and port locations 147

 External plug and port locations (SFP)
Figure 4-30 External plug and port locations (SFP)

2
3

Item Description

1 USB port (for job storage and private printing)

2 USB interface port

3 Ethernet port

4 Power connection

148 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 External plug and port locations (MFP)
Figure 4-31 External plug and port locations (MFP)

1
2

4
5

Item Description

1 USB port (for job storage and private printing)

2 USB interface port

3 Ethernet port

4 Telephone “line out” port (this port is covered by a plug

and is inactive)

5 Fax “line in” port (for attaching the fax phone line to the
printer)

6 Power connection

Diagrams: Major component locations

View printer major component locations diagrams.

Diagrams: Major component locations 149

 Major components (base printer)
Figure 4-32 Major components (base printer)

3
1

Item Description

1 Fuser

2 Registration assembly

3 Laser/scanner assembly

Motors and fans (base printer)

Figure 4-33 Motors and fans (base printer)

Item Description

1 Fuser motor (M1)

2 Main fan (FM1)

150 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Rollers and pads (base printer)
Figure 4-34 Rollers and pads (base printer)

4
2
5
3

Item Description

1 Transfer roller

2 Tray 1 separation pad

3 Separation roller assembly

4 Tray 1 pickup roller

5 Pickup roller assembly

PCAs (base printer)

Figure 4-35 PCAs (base printer)

2
3
1

Item Description

1 High-voltage power supply assembly

2 DC controller PCA

Diagrams: Major component locations 151

152
Timing chart two consecutive prints on LTR paper
3
Power ON
Item

WAIT STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY

1 Print command
Not shown
Not shown

2 Cassette pickup solenoid (SL1)

4 TOP sensor (PS2)

5 Fuser output sensor (PS13)

Chapter 4 Solve problems

6 BD signal

7 Scanner motor (M3) Figure 4-36 Timing chart

9 Fuser motor (M1)

Diagrams: General timing chart

10 Fuser heater

11 Primary charging bias

View the printer timing chart diagram.

12 Developing bias

13 Transfer bias

14 Main fan (FM1)

Description

Low-voltage power supply assembly

Fax PCA (located below the formatter PCA)

Formatter PCA (located in front of the DC controller)
 153
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 9
18 +24VBSNS 18
+24VD 2 8
1

power supply
SGND
SL2

17 17
1

Control panel
J104
SL

High-voltage
(MPTSL) 3 7
Control panel Control panel
2

16 +24VA 16
2

VIN(BL)
4 6 NFC PCA
+5.4V
(Magic frame) LCD PCA
TAG

15 15 5 5 SW PCA
2

VSS(W)
J10

14 24VCON 14
J18

6 4
1

J509
J13DH

13 FANON 13 J504 J506

J13D

7 3
J13L

PGND
1

J33

J44
12 FANLOCK 12
4

/SCNDEC 22 8 2 8 6
D

PCA
2

J341
11 TRNCLK 11
3

M3

9 1
M

+24VD /SCNACC
3

10 TRPCLK 10
1

3
SL1

J110

J802
1

(CSTSL)
J105

+24VD
SL

18
4

9 TRPWM 9
2

4
2

J2

8 TRCRNT 8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
14 LDCTRL0 1 J301
Laser/scanner ass’y

7 DEVACCLK 7 1 2 3
13 LDCTRL1 2
6 DEVACPWM 6

GND
FANLOCK
FANON
12 LDCTRL2 3
5 DEVDCSNS 5
/BLMACC 11 SGND 4
Laser PCA

4 TNR 4

/CPRESET
7

10 /VDO1 5
1

/BLMDEC PRIACPWM

/CPCLK
CPOUT
3 3

CPCLK
6

VDO1

+3.3V
9 6
2

BLMFG

CPIN
GND
PRIDCPWM

+5V
2 2
14
5

J811

8 SGND 7 1 2 3
3

+24VD PRIACCLK
1 1
4

4
M1

7 VDO2 8
4
M

+24VD

22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
3

6 /VDO2 9
5

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1
PGND
J4
2

6
J102

5 SGND 10
6

FM1
J705

PGND
1

4 SGND 11
7

12 CLEI 12
3 +3.3VB 12
11 GND 11 22
2 /BDI 13
CLEO
8 6
10 10
Connector PCA

PWRLED_ON 1 /LDPWM 14 J510

1

9 SGND 9 J503 J505

5

1
SW1

PWRLED_PWR /SCNDEC
1 1 8 /BDO 8
4

SGND /SCNACC
2 2 7 SGND 7
3

Formatter
2 2

PWRSW

12

12
AIRTMP
3 3 /VDO1 WiFi

J501
6 6
LED1

4
J109
J701

AIRTMP

J3
4 PWRSW 4 VDO1
5 5
1

5
Figure 4-37 General circuit diagram (base printer)

5 PWRLED_ON 5
1

4 SGND 4
6 PWRLED_PWR 6 /VDO2
3 3
+24VD 7 BLMFG 7 J1302S J1302A J507
2 VDO2 2
1
SL3

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
J107
SL

Learn about printer test and information pages.

(DUPSWBKSL) 8 /BLMDEC 8 SGND
1 1
2

9 /BLMACC
CSTSL
9 C
J101

10 10

19
11 MPTSL 11
+24VD

J5
J111B

DUPSWBKSL FREQSNS_LVT
1
CL1

12 12
1
2
CL

J13B

(REFEEDCL)

9 10

1
2

13 REFEEDCL 13 /3.3VCON
2
1

2
+3.3VC 1 2 3 4 5 6
14 OPTPICKSL(SO) 14 3.3VA J204S
J508

3
OPTPLVLSNS(SI) FSRD SGND
15 15 J206S

DC controller

4
+24VD OPTLIFTMT RLYD +3.3VC
16 16 J205S
J111A
3

5
(REFEEDCL) 17 OPTSNSAD 17 PWRSAVE2 J207S
SGND
USB PCA
1
CL1

CL

6
J13A

18 +3.3VB 18 24VDON
2

7
19 SGND 19 LVPS_GND

8
Diagrams: General circuit diagrams

24VA

Internal test and information pages

2

9
J201
24VD
OPTPICKSL

10
1
J1
1

OPTPLVLSNS TH1
2

2 1
OPTLIFTMT
3

+3.3VB(Y)

Low-voltage power supply PCA

OPTSNSAD J4123 +24VD
J208A

1
4

MPTPSNS(W) LVPSGND

2
SGND PS3 J4122 J209A

2
5

SGND(BR)

PS13
+3.3VB J4121 +3.3VC

J9

FU1

FU2
J204A

3
6
J103

+24VD SGND
J206A
7

4
2 1
+3.3VC
J410L J205A

1
J410DH SGND
+3.3VB(R) J207A

2
J4013 J410D

J106
View the printer circuit diagram.

J4201

J4202

J4203

J4204
CSTPSNS(W)

1
1 2
PS1 J4012

2
LVPS_GND
LVPS_GND
+24VD
+24VD
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SGND(BR)
J4011

J8
J691D

3
J691DH

2
AC-N
J691LH

3
B

1
J691L

H1
2
J212
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AC-H

2
REFEEDSNS(V) TP1

1
J7015

FSROUTSNS(GN)
TOPSNS(GY) 2 1

J213
J7014 TP

2
SGND(R)

1
+3.3VB(GY)
J7013

SGND(BR)

NFCS(BL)
PS2b PWSNSAND(W)

MAINTH
J7012

4
+3.3VB(BR)

SGND
2
J7011

J7
5
3
PS1a

4
4 3 2 1 2 1

3
5
J406 J407

2
Paper feeder controller PCA
MAINTH

6
J600

J700

1
1
FSROUTSNS

2
NFCS
PS4

3
+3.3VB

4
1

SGND SGND
SOLD6122

5
J601

J405
SW3 OPTCSTSNS FULLSNS
SOLD6121

6
J6
2 J4033
+3.3VB(BL)
SGND(W)
PS2 J4032
+3.3VB(Y) TOPSNS(BR)
J4031 AC-H

Inlet
J4613

1
1 J210
OPTCSTPSNS(GN) 2 SOLD210
PS461 J4612

2
3

J602
SGND(BR) AC-N
J4611 J211

3
SOLD211
J203
+3.3VB(V) 1 2 3 4
J4603

1
OPTPLVLSNS(GN)
PS460 J4602

2
J603
SGND(BR)
J4601

3
A
+24VD(BR) +24VD

1
+24VD

M5

1
J605
M
OPTLIFTMT(W) LVPS_GND

2
LVPS_GND
+24VD

J692DH
1
SL4

2
J692D
SL

1
J692L

J604
OPTPICKSL

2
 Configuration and Jetdirect page
Print and find printer information on configuration and HP embedded Jetdirect information pages.

NOTE: Depending on the model, up to three pages print when printing a configuration page. In
addition to the main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration and the wireless
pages print.

Print the configuration page from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Reports,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the print icon . Press the OK button to print the pages.

Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Configuration/Status pages

3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.

4. Touch the print icon to print the pages.

154 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Figure 4-38 Configuration page

HP LaserJet M

1 4
5

6
2

Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM

Item Description Item Description

1 Device information 5 Event log

2 Installed personalities and 6 Security

options

3 HP Web services 7 Paper trays and options

4 Memory

Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the email gateways, is
especially helpful while servicing the printer. This information is on the various configuration pages.

Table 4-25 Important information on the configuration pages

Type of information Specific information Configuration page

Firmware Bundle Version Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)

Internal test and information pages 155

 Table 4-25 Important information on the configuration pages (continued)

Type of information Specific information Configuration page

Firmware Revision Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)

Firmware Datecode Firmware information Main configuration page (Device

information)

Accessories and internal storage Optional installed formatter devices and Main configuration page (Installed
accessories information Personalities and Options)
All optional devices that are installed on
the printer should be listed on the main
configuration page.

Separate pages print for the optional

paper handling devices and the fax
accessory. These pages list more-
detailed information for those devices.

Memory Total RAM information Main configuration page (Memory)

Tray and bin information Size and type by tray (including installed Main configuration page (Paper Trays
optional paper feeders) information and Options)

Engine cycles, service ID, and cartridge Engine information Main configuration page (Device
information Information)

Event-log information Error information Main configuration page (Event Log)

The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following
information:

156 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Figure 4-39 HP embedded Jetdirect page

HP LaserJet M

1 4

5
2

6
3

Sep/13/2019 6:56:00 AM

Item Description

1 General Information indicates the printer status,

model number, hardware firmware version, port select,
port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing
identification, and manufactured date.

2 Security Settings information

3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received,

unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing
errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable
packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.

4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address

5 IPv4 information

6 IPv6 information

Internal test and information pages 157

 Reports menu
Learn about the control-panel Reports menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

NOTE: The View option is control-panel type dependent (might not be available).

Table 4-26 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Cancel Shows a map of the entire
control panel system and
View the selected values for each
setting.
Print

Configuration/Status Pages Current Settings Page Cancel Shows a summary of the

current settings for the
View printer. This might be helpful
if you plan to make changes
Print and need a record of the
present configuration.

Configuration/Status Pages Configuration Page Cancel Shows the printer settings

and installed accessories.
View

Print

Configuration/Status Pages How to Connect Page Cancel Shows the network

information typically needed
View to connect the printer to a
network.
Print

Configuration/Status Pages Supplies Status Page Cancel Shows the approximate

remaining life for the
View supplies; reports statistics
on total number of pages
Print and jobs processed, serial
number, page counts, and
maintenance information.

HP provides approximations
of the remaining life for
the supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels
might be different than the
approximations provided.

Configuration/Status Pages Usage Page Cancel Shows a count of all paper

sizes that have passed
View through the printer; lists
whether they were simplex or
Print duplex, and reports the page
count.

158 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-26 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages File Directory Page Cancel Shows the file name and
folder name for files that are
View stored in the printer memory.

Print

Configuration/Status Pages Web Services Status Page Cancel Shows the detected Web
Services for the printer.
View

Print

Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Cancel Contains a list of the faxes
that have been sent from or
Fax models only View received by this printer.

Print

Fax Reports Billing Codes Report Cancel Provides a list of billing codes
that have been used for
Fax models only View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
Print were billed to each code.

Fax Reports Blocked Fax List Cancel A list of phone numbers that
are blocked from sending
Fax models only View faxes to this printer.

Print

Fax Reports Speed Dial List Cancel Shows the speed dials that
have been set up for this
Fax models only View printer.

Print

Fax Reports Fax Call Report Cancel A detailed report of the last
fax operation, either sent or
Fax models only View received.

Print

Other Pages PCL Font List Cancel Prints the available PCL fonts.

Print

Other Pages PS Font List Cancel Prints the available PS fonts.

Print

Settings menu
Learn about the control-panel Settings menu.

NOTE: You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web
Server for more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser.

TIP: If prompted, enter the EWS personal identification number (PIN) from a sticker on the printer
(typically located inside the front door or on a toner cartridge tray).

Settings menu 159

 General menu
Learn about the control-panel General (Settings) menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the General menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-27 General menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time

Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and
YYYY/MMM/DD to configure date/
time settings.

Date/Time Date/Time Format Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format
Settings that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.

Date/Time Date/Time Time Zone Select the time zone

Settings from a list.

Date/Time Date/Time Date Select the date from

Settings a pop-up calendar.

Date/Time Date/Time Time Select the time from a

Settings pop-up keypad.

Date/Time Date/Time Adjust for Daylight Checkbox If you are in an

Settings Savings area that uses
daylight savings
time, select the
Adjust for Daylight
Savings box.

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled + (Add) Use to configure

events displays. the printer to
MFP Edit automatically wake
up or go to sleep
Delete at specific times
on specific days.
Using this feature
saves energy.

NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.

160 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-27 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled Event Type Wake Select whether to
events displays. add or edit a Wake
MFP Sleep event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time
and the days for
the wake or sleep
event.

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled Event Time

events displays.
MFP

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled Event Days Select days of the
events displays. week from a list.
MFP

Energy Settings Sleep Timer Sleep Mode/Auto Range: 1 to 120 Set the number
Settings Off After minutes of minutes after
MFP which the printer
Default = 60 minutes enters Sleep or
Auto Off mode.
Use the arrow
buttons on the
control panel
to increase or
decrease the
number of minutes.

Energy Settings Wake/Auto On to All Events*

These Events
MFP Network port

Power button only

Energy Settings Sleep Timer Sleep/Auto Off Enabled* Enable or disable

Settings Timer the printer sleep or
SFP Disabled auto off function.

Energy Settings Sleep Timer Sleep Mode/Auto Range: 1 to 120 Set the number
Settings Off After minutes of minutes after
SFP which the printer
Default = 60 minutes enters Sleep or
Auto Off mode.
Use the arrow
buttons on the
control panel
to increase or
decrease the
number of minutes.

Display Settings Display Brightness A sliding bar Use to specify the

displays with the intensity of the
indicator set in LCD control panel
the middle. Use display.
the arrow keys to
select the desired
brightness and
then select Done.

Display Settings System Sound On* Use to enable or

disable sounds on
Off the printer.

General menu 161

 Table 4-27 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Display Settings Language Settings Language Select from a list of Use to select a
languages that the different language
printer supports. for control panel
messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.

Display Settings Keyboard Layout Each language has Select the default
a default keyboard keyboard layout
layout. To change it, that matches the
select from a list of language you want
layouts. to use.

Display Settings Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display
or hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.

Display Settings Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 seconds between any
activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.

162 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-27 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Display Settings Clearable Display during job* Use this feature

Warnings to set the period
Display until cleared that a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from the
display when the
next job starts.

Display Settings Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option

Events seconds)* to configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to continue when the printer
encounters certain
errors. If the
Auto-continue (10
seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK
to continue option
is selected, the
job will stop and
require the user
to touch the
OK button before
continuing.

Enable Device Enabled Enables the printer

USB to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive.

Quiet Mode Off* Quiet Mode slows

the printer down to
On reduce the noise
the printer makes
Automatic transition when printing.

Range: 10-300 pages Automatic

transition allows
Default = 10 pages you to set a
predetermined job
size of 10 to 999
pages, and print
jobs will print in
Quiet Mode for all
print jobs up to
the predetermined
page size.

General menu 163

 Table 4-27 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Jam Recovery Automatic* This printer

provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:

Automatic: The
printer attempts
to reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because
no memory is
used to store the
most recent pages,
performance is
optimal.

NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs out
of paper and the
job is being printed
on both sides,
some pages can
be lost.

On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated
to store the
last few pages
printed. This might
cause overall
performance to
suffer.

Auto Recovery Enabled If Auto Recovery

is enabled and
Disabled* an unrecoverable
error occurs in the
device firmware,
the device
automatically turns
off and turns back
on to recover from
the error.

164 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-27 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Enable Auto Send Disabled* Browse to the HP

Embedded Web
Enabled Server AutoSend
configuration page
for advanced
set up and
the HP online
Privacy Statement
Information.

Use the Enable

Auto Send menu
to enable or
disable the
AutoSend feature.
The AutoSend
feature enables
your product
to periodically
send product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts and
supplies status
information to HP
web addresses
(URLs), or
email addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a relationship
with HP that
provides you
services such as
proactive cartridge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts, support
agreements, or
usage tracking.

Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature

if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from the
control panel. Held
print jobs start
printing after the
copy job is finished,
provided that no
other copy job is in
the print queue.

General menu 165

 Table 4-27 General menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Reset Factory Address Book (MFP) Use to restore

Settings all printer settings
Copy (MFP) to their factory
defaults.
Digital Send (MFP)

E-mail (MFP)

Fax (MFP)

General (MFP)

Print (MFP)

Security (MFP)

Cancel (SFP)

Reset (SFP)

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP)

Learn about the control-panel Scan/Digital Send Settings (MFP) menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Scan/Digital Send
Settings menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

166 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Email E-mail Setup E-mail Setup Use to configure

Settings Wizard settings that
NOTE: Email apply to sending
Scan to Network Settings only documents
Folder Settings through email or
saving documents
Scan to USB Drive to a folder on the
Settings network or on a
USB multi-drive.
NOTE: The same
options are The E-mail
available for each Setup Wizard
of these features, feature configures
except where the printer to
noted. send scanned
images as email
attachments. To
open the printer
HP Embedded Web
Server and set
up the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 167

 Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Default Job Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Options job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded Web
Server by typing
the IP address of
the printer into a
Web browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Default File Name [Untitled]* The printer is

shipped with a
factory default file
name of [Untitled]
for any scanned
files that are sent
or saved. Use this
feature to specify
a different default
file name. If you
are saving a file
to a network folder
or USB storage
device and a file
with the default
file name already
exists, a number
is appended to
the file name,
for example,
[Untitled]001.

168 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Document File Select from a list PDF provides the

Type of file types. best overall image
and text quality.

JPEG is a good
choice for most
graphics. Most
computers have
a browser that
can view .JPEG
files. This file type
produces one file
per page.

TIFF is a standard
file format that
many graphics
programs support.
This file type
produces one file
per page.

MTIFF: stands for

multi-page TIFF.
This file type saves
multiple scanned
pages in a single
file.

XPS (XML Paper

Specification)
creates an XAML
file that preserves
the original
formatting of the
document and
supports color
graphics and
embedded fonts.

PDF/A (Archivable):
provides
archivable text and
image quality.

NOTE: OCR file

types are not
supported on this
printer unless
attached to DSS.

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 169

 Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text/ Mixed* Use to optimize

Picture the output for
Text a particular type
of content. You
Printed picture can optimize the
output for text,
Photograph printed pictures, or
a mixture.

Mixed: Use to
optimize the
setting for text and
for pictures.

Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture:
Use for line
drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Quality and File High (large file) Use to select

Size the quality for
Medium* the output. Higher-
quality images
Low (small file) require a larger
file size than lower-
quality images.
Larger files take
more time to
send, and some
recipients might
have trouble
receiving larger
files.

170 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on
one side or both
sides. Then touch
the Orientation
setting to
indicate whether
the original
has portrait
or landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.

Orientation Automatically For some features

detect to work correctly,
you must specify
Portrait* the way the
content of the
Landscape original document
is placed on
the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait
or landscape
orientation.

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 171

 Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Resolution 600 dpi Sets the

resolution for sent
400 dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
300 dpi have more dots
per inch (dpi),
200 dpi so they show
more detail. Lower
150 dpi* resolution images
have fewer dots
75 dpi per inch and show
less detail, but
the file size is
smaller. Some file
types, for example
a file that will
be processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.

Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features

Orientation to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on
the page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait
or landscape
orientation.

172 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Color/Black Automatically Use to enable

detect color or or disable color
black* scanning.

Automatically Automatically
detect color or detect color or
gray black: When pages
without color are
Color detected, the
printer creates
Black an image of the
page in 1-bit
Black/Gray black if other
settings allow. If
the other settings
don't allow (File
Type, for example),
the image is in
grayscale.

Automatically
detect color or
gray: When pages
without color are
detected, the
printer creates
an image of the
page in grayscale.
Select this option
for the best image
quality for non-
color pages.

Color: Scans
documents in
color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.

Black: Scans
documents in
black and white
with a compressed
file size.

Original Size Select from a list Use to describe

of supported sizes. the page size
of the original
document.

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 173

 Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Configure

to receive
Notify when job notification about
completes the status of a
sent document.
Notify only if job
fails Do not notify: Turns
off this feature.

Notify when
job completes:
Select to receive
notification for this
job only.

Print Notify only

if job fails:
E-mail Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print: Select
to print the
notification at this
printer.

Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Notification E-mail E-mail: Select

address to receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.

Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of
the copy.

Adjust the
Darkness setting
to increase or
decrease the
amount of white
and black in the
colors.

174 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Contrast Adjust the

Contrast setting
to increase
or decrease
the difference
between the
lightest and
darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the

Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.

Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting
to clarify or
soften the image.
For example,
increasing the
sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic Tone

Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.

Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item

to automatically
Crop to content crop the scan
for digital sending.
Crop to paper Use the Crop to
content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that
has detectable
content.

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) 175

 Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Erase Edges Use Inches Use this menu

item to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such
as dark borders
Front side erase or staple marks,
by cleaning the
specified edges
of the scanned
image. In each
of the text
boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
left edge, and right
edge to clean.

Multi-feed On* This setting stops

Detection the scanning
Off process if it
detects multiple-
page feeds
through the
document feeder.

Blank Page Disabled* Use to prevent

Suppression blank pages
Enabled in the original
document from
being included
in the output
document.

Digital Send Allow Usage of Enabled* Configure how the

Service Setup Digital Sending printer interacts
Software (DSS) Disabled with the HP
Server Digital Sending
Software (DSS)
server. HP DSS
handles digital
sending tasks,
such as faxing,
emailing, and
sending scanned
documents to a
network folder
or USB storage
device.

Use the Allow

Usage of Digital
Sending Software
(DSS) Server
option to configure
the printer to use
HP DSS.

176 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-28 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Allow Transfer Enabled* Use the Allow

to New Digital Transfer to New
Sending Software Disabled Digital Sending
(DSS) Server Software (DSS)
Server option to
specify whether
DSS management
of a printer is
transferable to a
different DSS.

Fax menu (MFP)

Learn about the control-panel Fax menu (MFP).

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Fax menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Internal Fax Configure settings

Modem Setup for sending faxes
from the printer.

Use the Internal

Fax Modem Setup
feature to set up
options for faxing.

NOTE: To set up
LAN fax or Internet
fax, use the HP
Embedded Web
Server. To open the
HP Embedded Web
Server, type the
printer network
address into a Web
browser. To
configure the fax
features, select
the Fax tab.

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Fax Dial Volume Off These settings
Settings control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Dialing Mode Tone*
Settings
Pulse

Fax menu (MFP) 177

 Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Redial Interval 1 – 5 Minutes
Settings
Default = 5
minutes

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Fax Send Speed Fast*
Settings
Medium

Slow

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Dialing Prefix
Settings

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Detect Dial Tone
Settings

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Redial on Error Range: 0 – 9
Settings
Default = 2

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Redial on No Range: 0 – 2
Settings Answer
Default = 0

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Dialing Redial on Busy Range: 0 – 9
Settings
Default = 3

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature
Settings Confirmation is enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the fax
number twice.

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users who
Settings have the correct
Disabled driver installed to
send faxes through
the printer from
their computers.

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send JBIG Compression Enabled* The JBIG
Settings compression
Disabled reduces fax-
transmission time,
which can
result in lower
phone charges.
However, using
JBIG compression
sometimes causes
compatibility
problems with
older fax
machines. If this
occurs, turn off the
JBIG compression.

178 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send Error Correction Enabled* When error-
Settings Mode correction mode
Disabled is enabled
and an error
occurs during fax
transmission, the
printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup General Fax Send Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend
Settings or overlay the fax
Overlay header page.

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Billing Codes Enable Billing Off When billing codes
Codes are enabled, a
On* prompt displays
that asks the
user to enter the
billing code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.

You can also

use the billing
codes report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used
for faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Billing Codes Default Billing Specify a default
Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the
user sends an
outgoing fax. If this
field is blank, no
default billing code
is provided for the
user.

Fax menu (MFP) 179

 Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Billing Codes Minimum Length Range: 1 – 16 Specify the
required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can
be between 1 and
16 characters long.

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Billing Codes Allow users to edit Off
billing codes
On*

Fax Send Settings Default Job Image Preview Make optional* Use the Image
Options Preview feature to
Require preview scan a document
and display a
Disable preview preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Resolution Standard (100 x Select the
Options 200dpi)* resolution for
outgoing faxes. If
Fine (200 x 200dpi) you increase the
resolution, faxes
Superfine (300 x might be clearer
300dpi) but they could
transmit more
slowly. Some file
types, for example
a file that will
be processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
be automatically
changed to a valid
value.

180 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Send Settings Default Job Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe
Options the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
Pages flip up select whether the
original document
is printed on
one side or both
sides. Then touch
the Orientation
setting to
indicate whether
the original
has portrait
or landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.

If the Pages flip up

option is selected,
the back side of
the page is printed
upside-down. This
option is for print
jobs that are
bound along the
top edge.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Original Sides Orientation Portrait* For some features
Options to work correctly,
Landscape you must specify
the way the
content of the
original document
is placed on the
page.

Portrait: This
setting means the
short edge of the
page is along the
top.

Landscape: This
setting means the
long edge of the
page is along the
top.

Fax menu (MFP) 181

 Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Send Settings Default Job Notification Do not notify* Use to receive
Options notification about
Notify when job the status of a
completes sent document.

Notify only if job Do not notify: Turns

fails off this feature.

Notify when
job completes:
Select to receive
notification for this
job only.

Notify only
if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Notification Print Print: Select

Options to print the
E-mail notification at this
printer.

E-mail: Select
to receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Notification Include Thumbnail When sending an
Options analog fax, select
Include Thumbnail
to receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page
of the fax in your
notification.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Notification Notification E-mail Provide the
Options address email address
that will receive
notifications.

182 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Send Settings Default Job Content Orientation Portrait* For some features
Options Orientation to work correctly,
Landscape you must specify
the way the
content of the
original document
is placed on the
page.

Portrait: This
setting means the
short edge of the
page is along the
top.

Landscape: This
setting means the
long edge of the
page is along the
top.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Original Size Select from a list Use to describe
Options of sizes that the the page size
printer supports. of the original
document.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the
Options overall quality of
the copy.

Adjust the
Darkness setting
to increase or
decrease the
amount of white
and black in the
colors.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Image Adjustment Contrast Adjust the
Options Contrast setting
to increase
or decrease
the difference
between the
lightest and
darkest color on
the page.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Image Adjustment Background Adjust the
Options Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.

Fax menu (MFP) 183

 Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Send Settings Default Job Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the
Options Sharpness setting
to clarify or
soften the image.
For example,
increasing the
sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Image Adjustment Automatic Tone The printer
Options automatically
adjusts the
Darkness,
Contrast, and
Background
Cleanup settings
to the most
appropriate for
the scanned
document.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Optimize Text/ Manually adjust* Optimize For Optimizes the
Options Picture output for a
Text particular type
of content. You
Printed picture can optimize the
output for text,
Photograph printed pictures, or
a mixture.

Manually adjust:
Use to manually
optimize the
setting for text or
for pictures.

Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture:
Use for line
drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

184 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Send Settings Default Job Multi-feed Disabled This setting stops
Options Detection the scanning
Enabled* process if it
detects multiple-
page feeds
through the
document feeder.

Fax Send Settings Default Job Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank
Options Suppression pages in the
Enabled original document
from being
included in the
output document.

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.

High

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Rings To Answer Range: 1–6

Settings
Default = 1

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Fax Send Speed Fast*

Settings
Medium

Slow

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Interval Range: 220–600

Settings ms

Default = 600 ms

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Frequency Range: 1–200

Settings
Default = 68hz

Fax Receive Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Settings Schedule concerns about
Always print faxes* the security of
private faxes, use
Use schedule this feature to
store faxes rather
than having them
automatically print.
Select Incoming
Fax Options, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.

Fax menu (MFP) 185

 Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Receive Fax Printing Schedule Add Print incoming If you are using
Settings Schedule faxes a fax printing
Touch this to Edit schedule, use this
set up a fax Store incoming menu to configure
printing schedule if Delete faxes when to print
you selected the faxes.
Use Fax Printing Time
Schedule option.
Event Days

Fax Receive Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked fax

Settings Numbers Block list can contain
up to 30 numbers.
When the printer
receives a call
from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax.
It also logs
the blocked fax
in the activity
log along with
job-accounting
information.

Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number
to Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.

To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.

To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.

You can also use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

186 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Receive Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure

Settings Options to receive
Notify when job notification about
completes the status of a
sent document.
Notify only if job
fails Do not notify: Turns
off this feature.

Notify when
job completes:
Select to receive
notification for this
job only.

Notify only
if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Fax Receive Default Job Print E-mail: Select

Settings Options to receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.

Fax Receive Default Job Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

Settings Options sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Fax Receive Default Job Notification E-mail

Settings Options address

Fax Receive Default Job Stamp Received Enabled Use this option to
Settings Options Faxes add the date, time,
Disabled* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

Fax menu (MFP) 187

 Table 4-29 Fax menu (MFP) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Receive Default Job Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes
Settings Options that are larger
Disabled than Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto
a Letter-size or
A4-size page. If
this feature set
to Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.

Fax Receive Default Job Paper Selection Automatic*

Settings Options
Select from a list
of the trays.

Fax Receive Default Job Output sides 1-sided* Use to describe

Settings Options the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
Pages flip up select whether the
original document
is printed on
one side or both
sides. Then touch
the Orientation
setting to
indicate whether
the original
has portrait
or landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.

Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding received faxes
Enabled to another fax
machine.

Fax Forwarding Type of Fax Job to All faxes

Forward
Sent faxes

Received faxes

Fax Forwarding Fax Forwarding Enter the

Number fax forwarding
number.

Clear Fax Activity Cancel Clears all events

Log from the Fax
Clear Activity Log list.

Manage Supplies menu

Learn about the control-panel Manage Supplies menu.

188 Chapter 4 Solve problems

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Manage Supplies
menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-30 Manage Supplies menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Low Warning Black Cartridge 1-100% Set the estimated

Thresholds percentage at
Default = 4% which the printer
notifies you when
a toner cartridge is
very low.

Low Warning Document Feeder 1-100% Set the estimated

Thresholds Kit percentage at
Default = 10% which the printer
MFP notifies you when
the document
feeder kit is very
low.

Low Warning Maintenance Kit 1-100% Set the estimated

Thresholds percentage at
SFP Default = 10% which the printer
notifies you when
the maintenance kit
is very low.

Low Warning On* Displays a

Threshold message on the
Message Off control panel when
a cartridge is very
low.

Low Behavior Continue* Use one of these

options to specify
Stop the action for the
device to take when
a supply reaches a
low condition.

Stop: Stops the

current print job.

Continue:
Completes the
current print job.

Manage Supplies menu 189

 Table 4-30 Manage Supplies menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Very Low Behavior Black Cartridge Stop Use one or more

of these options to
Continue* specify the action
for the device to
Prompt to take when a supply
continue reaches a very low
condition.

Stop: Stops the

current print job.

Continue:
Completes the
current print job.

Prompt to continue:
Allows the user
to decide whether
or not to finish
printing.

Very Low Behavior Document Feeder Stop Use one or more

Kit of these options to
Continue specify the action
MFP for the device to
Prompt to take when a supply
continue* reaches a very low
condition.

Stop: Stops the

current print job.

Continue:
Completes the
current print job.

Prompt to continue:
Allows the user
to decide whether
or not to finish
printing.

Very Low Behavior Maintenance Kit Stop Use one or more

of these options to
SFP Continue specify the action
for the device to
Prompt to take when a supply
continue* reaches a very low
condition.

Stop: Stops the

current print job.

Continue:
Completes the
current print job.

Prompt to continue:
Allows the user
to decide whether
or not to finish
printing.

190 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-30 Manage Supplies menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Store Usage Data On supplies* Store Usage Data

provides a way
Not on supplies to suppress the
toner cartridges
from storing most
of the information
gathered
exclusively for
the purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select the
On supplies setting
to store the data
on the toner
cartridge memory
chip. Select the Not
on supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on the
memory chip.

Cartridge Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect cartridges protect cartridges
so that they can
be used only in this
product or fleet of
products.

Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized

HP to allow
Authorized HP only genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this printer.

Reset Supplies Document Feeder Reset Select this option if

Kit you have installed
Cancel a new document
MFP feeder kit or
maintenance kit.
Maintenance Kit

SFP

Networking menu
Learn about the control-panel Networking menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu, and then select the Networking menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Networking menu 191

 Table 4-31 Networking menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet Information Print Security Yes Yes: Prints a page

Report that contains the
No* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.

No: A security
settings page is
not printed.

Ethernet TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to
host name. 32 characters,
used to identify
NPIXXXXXX* the printer. This
name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the
last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.

192 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-31 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the

method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
Auto IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
Manual
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.

DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server.
If selected and
a DHCP lease
exists, the DHCP
Release menu and
the DHCP Renew
menu are available
to set DHCP lease
options.

Auto IP: Use

for automatic
link-local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.

If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

Networking menu 193

 Table 4-31 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP

address to default
Legacy to when the print
server is unable
to obtain an IP
address from the
network during
a forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration
(for example,
when manually
configured to use
BootP or DHCP).

NOTE: This
feature assigns a
static IP address
that might
interfere with a
managed network.

Auto IP: A link-

local IP address
169.254.x.x is set.

Legacy: The
address 192.0.0.192
is set, consistent
with older HP
Jetdirect printers.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Release Yes

No*

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Renew Yes

No*

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to

enable or disable
On* IPv6 operation on
the print server.

Off: IPv6 is
disabled.

On: IPv6 is
enabled.

194 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-31 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Address Manual Settings Use this item
to enable and
Enable manually configure
a TCP/IPv6
Address address.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified:
The stateful
Router auto-configuration
Unavailable* method to be used
by the print server
Always is determined by
a router. The
router specifies
whether the print
server obtains
its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.

Router
Unavailable: If
a router is
not available,
the print server
should attempt to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP
address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

Networking menu 195

 Table 4-31 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy

provided list. server to be
used by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.

To specify a
proxy server, enter
its IPv4 address
or fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.

For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.

Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Port Range: 1-65535 Enter the port

number used by
Default = 00080 the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.

Ethernet TCP/IP Idle Timeout Range: 1-3600 The time period,

in seconds, after
Default = 0270 which an idle
TCP print data
connection is
closed (default
is 270 seconds,
0 disables the
timeout).

196 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-31 Networking menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

I/O Timeout Range: 5 – 300 sec Use to set the

I/O timeout period
Default = 10 in seconds. I/O
timeout refers to
the elapsed time
before a print job
fails. If the stream
of data that the
printer receives for
a print job gets
interrupted, this
setting indicates
how long the
printer will wait
before it reports
that the job has
failed.

Supplies menu
Learn about the control-panel Supplies menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

NOTE: The View option is control-panel type dependent (might not be available).

Table 4-32 Supplies menu

First level Values Description

Black Cartridge View a summary of the status of the

printer supplies.

Trays menu
Learn about the control-panel Trays menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

NOTE: The View option is control-panel type dependent (might not be available).

Supplies menu 197

 Table 4-33 Trays menu

First level Second level Values Description

Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list Choose the paper size for the
of supported sizes. tray
Tray 2-x

Tray 1 Type Select paper type from a list Choose the paper type for
of supported types. the tray.
Tray 2-x

Support Tools menu

Learn about the control-panel Support Tools menu.

NOTE: The Support Tools sub-menu contains the options for maintaining the printer and
troubleshooting printer problems.

Maintenance menu
Learn about the control-panel Maintenance menu.

Backup/Restore menu
Learn about the control-panel Backup/Restore menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu,
and then select the Backup/Restore menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-34 Backup/Restore menu

First level Second level Third level Values

Back up Data Enable Scheduled Backups Backup Time Enter a time

Back up Data Enable Scheduled Backups Days Between Backups Enter the number of days

Back up Data Back up Now

Back up Data Export Last Backup

Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu
Learn about the control-panel Calibration/Cleaning menu .

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu,
and then select the Calibration/Cleaning menu.

To print: At the printer control panel, touch (MFP) or use the arrow buttons (SFP) to select the printer
icon . For the SFP, press the OK button to print the pages.

198 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-35 Calibration/Cleaning menu

First level Values Description

Cleaning Page Automatic Cleaning Interval Use this menu to configure

the settings for the product to
Off* automatically print a cleaning
page.
1000 pages
Select Off to disable
2000 pages automatic cleaning.

5000 pages Select a cleaning interval to

set the number of pages to be
10000 pages printed before an automatic
cleaning page is printed.
20000 pages
Touch Print to manually print a
cleaning page.

NOTE: Cleaning pages print

on the default paper size
configured for the printer.

Calibrate Scanner Done Touch Start to calibrate the

device scanner. Messages
MFP Start on the control panel display
will lead you through the
calibration process.

Clean Document Feeder Set cleaning reminder Configure cleaning settings

Rollers interval for the document feeder
rollers.
MFP Range: 0 – 100%

Default = 10%

Done

Clean Now

USB Firmware Upgrade menu

Learn about the control-panel USB Firmware Upgrade menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, select the Maintenance menu,
and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu.

Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Service menu
Learn about the control-panel Service menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Service menu.

The Service menu is locked and requires a personal identification number (PIN) for access. This menu is
intended for use by authorized service personnel. See the Service menu section of this manual.

USB Firmware Upgrade menu 199

 Troubleshooting menu
Learn about the control-panel Troubleshooting menu.

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the
Troubleshooting menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 4-36 Troubleshooting menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Reports Configuration/ Settings Menu Select the desired

Status Pages Map report and then
select the print
Current Settings
Page icon to print
the page.
Configuration
Page

Supplies Status
Page

Usage Page

Paper Path Page

File Directory Page

Web Services
Status Page

PCL Font List

PS Font List

Event Log

Warning Log Page

T.30 Protocol Trace

PQ
Troubleshooting
Pages

Paper Path Test

Reports Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Select the desired

report and then
Billing Codes select the print
Report
icon to print
Blocked Fax List the page.

Fax Call Report

Reports Other Pages PCL Font List Select the desired

report and then
PS Font List select the print
icon to print
the page.

200 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-36 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax Tools Fax T.30 Trace Never Use to print

Report automatically or configure the
Fax models only print* fax T.30 trace
report. T.30 is
Print after every the standard
fax that specifies
handshaking,
Print only after fax protocols, and
send jobs error correction
between fax
Print only after machines.
received faxes

Print only after fax

send errors

Print only after fax

receive errors

Print after any fax

error

Fax Tools Fax V.34 Enable* Use to disable

V.34 modulations if
Fax models only Disable several fax failures
have occurred
or if phone line
conditions require
it.

Fax Tools JBIG Compression On

Fax models only Off*

Fax Tools Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a

technician to
Fax models only Diagnostic evaluate and
diagnose fax
issues by listening
to the sounds of
fax modulations

Fax Tools Fax Service Log Print The standard fax

log includes basic
Fax models only information such
as the time and
whether the fax
was successful.
The detailed
fax log shows
the intermediate
results of the redial
process not shown
in the standard fax
log.

Print Quality Pages PQ Print Use to print pages

Troubleshooting that help you
Pages resolve problems
with print quality.

Troubleshooting menu 201

 Table 4-36 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Event Log Prints the 50 most

recent events in
the Event Log.
For each event,
the printed log
shows the error
number, page
count, error code,
and description or
personality.

Paper Path Page Print Shows how many

pages were
printed from each
tray.

Diagnostic Tests Disable Cartridge Continue Use this diagnostic

Check test to print
internal pages
or send an
external job to
the printer when
the toner cartridge
is removed or
exchanged. Supply
errors are ignored
while the printer is
in this mode.

Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Source Tray Select from a list Generates a test
of the available page for testing
trays. paper handling
features. You can
define the path
that is used for
the test in order to
test specific paper
paths

Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Number of Copies Range: 1–500 Sets the default
number of copies
Default = 1 for a copy job. This
default applies
when the Copy
or Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen. The
factory default
setting is 1.

Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Test Duplex Path Enable Prints on both
sides of the paper.
Disable*

Diagnostic Tests Print/Stop Test Specify the

length of time
in milliseconds
(0-60,000).

Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Sensor Select from a Initiates a test of

Test list of the printer the paper path
sensors. sensors.

202 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-36 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Diagnostic Tests Manual Sensor Select from a Test the printer

Test list of available sensors and
components switches for
NOTE: This item correct operation.
appears in the Reset Each sensor is
control-panel displayed on
menus. However, the control-panel
the function is not screen, along with
available for this its status. Manually
printer trip each sensor
and watch for it
to change on the
screen. Press the
Stop button to
abort the test.

Diagnostic Tests Tray/Bin Manual Select from a Test the printer

Sensor Test list of available sensors and
components switches for
NOTE: This item correct operation.
appears in the Reset Each sensor is
control-panel displayed on
menus. However, the control-panel
the function is not screen, along with
available for this its status. Manually
printer trip each sensor
and watch for it
to change on the
screen. Press the
Stop button to
abort the test.

Diagnostic Tests Component Test Select from a Use to exercise

list of available individual parts
NOTE: This item components. independently to
appears in the isolate noise,
control-panel leaking, or other
menus. However, issues. To start the
the function is not test, select one of
available for this the components.
printer The test will run the
number of times
specified by the
Repeat option. You
might be prompted
to remove parts
from the printer
during the test.
Press the Stop
button to abort the
test.

Diagnostic Tests Continuous Scan 2-sided

MFP

Diagnostic Tests Scanner Tests Sensors

MFP

Generate Debug Start

Data

Troubleshooting menu 203

 Table 4-36 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Retrieve Create device data Create files

Diagnostic Data file that contain
information about
Create zipped the printer that
debug information can help identify
file the cause of
problems.
Include crash
dump files

Clean up debug
information

Send to E-mail

Export to USB

Retrieve Fax Create device data Create files

Diagnostic Data file that contain
information about
Create zipped the printer that
debug information can help identify
file the cause of
problems.
Include crash
dump files

Clean up debug
information

Send to E-mail

Export to USB

Service menu
Learn about the printer Service menu.

Service menu access is restricted by using a personal identification number (PIN). Only authorized
service people should access the Service menu. When selecting Service from the list of menus, the
printer prompts the user to enter an eight-digit PIN.

NOTE: The printer automatically exits the Service menu after about one minute if no items are
selected or changed.

Open the Service menu from a SFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Support
Tools, and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Service, and then press the OK button.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected for the Access Type item.

NOTE: Use the arrow buttons to select and change the Access Type item if necessary.

4. Enter the following service access PIN for the printer:

204 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 ● 12040620 (SFP)

● 12043020 (MFP)

Open the Service menu from an MFP control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Service

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected for the Access Type item.

4. Enter the following service access PIN for the printer:

● 12040620 (SFP)

● 12043020 (MFP)

Service menu table

The following menu items appear in the Service menu.

Table 4-37 Service menu

First level Second level Value Description

Event Log Print Print or view the event log.

Clear Event Log Clear Use this item to clear the

printer event log.

Cycle Counts Total Engine Cycles Set the page count that
was stored in NVRAM
prior to installing a new
formatter.

Cycle Counts Refurbish Cycle Count Use this item to record

the page count when the
printer was refurbished.

Cycle Counts Document Feeder Total number of pages

since the document feeder
MFP kit was replaced.

Cycle Counts Document Feeder Kit Use this item to

Interval set the interval that
causes the printer to
MFP prompt the customer to
replace document feeder
maintenance kit.

Cycle Counts Clean Rollers Count Total number of pages

since the document feeder
MFP rollers were cleaned.

Cycle Counts Clean Rollers Interval Use this item to set

the interval that causes
MFP the printer to prompt the
customer to clean the
document feeder rollers
and separation pad.

Service menu 205

 Table 4-37 Service menu (continued)

First level Second level Value Description

Cycle Counts ADF Count Set the total pages fed

through the document
MFP feeder.

Cycle Counts Flatbed Count Set the total pages

scanned from the flatbed.
MFP

Cycle Counts ADF Simplex Count Set the total single-sided

pages fed through the
MFP document feeder.

Cycle Counts ADF Duplex Count Set the total two-sided

pages fed through the
MFP document feeder.

Cycle Counts Copy Scan Count Set the total copy pages
that have been scanned.
MFP

Cycle Counts Send Scan Count Set the number of scanned

pages sent to email.
MFP

Cycle Counts Fax Scan Count Set the number of scanned

pages that have been
Fax models only faxed.

Cycle Counts Copy Pages Count Set the number of scanned

pages that have been
MFP printed.

Scanner Settings ADF Settings Leading edge front Set the calibration values.

MFP Leading edge back WARNING! Do not

change these values
Trailing edge front unless instructed to do so.

Trailing edge back

Left side front

Left side back

Scanner Settings Glass Settings Leading edge

glass
MFP
Left Side Glass

Serial Number Set the serial number.

Service ID Use this item to show the

date that the printer was
first used on the control
panel. This eliminates the
need for users to keep
paper receipts for proof of
warranty.

206 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-37 Service menu (continued)

First level Second level Value Description

Cold Reset Paper When you perform a cold

reset, the paper size that
is stored in NVRAM is
reset to the default factory
setting. If you replace
a formatter board in a
country/region that uses
A4 as the standard paper
size, use this menu to reset
the default paper size to
A4. LETTER and A4 are the
only available values.

Low Alerts Enable Turn on (or off) low alerts

(for supplies).
Disable

Reset Low Alerts ● Reset to level 1

● Reset to level 2

● Reset to level 3

● Set to non-HP
managed mode

PTT Test Mode Test the internal modem

for the analog fax
Fax models only accessory.

PTT Test Mode Hook Operations Off Hook

Fax models only On Hook

PTT Test Mode Generate Random Data Select a value

from the list.
Fax models only

PTT Test Mode Generate DTMF Tone Burst Select a value

from the list.
Fax models only

PTT Test Mode Generate DTMF Select a value

Continuous Tone from the list.
Fax models only

PTT Test Mode Generate Pulse Burst Select a value

from the list.
Fax models only

PTT Test Mode Generate Tone Dial Enter dial number.

Number
Fax models only

PTT Test Mode Generate Pulse Dial Enter dial number.

Number
Fax models only

PTT Test Mode Generate Single Modem Range: 1100–2100

Tone Hz
Fax models only
Default = 2100 Hz

PTT Test Mode Line Measurements

Fax models only

Service menu 207

 Table 4-37 Service menu (continued)

First level Second level Value Description

PTT Test Mode Fax Transmit Signal Loss

Fax models only

Test Support Continuous Scan 2-sided

MFP Save to Disk

Test Support Continuous Copy 2-sided

MFP Save to Disk

Test Support Raw Scan 2-sided

MFP Mechanical
Calibration

Test Support Continuous Print from USB

Test Support Automatic Calibrations Disabled

MFP Enabled*

Test Support Runtime Configuration Standard

MFP StandardEIC

Workflow

WorkflowEIC

Reconfigure

Printer resets
Learn about the printer resets.

Restore factory-set defaults from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Settings,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Restore Factory Settings, and then press the OK button.

4. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data.
Select the Reset button to complete the process.

Restore factory-set defaults from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Settings button.

2. Open the following menus:

● General Settings

● Reset Factory Settings

208 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data. Touch
the Reset button to complete the process.

Restore the Service ID

When replacing the formatter, the Service ID date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the
original date that the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to
calculate the Service ID.

Calculate the service ID

For the calculation below, the placed-in-service date is 17OCT2002.

1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. If the printer was first used in 2002, calculate
YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 19. YY = 12.

2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.

● Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 and add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.

3. In this example the Service ID is 12287.

Convert the Service ID to an actual date

Use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty. Use the
following formula to convert the Service ID into the actual date the printer was placed-in-service. For the
example below, use the Service ID previously calculated (12287).

1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed.

2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.

3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.

a. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.

b. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10,
which represents October.

c. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date. The complete date is 17-October-2002.

NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a non-touchscreen control panel

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button.

Printer resets 209

 5. Press the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then press the OK button.

NOTE: The printer initializes.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo

Figure 4-40 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)

1 2

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to highlight 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then press the OK button.

NOTE: The printer initializes.

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions

Learn about the printer Format Disk and Partial Clean functions.

Active and repository firmware locations

The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts. The main components are the Windows CE Operating
System and the printer/peripheral firmware files.

There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored:

● The Active, where the operating system and firmware currently are executing.

● The Repository, the recovery location.

If the Active location is damaged, or a Partial Clean was performed, the printer automatically copies
over the OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the printer recovers.

210 Chapter 4 Solve problems

If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a Format Disk was performed, then both
locations are gone and the error message 99.09.67 displays on the control-panel display. The user must
upload the firmware to the printer in order for it to function again.

CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating
system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) are completely lost. HP does not
recommend this action.

Partial Clean
The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except for the firmware
repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored. This allows the disk drive to be
reformatted without having to download a firmware upgrade file to return the printer to a bootable
state.

Characteristics of a Partial Clean

● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are
deleted.

● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore
any customer-defined settings.

● For previous HP printers, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the Partial Clean function
for this printer.

CAUTION: HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Partial Clean to
retain customer-defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance
menu.

Reasons for performing Partial Clean

● The printer continually boots up in an error state.

NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean.

● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.

● Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.

● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.

● The printer default settings are not properly working.

Execute a Partial Clean from a non-touchscreen control panel

This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Partial Clean item, and then press the OK button.

4. Press the OK button again.

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 211

 5. Press the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the Continue item, and
then press the OK button.

NOTE: The printer initializes.

Execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control panel

This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo

Figure 4-41 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)

1 2

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Partial Clean item, and then press the OK button.

4. Press the OK button again.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the Continue item, and
then press the OK button.

NOTE: The printer initializes.

Format Disk
The Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive.

CAUTION: After executing a Format Disk option, the printer is not bootable.

Characteristics of a Format Disk

● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are
deleted.

NOTE: Rebooting the printer does not restore the firmware files

● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore
any customer-defined settings.

● After executing the Format Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays on the control panel.

● After executing the Format Disk function, the printer firmware must be reloaded.

CAUTION: HP recommends not using the Format Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution
in the printer service manual recommends this solution. After executing the Format Disk function, the
printer is unusable.

212 Chapter 4 Solve problems

HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Format Disk to retain
customer-defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.

Reasons for performing Format Disk

● The printer continually boots up in an error state.

NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Format Disk.

● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.

● Executing the Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.

● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.

Execute a Format Disk from a non-touchscreen control panel

This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Format Disk item, and then press the OK button.

4. Press the OK button again.

NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.

Execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control panel

This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo

Figure 4-42 Open the Pre-boot menu (MFP)

1 2

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to highlight Format Disk item, and then press the OK button.

4. Press the OK button again.

NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions 213

 Troubleshooting power-on or blank control panel problems
If the printer is not powering on correctly, use the following steps to begin troubleshooting the problem.

1. Verify that power is available to the printer. If the printer is plugged into a surge protector or
uninterruptible power supply (UPS), remove it. Plug the printer directly into a known operating wall
receptacle (make sure that the wall receptacle provides the correct voltage and current for the
printer).

NOTE: Unplug any other devices on the same circuit that the printer is using.

2. Try another known operating wall receptacle and a different power cord.

3. To eliminate a thermal switch issue, unplug the power cord and leave it unplugged for over 20
minutes. Re-attach the power cord, and then turn the power on again.

4. During normal operation, a cooling fan or fans begin to spin briefly after the printer power is turned
on. Place a hand over the cover vent or vents to feel air passing out of the printer. Lean close to
the printer to hear the fan or fans operating. Look for illuminated lights on the control panel and
formatter LEDs.

NOTE: Operational fans, motors, and control-panel lights indicate the following:

● AC power is present at the printer.

● The power supply is providing either or both 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc voltages.

● The DC controller microprocessor is functioning.

5. If the printer powers on, but the control panel is blank, make sure that the control-panel display wire
harness or harnesses and flat flexible cable or cables (FFCs) are connected.

NOTE: The following conditions indicate that the printer has frozen while in Sleep mode or Sleep
delay. Opening a door or pressing a control-panel button should cause the printer to wake up from
Sleep mode or Sleep delay.

● The control panel home button LED is illuminated

● The power-switch LED flashes once every three to five seconds

If the control panel is not responding, or if it appears black or blank, try the following:

a. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.

b. Verify that the system is correctly functioning by printing a test page. Does the test page print
correctly?

Is the printer HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) accessible?

c. Verify that the control panel is correctly functioning. If it is not, turn the printer off and
reseat the control-panel assembly cable connections at the control-panel assembly and the
formatter.

d. Try upgrading the firmware. If the firmware upgrade fails to resolve the problem, and the
printer still freezes while in Sleep mode or Sleep delay, elevate the case.

e. If the error persists and the EWS functions correctly, replace the control-panel assembly.

214 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 6. If normal start-up noises are not heard, turn the printer off, and then remove any installed
accessories (for example, envelope feeders, paper feeders, or output accessories).

7. Turn the printer on, and then listen for start-up noises. If normal start-up noises are heard, the
problem might be with an accessory.

8. Perform an engine test. The engine test procedure varies by printer, so refer to the printer Service
Manual to get instructions.

9. If the engine test page prints, the print engine is operating normally. Replace the formatter.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model
of printer it is installed in and is not designed to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a
used formatter to HP.

Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:

● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges
information change and might make a product unusable

● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors

If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the
repair in the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer
where a used formatter is installed.

For more information, see the following topic (c06360930):

● HP internal link: 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after replacing
the formatter

● HP external partner link: 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after
replacing the formatter

To access the HP partner link, you must first log in to the HP Partner First Portal and then connect
to WISE.

NOTE: If the engine test page does not print, turn the printer off, reconnect the formatter power
connector, remove the embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC), and then try the engine test again. If
the page prints, the problem might be the eMMC.

10. If after replacing the formatter or eMMC normal start-up noises are still not heard, replace the DC
controller.

11. If the print engine appears to be correctly operating (the engine test page successfully printed) and
the control panel is still blank, replace the power supply.

Troubleshooting an unresponsive printer

If the printer powers up normally and the control panel displays correctly, but the printer appears
unresponsive to print jobs, use the following steps to troubleshoot the issue.

1. The control panel should indicate a Ready, Paused, Sleep mode on or Sleep delay on status. If an
error message displays, resolve the error. Resolve any supply issues.

2. For network connection errors, verify that the network port is active and that the cables are
securely seated.

Troubleshooting an unresponsive printer 215

 a. Check the network cable connections between the printer and the computer or network port.
Make sure that the connections are secure.

b. Make sure that the cables are not faulty by trying different cables, if possible.

3. Check the network LEDs (callout 1) to see if they indicate any issues.

NOTE: The figure below is representational only. Network LED location varies by printer.

Table 4-38 Network LEDs

LED light pattern Description

Solid green light and flashing yellow light indicates a

successful network connection.

No lights on indicates a faulty network connection.

Disconnect and reconnect the cable to the port. In the
Network Settings Menu, verify the link settings and make
sure that the port is enabled.

4. Use one of the following options to print a configuration page. If the printer is connected to a
network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints.

Print the configuration page from a SFP control panel

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to
Reports, and then press the OK button.

b. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.

c. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

d. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the print icon . Press the OK button to print the pages.

Print the configuration page from an MFP control panel

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

216 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 b. Open the following menus:

● Configuration/Status pages

c. Touch Configuration Page to select it.

d. Touch the print icon to print the pages.

5. Check to see if there is a newer version of the firmware available. If there is, update the firmware.

6. Verify that the correct print driver for this printer is installed. Check the program to make sure that
the print driver for this printer is used. The print driver can be downloaded from support.hp.com.

7. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works,
the problem is with the program. If this solution does not work (the document does not print),
complete these steps:

a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the printer software installed.

b. If the printer is connected to the network, connect the printer directly to a host computer with
a USB cable. Redirect the printer to the correct port, or reinstall the software (make sure to
select the new connection type).

NOTE: The host USB port may disabled from the factory. If so, this port needs to be activated
first before connecting the printer to the USB port.

For more information about troubleshooting an unresponsive printer and about troubleshooting
connectivity issues, see the "Performance and connectivity troubleshooting" section of the Service
manual.

Engine diagnostics
Learn about internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise,
assembly, and timing issues.

Engine test
Learn about troubleshooting the printer using the engine test diagnostic.

When the engine test is performed, a test page with lines prints if the engine is functioning correctly.

NOTE: Depending on printer models, either a simplex engine test page, a duplex engine test page, or
both simplex and duplex engine test pages might be available.

Depress and hold the cartridge door release button, and then open and close the cartridge door four
times within a three second time period to print a simplex engine test page. Open and close the door five
times within a three second period to print a duplex engine test page.

Defeating interlocks
Learn about defeating printer interlocks.

Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or rear door is open.

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation.

Engine diagnostics 217

 Defeat the front (cartridge) door interlock
1. Open the front door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a strip, and insert
the strip into the slot for the front door logic switch.

Figure 4-43 Defeat the front (cartridge) door interlock

Defeat the rear door interlock

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: It might be easier to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to defeat the rear door interlock.

218 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-44 Defeat the rear door interlock

Control panel troubleshooting

If the control panel is not responding normally or has display issues, use the following procedures to
troubleshoot the issues.

Control panel system diagnostics (MFP)

Learn about MFP printer firmware control panel troubleshooting.

Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control panel hardware and display using the printer
firmware system diagnostics.

Open the control panel system diagnostic tests

Learn about accessing the control panel system diagnostics tests from a touchscreen control panel.

Use the following procedure to open the control panel system diagnostics tests.

1. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.

2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 4-45 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

Control panel troubleshooting 219

 3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 4-46 Pre-boot menu

Table 4-39 Pre-boot menu button descriptions

Button Description

Use this button to see more information about a selected

item.

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

220 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-39 Pre-boot menu button descriptions (continued)

Button Description

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +3 Administration, and then press the OK button to select
it.

Figure 4-47 Access the administration menu

5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +E CP Diagnostics, and then press the OK button to select
it.

NOTE: An administrator password might be required to continue.

Open the control panel system diagnostic tests 221

 Figure 4-48 Access the diagnostics menu

Screen test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic screen test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. With 1 Screen Test highlighted, press the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-49 Open the screen test

The blue vertical gradient screen appears.

222 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-50 Blue vertical gradient screen

3. Touch the touchscreen to scroll though the remaining touchscreen test screens.

NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.

Table 4-40 Touchscreen test screens

Screen Description

Green vertical gradient

Red vertical gradient

Blue horizontal gradient

Screen test 223

 Table 4-40 Touchscreen test screens (continued)

Screen Description

Green horizontal gradient

Red horizontal gradient

Blue with black horizontal interlaced

Green with black horizontal interlaced

Red with black horizontal interlaced

Blue with black vertical interlaced

224 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-40 Touchscreen test screens (continued)

Screen Description

Green with black vertical interlaced

Red with black vertical interlaced

Black with white center

White with black center

Checkerboard

Multicolor stripes

Screen test 225

 Table 4-40 Touchscreen test screens (continued)

Screen Description

Blue green grid meshing

Touch test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic touch test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 2 Touch Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-51 Open the touch test

3. Use your finger to touch the white grid on the display.

Figure 4-52 Touch the white grid

A mark appears on the grid where it was touched.

NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.

226 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-53 Verify the mark

SoftKey test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic SoftKey test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 3 SoftKey Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

Figure 4-54 Open the softkey test

SoftKey test 227

 3. When prompted, touch the Home button.

Figure 4-55 Touch the Home button

If the test is successful, the following screen appears on the display.

NOTE: Touch the screen to exit the test.

Figure 4-56 Successful test

Backlight test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic backlight test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

228 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 4 Backlight Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

After selecting the 4 Backlight Test, the screen automatically dims, and then returns to full
brightness.

NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.

Figure 4-57 Open the backlight test

Sound test
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic sound test.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 5 Sound Test, and then press the OK button to select it.

After selecting the 5 Sound Test, the printer emits a series of audible tones.

NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.

Sound test 229

 Figure 4-58 Open the sound test

Version
Learn about the control panel system diagnostic version information.

1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 7 Version, and then press the OK button to select it.

NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.

Select 7 Version to view the following types of information:

NOTE: The following types of information are for the control panel only, not the printer.

● Panel ID

● Hardware (version)

● Firmware (version)

● KB Hw (version)

● KB Firm (version)

● LCD Vendor

● Touch Controller Version

230 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-59 Open the version information

Control panel messages document (CPMD)

Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).

NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.

Click here to access the complete CPMD for this printer.

How to search for printer documentation

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP
portals.

These are Wise for Channel and WISE (formerly SAW). Wise for channel is available to HP channel
partners and WISE is available to call agents, service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level
of detail available will depend on your access credentials . To learn how to find support content in WISE,
watch the video here.

To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, go to the following topic
(c06912836):

● HP internal link: Control panel message document (CPMD) list

● HP external partner link: Control panel message document (CPMD) list

NOTE: To access the HP partner link, you must first log in to the HP Partner First Portal and then
connect to WISE.

How to search WISE for printer documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.

To learn how to find support content in WISE, watch the video here: Finding Error Code and Control Panel
Message Document in WISE.

Control panel messages document (CPMD) 231

 To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, go to HP LaserJet, OfficeJet,
PageWide, ScanJet Enterprise - Control panel message document (CPMD) list (HP internal only).

How to search for specific error codes

Use WISE to quickly find error code troubleshooting procedures using the following steps.

1. Type the printer model number (for example, M609) in the dialog box search field.

Figure 4-60 WISE search box

2. A drop-down list appears. Click on the full printer series name (for example, HP LaserJet Enterprise
M609 series) in the list.

Figure 4-61 WISE drop-down list

3. Type the error code (for example, 13.E1.D3) in the keyword field. The error code troubleshooting
content displays in the All Search Results area.

TIP: Another method to find error code information is to use WISE to navigate to the printer detail
page (PDP), and then search Troubleshooting > Error Code Search.

232 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-62 WISE search results

How to search GCSN for printer documentation

These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners.

To learn how to find support content in GCSN, watch the video here: Finding Error Code and Control
Panel Message Documents in GCSN or follow these steps:

1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:

● Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter.

● On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.

How to search GCSN for printer documentation 233

 2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product
model (leave the Model field as blank or the default).

NOTE: Make sure to log in to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.

Figure 4-63 Sample product search criteria

3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to
bypass the Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).

4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.

234 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.

NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which
type of manual or guide the content might be listed.

6. Select Submit.

7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search
result is 100 documents).

NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model.
All other available content will be filtered out.

Table 4-41 Information on WISE

Technical information type Select this checkbox

CPMD CPMD-Map

List of all CPMDs per product Support Information

Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide

Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual

Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual

Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information

User manual or User guide User Guide

Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement

Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview

This section provides information on error codes and searching for information.

Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current
printer status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and
have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).

Error-code and control-panel-message troubleshooting overview 235

 ● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error.
For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.

● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.

HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message
document (CPMD) for each printer.

The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or
resolve the error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.

The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error
codes.

Table 4-42 ERROR CODES: The first two characters

Error code System Component System Error Description

10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.

11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.

13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.

15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.

17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.

20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.

21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression

error when trying to process job.

30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the

unit.

31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.

32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.

33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module
(TPM) notification or error.

40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.

41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically
involving (but not limited to) the fuser, the
laser scanner, or the paper path.

42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log,

Shell, System Manager, or other component.

44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.

45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the

OXPd Web Kit (communications log).

46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.

47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.

48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.

236 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-42 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.

50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.

51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.

52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.

54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).

55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.

56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.

57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.

58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.

59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.

60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.

61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data
package.

62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.

Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.

63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical,

communication, etc.).

65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.

66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.

67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error

69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.

70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.

80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.

81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.

82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.

90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB,

display) or interconnection error.

98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.

99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware

install (engine or accessory), or disk error.

Solve paper handling problems

Review the following information to solve paper handling problems.

Clear paper jams (SFP)

Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.

Solve paper handling problems 237

 NOTE: To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.

Figures in this section are representational only. The actual printer being serviced might look slightly
different depending on the model and installed accessories.

Paper jam locations

Jams can occur in these locations.

Figure 4-64 Paper jam locations

1

5 2

4
1

Number Description

1 Output bin

2 Fuser area

3 Tray 3 (optional)

4 Tray 2

Duplexing area (remove Tray 2 for access)

5 Tray 1

6 Toner cartridge area (open the front door for access)

Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams

Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.

The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.

When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.

Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.

View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper
jams

238 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten
the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.

7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed
sheets one at a time.

8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the
paper type and size.

9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the
jam.

● 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 1

1. Slowly pull the jammed paper out of the printer.

13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1 239

 2. Adjust the paper guides to the correct paper size, then .reload paper into the tray.

3. Ensure the tray is not overfilled. Paper should be below the 3 triangles in the following image.

4. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specifications for the printer.

5. If the error persists, clean the tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad.

240 Chapter 4 Solve problems

a. Press the door-release button, and then open the toner-cartridge door

b. To clean the roller thoroughly, release two tabs between the roller collar and roller, and then
rotate the top of the roller out and away from the printer.

Figure 4-65 Release the roller

13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1 241

 c. Remove the roller.

Figure 4-66 Remove the roller

d. With the Tray 1 roller removed the separation pad is accessible in the printer (it does not need
to be removed to be cleaned.

e. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

CAUTION: When handling the roller and pad, avoid touching the spongy surfaces. Skin oils
and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems.

Figure 4-67 Clean the roller and pad

242 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 f. Position the pickup roller with the pins in the provided slots on the holder, and then rotate the
top of the roller up and toward the printer.

Figure 4-68 Install the roller

g. Continue to rotate the top of the roller toward the printer (callout 1), until two tabs (callout 2)
snap into place.

Figure 4-69 Engage two tabs

h. Close the toner-cartridge door.

6. Perform a test page from tray 1 to see if issue is resolved.

7. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1 243

 13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.B2.D2 Paper jam in tray 2

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 2

1. Remove the tray from the printer.

2. Remove the paper from the tray, and discard any damaged paper.

244 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. Verify that the rear paper guide is adjusted to the indentation for the correct paper size. If
necessary, pinch the release and move the rear paper guide to the correct position. It should
click into place.

A4

11

B5

4. Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the stack is flat at all four corners and that the top of
the stack is below the maximum-height indicators.

5. Reinsert and close the tray.

13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2 245

 6. Press the front door release button.

7. Open the front door.

8. Remove the toner cartridge.

246 Chapter 4 Solve problems

9. Lift the jam-access cover.

10. Remove any jammed paper.

11. Install the toner cartridge.

13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2 247

 12. Close the front door.

13. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specifications for the printer.

14. If the error persists, clean the tray 2 pickup and feed rollers.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer
models.

a. Remove tray 2 and locate the paper tray rollers.

b. Clean the rollers by gently wiping them with a damp, lint-free cloth.

c. If needed for better access to the rollers, carefully rotate the printer backward.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the rear cassette cover, keep it in the closed position

248 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-70 Tilt the printer backward

d. Continue rotate the printer backward until it rests on the rear cover, bottom-side face forward.

CAUTION: MFP printers only: The document feeder is not captive and can unexpectedly
open when the printer is tilted backward.

Figure 4-71 Place the printer bottom-side face forward

13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2 249

 e. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the roller holder toward the left side of the printer to
release it.

Figure 4-72 Release one tab

f. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 4-73 Remove the roller assembly

g. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

NOTE: The roller in the tray (cassette) can be cleaned without removing it from the tray.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause
paper handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

250 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-74 Clean the rollers

h. After cleaning the roller, position the roller holder assembly in the printer as shown, and then
slide it toward the right side of the printer.

Figure 4-75 Install the roller holder

13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2 251

 i. Make sure that the tab snaps into place.

Figure 4-76 Check the tab

j. Carefully rotate the printer forward to position it back on its base. Reinstall the tray 2 paper
tray.

15. Perform a test print from tray 2 to see if the issue is resolved.

16. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.B2.D3 jam error in tray 3

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 3.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.B2.D3 Paper jam in top cover

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 3

252 Chapter 4 Solve problems

1. Remove the tray from the printer.

2. Remove the paper from the tray, and discard any damaged paper.

13.B2.D3 jam error in tray 3 253

 3. Verify that the rear paper guide is adjusted to the indentation for the correct paper size. If
necessary, pinch the release and move the rear paper guide to the correct position. It should
click into place.

A4

11

B5

4. Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the stack is flat at all four corners and that the top of
the stack is below the maximum-height indicators.

5. Reinsert and close the tray.

254 Chapter 4 Solve problems

6. Press the front door release button.

7. Open the front door.

8. Remove the toner cartridge.

13.B2.D3 jam error in tray 3 255

 9. Lift the jam-access cover.

10. Remove any jammed paper.

11. Install the toner cartridge.

256 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 12. Close the front door.

13. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.

14. If the error persists, clean the tray 3 pickup and feed rollers.

a. Remove tray 3 and locate the paper tray rollers.

b. Clean the rollers by gently wiping them with a damp, lint-free cloth.

15. Perform a test print from tray 3 to see if the issue is resolved.

16. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.B2.A jam error in the top cover

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations registration area.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

13.B2.A jam error in the top cover 257

 ● 13.B2.A1 Paper jam in top cover

● 13.B2.A2 Paper jam in top cover

● 13.B2.A3 Paper jam in top cover

1. Press the front door release button.

2. Open the front door.

3. Remove the toner cartridge.

258 Chapter 4 Solve problems

4. Lift the jam-access cover.

5. Remove any jammed paper.

6. Install the toner cartridge.

13.B2.A jam error in the top cover 259

 7. Close the front door.

8. If the error persists, verify that the rear paper guide is adjusted to the indentation for the correct
paper size. If necessary, pinch the release and move the rear paper guide to the correct position. It
should click into place.

A4

11

B5

9. Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the stack is flat at all four corners and that the top of
the stack is below the maximum-height indicators.

260 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 10. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.

11. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.B9 jam error in the fuser area

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the fuser area.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the fuser area

1. Press the front door release button.

2. Open the front door.

13.B9 jam error in the fuser area 261

 3. Remove the toner cartridge.

4. Lift the jam-access cover.

5. Remove any jammed paper.

262 Chapter 4 Solve problems

6. Install the toner cartridge.

7. Open the front door and the rear door.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before

handling it.

8. If jammed paper is visible, remove any jammed paper from the rear door area.

13.B9 jam error in the fuser area 263

 9. Close the rear door and the front door.

10. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.D1, 13.D3 jam error in the duplexer

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the automatic duplexer.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.D1.yz - Jam in duplex unit

● 13.D3.yz - Jam in duplex unit

y = A, C, or D

z = 0-9 or A-F

View a video of how to clear a jam in the duplexer

1. Completely remove Tray 2 from the printer.

264 Chapter 4 Solve problems

2. Push the green button to release the duplex pan.

3. Remove any jammed paper.

4. Close the duplex pan.

13.D1, 13.D3 jam error in the duplexer 265

 5. Reinsert Tray 2.

6. Open the front door to clear the jam message.

a. Press the front door release button.

b. Open the front door.

266 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 c. Close the front door.

7. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.

8. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.E1 jam error in the output bin

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the output bin.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin

1. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.

13.E1 jam error in the output bin 267

 2. Press the front door release button.

3. Open the front door.

4. Open the rear door.

268 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 5. Remove any jammed paper from the rear door area.

6. Close the rear door and the front door.

Change jam recovery (non-touchscreen)

Use the following procedure to change jam recovery from a non-touchscreen control panel
(FutureSmart 4 firmware or later).

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow buttons to navigate to Settings,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the buttons to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Jam Recovery, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to an option, and then press the OK button to select it.

● Auto — The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This
is the default setting.

● Off — The printer does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to
store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.

NOTE: Some pages can be lost if the printer runs out of paper while printing a duplex job with
Jam Recovery set to Off.

Change jam recovery (non-touchscreen) 269

 ● On — The printer always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the
last few pages printed.

Clear paper jams (MFP)

Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.

NOTE: To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.

Figures in this section are representational only. The actual printer being serviced might look slightly
different depending on the model and installed accessories.

Paper jam locations

Jams can occur in these locations.

Figure 4-77 Paper jam locations

1

5 2
4
3

Number Description

1 Document feeder

2 Fuser area

3 Tray 3 (optional)

4 Tray 2

Duplexing area (remove Tray 2 for access)

5 Tray 1

6 Toner cartridge area (open the front door for access)

7 Output bin

Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams

Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.

270 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.

When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.

Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.

View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper
jams

1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten
the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.

7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed
sheets one at a time.

8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the
paper type and size.

9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1

Use the following procedure to clear paper jams in Tray 1.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the
jam.

● 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 1

Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? 271

 1. Slowly pull the jammed paper out of the printer.

2. Adjust the paper guides to the correct paper size, then .reload paper into the tray.

3. Ensure the tray is not overfilled. Paper should be below the 3 triangles in the following image.

4. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specifications for the printer.

272 Chapter 4 Solve problems

5. If the error persists, clean the tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad.

a. Press the door-release button, and then open the toner-cartridge door

b. To clean the roller thoroughly, release two tabs between the roller collar and roller, and then
rotate the top of the roller out and away from the printer.

Figure 4-78 Release the roller

13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1 273

 c. Remove the roller.

Figure 4-79 Remove the roller

d. With the Tray 1 roller removed the separation pad is accessible in the printer (it does not need
to be removed to be cleaned.

e. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

CAUTION: When handling the roller and pad, avoid touching the spongy surfaces. Skin oils
and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems.

Figure 4-80 Clean the roller and pad

274 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 f. Position the pickup roller with the pins in the provided slots on the holder, and then rotate the
top of the roller up and toward the printer.

Figure 4-81 Install the roller

g. Continue to rotate the top of the roller toward the printer (callout 1), until two tabs (callout 2)
snap into place.

Figure 4-82 Engage two tabs

h. Close the toner-cartridge door.

6. Perform a test page from tray 1 to see if issue is resolved.

7. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1 275

 13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.B2.D2 Paper jam in tray 2

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 2

1. Remove the tray from the printer.

2. Remove the paper from the tray, and discard any damaged paper.

276 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. Verify that the rear paper guide is adjusted to the indentation for the correct paper size. If
necessary, pinch the release and move the rear paper guide to the correct position. It should
click into place.

A4

11

B5

4. Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the stack is flat at all four corners and that the top of
the stack is below the maximum-height indicators.

5. Reinsert and close the tray.

13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2 277

 6. Press the front door release button.

7. Open the front door.

8. Remove the toner cartridge.

278 Chapter 4 Solve problems

9. Lift the jam-access cover.

10. Remove any jammed paper.

11. Install the toner cartridge.

13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2 279

 12. Close the front door.

13. Ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specifications for the printer.

14. If the error persists, clean the tray 2 pickup and feed rollers.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer
models.

a. Remove tray 2 and locate the paper tray rollers.

b. Clean the rollers by gently wiping them with a damp, lint-free cloth.

c. If needed for better access to the rollers, carefully rotate the printer backward.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the rear cassette cover, keep it in the closed position

280 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-83 Tilt the printer backward

d. Continue rotate the printer backward until it rests on the rear cover, bottom-side face forward.

CAUTION: MFP printers only: The document feeder is not captive and can unexpectedly
open when the printer is tilted backward.

Figure 4-84 Place the printer bottom-side face forward

13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2 281

 e. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the roller holder toward the left side of the printer to
release it.

Figure 4-85 Release one tab

f. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 4-86 Remove the roller assembly

g. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to gently clean the rollers.

NOTE: The roller in the tray (cassette) can be cleaned without removing it from the tray.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause
paper handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

282 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-87 Clean the rollers

h. After cleaning the roller, position the roller holder assembly in the printer as shown, and then
slide it toward the right side of the printer.

Figure 4-88 Install the roller holder

13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2 283

 i. Make sure that the tab snaps into place.

Figure 4-89 Check the tab

j. Carefully rotate the printer forward to position it back on its base. Reinstall the tray 2 paper
tray.

15. Perform a test print from tray 2 to see if the issue is resolved.

16. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.B2.D3 jam error in tray 3

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 3.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.B2.D3 Paper jam in top cover

View a video of how to clear a jam in tray 3

284 Chapter 4 Solve problems

1. Remove the tray from the printer.

2. Remove the paper from the tray, and discard any damaged paper.

13.B2.D3 jam error in tray 3 285

 3. Verify that the rear paper guide is adjusted to the indentation for the correct paper size. If
necessary, pinch the release and move the rear paper guide to the correct position. It should
click into place.

A4

11

B5

4. Load the paper into the tray. Make sure that the stack is flat at all four corners and that the top of
the stack is below the maximum-height indicators.

5. Reinsert and close the tray.

286 Chapter 4 Solve problems

6. Press the front door release button.

7. Open the front door.

8. Remove the toner cartridge.

13.B2.D3 jam error in tray 3 287

 9. Lift the jam-access cover.

10. Remove any jammed paper.

11. Install the toner cartridge.

288 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 12. Close the front door.

13. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.

14. If the error persists, clean the tray 3 pickup and feed rollers.

a. Remove tray 3 and locate the paper tray rollers.

b. Clean the rollers by gently wiping them with a damp, lint-free cloth.

15. Perform a test print from tray 3 to see if the issue is resolved.

16. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.B9 jam error in the fuser area

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the fuser area.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

13.B9 jam error in the fuser area 289

 View a video of how to clear a jam in the fuser area

1. Press the front door release button.

2. Open the front door.

3. Remove the toner cartridge.

290 Chapter 4 Solve problems

4. Lift the jam-access cover.

5. Remove any jammed paper.

6. Install the toner cartridge.

13.B9 jam error in the fuser area 291

 7. Open the front door and the rear door.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before

handling it.

8. If jammed paper is visible, remove any jammed paper from the rear door area.

9. Close the rear door and the front door.

292 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 10. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.D1, 13.D3 jam error in the duplexer

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations in the automatic duplexer.

Recommended action for customers

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.D1.yz - Jam in duplex unit

● 13.D3.yz - Jam in duplex unit

y = A, C, or D

z = 0-9 or A-F

View a video of how to clear a jam in the duplexer

1. Completely remove Tray 2 from the printer.

2. Push the green button to release the duplex pan.

13.D1, 13.D3 jam error in the duplexer 293

 3. Remove any jammed paper.

4. Close the duplex pan.

5. Reinsert Tray 2.

6. Open the front door to clear the jam message.

294 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 a. Press the front door release button.

b. Open the front door.

c. Close the front door.

7. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP
specifications for the printer.

8. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.

13.D1, 13.D3 jam error in the duplexer 295

 13.E1 jam error in the output bin
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the output bin.

When a jam occurs, the control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

View a video of how to clear a jam in the output bin

1. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.

2. Press the front door release button.

296 Chapter 4 Solve problems

3. Open the front door.

4. Lift the scanner assembly.

13.E1 jam error in the output bin 297

 5. Remove any jammed paper.

6. Close the scanner assembly.

298 Chapter 4 Solve problems

7. Open the rear door.

8. Remove any jammed paper from the rear door area.

13.E1 jam error in the output bin 299

 9. Close the rear door and the front door.

Change jam recovery (touchscreen)

Use the following procedure to change jam recovery from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Settings button.

2. Open the General menu, and then open the Jam recovery menu.

3. Select one of the following options:

● Auto — The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This
is the default setting.

● Off — The printer does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to
store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.

NOTE: Some pages can be lost if the printer runs out of paper while printing a duplex job with
Jam Recovery set to Off.

● On — The printer always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the
last few pages printed.

Printer feeds incorrect page size

Review the following information when the printer feeds an incorrect page size.

Table 4-43 Printer feeds incorrect page size

Cause Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded in the tray. Load the correct size paper in the tray.

The correct size paper is not selected in the software program Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer
or printer driver. driver are correct, because the software program settings
override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the
printer driver settings override the control panel settings.

The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the printer From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the
control panel. tray.

300 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-43 Printer feeds incorrect page size (continued)

Cause Solution

The paper size is not configured correctly for the tray. Print a configuration page to determine the paper size for
which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper.

Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Review the following information when the printer pulls from an incorrect tray.

Table 4-44 Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Cause Solution

A driver for a different printer is in use. Use a driver for this printer.

The specified tray is empty. Load paper in the specified tray.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to
determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly (duplex models)

Review the following information when the printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly.

Table 4-45 Printer will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly

Cause Solution

The duplex job is trying to use unsupported paper. Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing.

The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.

The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the
letterhead. letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page
leading into the printer. For Tray 2-X, load the paper printed
side up with the top of the page toward the right of the printer.

The printer model does not support automatic 2-sided printing. The printer model does not support automatic 2-sided printing.

Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X

Review the following information when the paper does not feed from Tray 2-X.

Table 4-46 Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X

Cause Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.

The input tray is empty. Load paper in the input tray.

Printer pulls from incorrect tray 301

 Table 4-46 Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X (continued)

Cause Solution

The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the printer control panel, select the correct paper type
printer control panel. for the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a
specific weight range will not match a print job that specifies
an exact weight, even if the specified weight is within the
weight range.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path.
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.

None of the optional trays appear as input tray options. The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify
that the printer driver has been configured to recognize the
optional trays.

An optional tray is incorrectly installed. Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the
printer.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to
determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Output is curled or wrinkled

Review the following information when the output is curled or wrinkled.

Table 4-47 Output is curled or wrinkled

Cause Solution

Paper does not meet the specifications for this printer. Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this
printer. Non-recycled, 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper is optimal for office
use.

The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the printer control panel, select the correct paper type
printer control panel. for the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a
specific weight range will not match a print job that specifies
an exact weight, even if the specified weight is within the
weight range.

Paper is damaged or in poor condition. Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in
good condition.

The printer is operating in an excessively humid environment. Verify that the printing environment is within humidity
specifications.

The print job consist of large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a
different pattern.

Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh,
moisture. unopened package. Store paper in a plastic bag to protect it
from humidity.

Paper has poorly cut edges. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over,
and then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the
problem persists, replace the paper.

The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or Configure the software for the paper (see the software
selected in the software. documentation). Configure the tray for the paper.

The paper has previously been used for a print job. Do not re-use paper.

302 Chapter 4 Solve problems

The printer does not pick up paper
If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.

NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than
20lb plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page,
which increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the
possibility of a mispick jam.

HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from
trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20lb plain paper.

1. Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper.

2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.

3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control panel.

4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the
guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.

5. Check the printer control panel to see if the printer is waiting for an acknowledgment to the feed
the paper manually prompt. Load paper, and continue.

6. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened
with warm water.

The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper

If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.

1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan
the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
2. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.

3. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten
the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the
guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray.

6. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.

The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper (MFP)
Learn about MFP document feeder paper handling problems.

Review the following information when the document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of
paper.

● Check to see if there are areas on the page that might have had staples removed. This can cause
jams and/or mispicks.

The printer does not pick up paper 303

 ● The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes that must be
removed.

● Check that all rollers are in place and correctly installed.

● Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.

● The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to
center the stack.

● The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure that
the paper stack is straight, and the guides are against the paper stack.

● The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of
pages. Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides in the input tray and remove pages from the
output bin.

● Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path.

● Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-free
cloth moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers.

● Use the control panel menus to check the status of the document-feeder kit and replace it if
necessary.

Paper does not feed automatically

Review the following information when the paper does not feed automatically.

Table 4-48 Paper does not feed automatically

Cause Solution

Manual feed is selected in the software program. Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the OK
button.

The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.

The input tray is empty. Load paper into the input tray.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to
determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the
paper.

Image-quality troubleshooting
Learn about image-quality troubleshooting.

Use the information in this topic to troubleshoot and resolve image-quality (what you see on the final
printed page) problems including copy-quality, print-quality, and color problems (color printers only).

Various printer hardware problems can cause image-quality defects. This topic is a guide to the steps
used to isolate the specific areas of the printer that are causing image-quality defects on the printed
page, and to provide solutions to resolve those image-quality defects.

Image-quality problems are defined as:

304 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 ● Print-quality (PQ) problems: PQ problems are associated with the print engine (printer base) of an
MFP printer (single function non MFP image-quality problems are always PQ defects). PQ defects
appear on pages that are printed by the print engine and not fed through an integrated scanner
assembly (ISA).

● Copy-quality (CQ) problems: CQ problems are associated with the integrated-scanner assembly
(ISA) portion of an MFP printer. CQ defects appear on pages that are copied using the document
feeder or flatbed glass.

If the print defect is already known to be a PQ or CQ problem, skip to the appropriate troubleshooting
topic listed below. Otherwise, follow the steps in the next section below to get started troubleshooting
image-quality problems.

● Print-quality (PQ) problems: See Print-quality troubleshooting on page 305.

● Copy-quality (CQ) problems: See Copy-quality troubleshooting on page 321.

Get started troubleshooting image-quality problems

Print a demonstration page to identify the defect as a PQ (print engine ) or CQ (ISA) problem.

NOTE: If the image defect appears on the printed demonstration page, the issue is a print-quality (PQ)
problem (associated with the print engine and not the document feeder or flatbed glass) and not a CQ
problem.

Make sure that the demonstration page is printed on plain paper.

Enterprise printers

1. Select Reports > Other pages.

2. Select Demonstration Page.

Pro printers

1. At the printer, scroll to or select Setup.

2. Go to Reports, and then select Demonstration Page.

Does the demonstration page show any image-quality defects?

● Yes: If defects appear on the printed demonstration page the issue is PQ related. See Print-quality
troubleshooting on page 305.

● No: If defects does not appear on the printed demonstration page the issue is CQ related. See
Copy-quality troubleshooting on page 321.

Print-quality troubleshooting
Learn about the print-quality troubleshooting.

NOTE: Print-quality (PQ) problems are associated with the print engine (printer base) of an MFP
printer (single function non MFP image-quality problems are always PQ defects). PQ defects appear on
pages that are printed by the print engine and not feed through an integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

Repetitive image defect ruler

Review the following information about a repetitive image defect ruler.

Print-quality troubleshooting 305

 When troubleshooting the source of some print image defects, one solution is to identify if it is a
repetitive defect (does the print quality defect appear multiple times on the printed page?). If this is
the case, use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality
problems. For more information, see Using a ruler to measure between repetitive defects.

Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems.
Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical
defects and use the table below to identify the component that is causing the defect.

CAUTION: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth. If dirt
is difficult to remove, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth that has been dampened with water.

NOTE: The primary charging roller, photosensitive drum, and developer roller cannot be cleaned
because they are internal assemblies in the toner cartridge or imaging drum. If one of these
assemblies is causing the defect, replace the toner cartridge.

The primary fuser sleeve unit or pressure roller cannot be cleaned because they are internal
assemblies in the fuser. If one of these assemblies is causing the defect, replace the fuse
TIP: To make a printer specific repetitive defect ruler, use a metric ruler to transfer the measurements
in the table below to a transparency or the edge of a piece of paper—clearly label each ruler mark with
the associated defective assembly.

Table 4-49 Repetitive defects

Assembly Distance between defects

Primary charging roller 28 mm (1.10 in)

Developer roller 31 mm (1.22 in)

Transfer roller 39 mm (1.54 in)

Registration roller 43 mm (1.69 in)

Cassette separation roller 44 mm (1.73 in)

Cassette pickup or feed roller 50 mm (1.97 in)

Fuser film 57 mm (2.24 in)

Pressure roller 63 mm (2.48 in)

Photosensitive drum 75 mm (2.95 in)

Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects

The figures in this section show color repetitive defect pages. However, the process for measuring
repetitive defects is valid for mono pages.

1. Identify a repetitive defect on the page.

TIP: Print a cleaning page to see if that resolves the defect.

NOTE: Some printers allow loading Letter and A4 media in short-edge-first or long-edge-first
orientation in the paper trays. When measuring repetitive defects, make sure to place the ruler at
the leading edge of the page. This is the edge of the page that feeds into the printer first.

The example pages below show the following types of repetitive defects.

● Lines (callout 1)

306 Chapter 4 Solve problems

● Smudges (callout 2)

● Dots or spots (callout 3)

Figure 4-90 Examples of repetitive defects

1 2

NOTE: These are examples only, other types of repetitive defects might appear on a page.

Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects 307

 2. Position a metric ruler on the page with the “zero” ruler mark at one occurrence of the defect
(callout 1).

Figure 4-91 Place the ruler on the page

3. Locate the next occurrence of the defect (callout 1).

Figure 4-92 Locate the next repetitive defect

308 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 4. Measure the distance (in millimeters) between the two occurrences (callout 1), and then use the
Repetitive defects table to determine the defective assembly.

TIP: Always measure from and to the same point on the defects. For example, if the ruler is
“zeroed” at the top edge of a defect, measure to the top edge of the next occurrence of that defect.

Figure 4-93 Determine the defective assembly

Print from a different software program

Try printing from a different software program.

If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software program from which you were printing.

Check the paper-type setting for the print job

Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the printed pages have
smears, fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing
toner.

Check the paper type setting on the control panel

Check the paper type setting on the printer control panel, and change the setting as needed.

1. Open and close the paper tray.

2. Follow the control panel prompts to confirm or modify the paper type and size settings for the tray.

3. Make sure the paper loaded meets specifications.

4. Adjust the humidity and resistance setting on the control panel to match the environment.

a. Open the following menus:

i. Settings

Print from a different software program 309

 ii. Copy/Print

iii. Print quality

iv. Adjust paper type

b. Select the paper type that matches the type loaded in the tray.

c. Use the arrows to increase or decrease the humidity and resistance setting.

5. Make sure the driver settings match the control panel settings.

NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.

Check the paper type setting (Windows)

Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed.

NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.

1. From the software program, select the Print option.

2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4. From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.

5. Expand the list of Type is: options.

6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.

7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.

8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the OK
button to print the job.

Check the paper type setting (macOS)

Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.

1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.

2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.

3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages.

4. Open the menus drop-down list, and then click the Paper/Quality menu.

5. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.

6. Click the Print button.

Check toner-cartridge status

Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges and if applicable, the
status of other replaceable maintenance parts.

Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page

The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.

310 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.

2. Select the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select Supplies Status Page, and then select Print to print the page.

Step two: Check supplies status

Check the supplies status report as follows.

1. Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining for the toner cartridges
and, if applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts.

Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its estimated end of life.
The supplies status page indicates when a supply level is very low. After an HP supply has reached
the very low threshold, HP’s premium protection warranty on that supply has ended.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer
acceptable. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer
acceptable.
If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other replaceable maintenance
parts, the supplies status page lists the genuine HP part numbers.

2. Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge.

A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on it. For more information
on identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.

Print a cleaning page

Learn how to print a cleaning page.

Print a cleaning page from a non-touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then press the OK button.

2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Cleaning page, and then press the OK button.

TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.

5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to Print (at the bottom of the control-panel display), and then press
the OK button to print the cleaning page.

NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until
the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

Print a cleaning page from a touchscreen control panel

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Maintenance

Step two: Check supplies status 311

 ● Calibration/Cleaning

3. Touch Cleaning Page, and then touch the Print button to print the cleaning page.

NOTE: A Cleaning... message displays on the control-panel display. Do not turn the printer off until
the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

TIP: Use this screen to set up automatic cleaning page intervals if desired.

Check paper and the printing environment

Use the following information to check the paper selection and the printing environment.

Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications

Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP specifications.

● Always use a paper type and weight that this printer supports.

● Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles,
voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.

● Use paper that has not been previously printed on.

● Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.

● Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in
Inkjet printers.

● Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.

Step two: Check the environment

The environment can directly affect print quality and is a common cause of print-quality or paper-
feeding issues. Try the following solutions:

● Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors, or air-conditioning
vents.

● Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of printer specifications.

● Do not place the printer in a confined space, such as a cabinet.

● Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.

● Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer requires good air flow on all
sides, including the top.

● Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other elements that can leave
residue inside the printer.

Step three: Set the individual tray alignment

Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when
printing from specific trays.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

2. Select the following menus:

312 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 a. Copy/Print or Print

b. Print Quality

c. Image Registration

3. Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.

4. Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.

5. Select Print Test Page again to verify the results, and then make further adjustments if necessary.

6. Select Done to save the new settings.

Try a different print driver

Try a different print driver when printing from a software program and the printed pages have
unexpected lines in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.

Download any of the following drivers from the HP Web site: www.hp.com/support/ljM406 or
www.hp.com/support/ljM407 or www.hp.com/support/ljM430MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP or
www.hp.com/support/ljE40040 or www.hp.com/support/ljE42540MFP.

Table 4-50 Print drivers

Driver Description

HP PCL.6 driver If available, this printer-specific print driver supports older operating systems like
Windows XP and Windows Vista. For a list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/go/support.

HP PCL 6 driver This printer-specific print driver supports Windows 7 and newer operating systems
that support version 3 drivers. For a list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/go/support.

HP PCL-6 driver This product-specific print driver supports Windows 8 and newer operating systems
that support version 4 drivers. For a list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/go/support.

HP UPD PS driver ● Recommended for printing with Adobe software programs or with other highly
graphics-intensive software programs

● Provides support for printing from Postscript emulation needs, or for Postscript
flash font support

HP UPD PCL 6 ● Recommended for printing in all Windows environments

● Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for
most users

● Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best speed
in Windows environments

● Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs
that are based on PCL 5

Troubleshoot image defects

Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.

Try a different print driver 313

 Table 4-51 Image defects table quick reference

Sample Description Possible solutions

Table 4-58 Light print on page 319 Table 4-56 Gray background or dark print Table 4-54 Blank page — No print on page
on page 318 316

Table 4-53 Black page on page 316 Table 4-52 Banding defects on page 315 Table 4-60 Streak defects on page 320

Table 4-55 Fixing/fuser defects on page Table 4-57 Image placement defects on Table 4-59 Output defects on page 319
317 page 318

314 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps
as a starting point for solving image defect issues.

1. Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely
with continued printing.

2. Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very Low state (it has
passed the rated life), replace the cartridge.

3. Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in the tray.
Try using a different ream of media or a different tray. Try using a different print mode.

4. Make sure that the printer is within the supported operating temperature/humidity range.

5. Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are supported by the printer. See support.hp.com
for a list of the supported paper sizes and types for the printer.

NOTE: The term “fusing” refers to the part of the printing process where toner is affixed to paper.

The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the printer short edge first.

Table 4-52 Banding defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

Dark or light lines which repeat down

the length of the page, and are wide- 1. Reprint the document.
pitch and/or impulse bands. They might
be sharp or soft in nature. The defect 2. Try printing from another tray.
displays only in areas of fill, not in text or
sections with no printed content. 3. Replace the cartridge.

4. Use a different paper type.

5. Enterprise models only: From the

Home screen on the printer control
panel, go to the Adjust Paper Types
menu, and then choose a print
mode that is designed for a slightly
heavier media than what you are
using. This slows the print speed
and might improve the print quality.

6. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Troubleshoot image defects 315

 Table 4-53 Black page

Sample Description Possible solutions

The entire printed page is black.

1. Visually inspect the cartridge to
check for damage.

2. Make sure that the cartridge is

installed correctly.

3. Replace the cartridge.

4. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 4-54 Blank page — No print

Sample Description Possible solutions

The page is completely blank and

contains no printed content. 1. Make sure that the cartridges are
genuine HP cartridges.

2. Make sure that the cartridge is

installed correctly.

3. Print with a different cartridge.

4. Check the paper type in the paper

tray and adjust the printer settings
to match. If necessary, select a
lighter paper type.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

316 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-55 Fixing/fuser defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

Slight shadows or offsets of the image

are repeated down the page. The 1. Reprint the document.
repeated image might fade with each
recurrence. 2. Check the paper type in the paper
tray and adjust the printer settings
to match. If necessary, select a
lighter paper type.

3. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Toner rubs off along either edge of the

page. This defect is more common at the 1. Reprint the document.
edges of high-coverage jobs, and on light
media types, but can occur anywhere on 2. Check the paper type in the paper
the page. tray and adjust the printer settings
to match. If necessary, select a
heavier paper type.

3. Enterprise models only: From the

printer control panel, go to the
Edge-to-Edge menu and then select
Normal. Reprint the document.

4. Enterprise models only: From the

printer control panel, select Auto
Include Margins and then reprint
the document.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Troubleshoot image defects 317

 Table 4-56 Gray background or dark print

Sample Description Possible solutions

The image or text is darker than

expected and/or the background is gray. 1. Make sure that the paper in the
trays has not already been run
through the printer.

2. Use a different paper type.

3. Reprint the document.

4. Mono models only: From the Home

screen on the printer control panel,
go to the Adjust Toner Density
menu, and then adjust the toner
density to a lower level.

5. Make sure that the printer is

within the supported operating
temperature and humidity range.

6. Replace the cartridge.

7. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 4-57 Image placement defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

The image is not centered, or is skewed

on the page. The defect occurs when the 1. Reprint the document.
paper is not positioned properly as it is
pulled from the tray and moves through 2. Remove the paper and then reload
the paper path. the tray. Make sure that all the
paper edges are even on all sides.

3. Make sure that the top of the paper

stack is below the tray-full indicator.
Do not overfill the tray.

4. Make sure that the paper guides

are adjusted to the correct size
for the paper. Do not adjust the
paper guides tightly against the
paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

318 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Table 4-58 Light print

Sample Description Possible solutions

The printed content is light or faded on

the entire page. 1. Reprint the document.

2. Remove the cartridge, and then

shake it to redistribute the toner.
Reinsert the toner cartridges into
the printer and close the cover. For
a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.

3. Mono models only: Make sure that

the EconoMode setting is disabled,
both at the printer control panel
and in the print driver.

4. Make sure that the cartridge is

installed correctly.

5. Print a Supplies Status Page and

check the life and usage of the
cartridge.

6. Replace the cartridge.

7. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 4-59 Output defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

Printed pages have curled edges. The

curled edge can be along the short or 1. Reprint the document.
long side of the paper. Two types of curl
are possible: 2. Positive curl: From the printer
control panel, select a heavier
● Positive curl: The paper curls paper type. The heavier paper type
toward the printed side. The defect creates a higher temperature for
occurs in dry environments or printing.
when printing high-coverage pages.
Negative curl: From the printer
● Negative curl: The paper curls control panel, select a lighter paper
away from the printed side. The type. The lighter paper type creates
defect occurs in high-humidity a lower temperature for printing.
environments or when printing low- Try storing the paper in a dry
coverage pages. environment prior to use, or use
freshly opened paper.

3. Print in duplex mode.

4. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Troubleshoot image defects 319

 Table 4-59 Output defects (continued)

Sample Description Possible solutions

The paper does not stack well in the

output tray. The stack might be uneven, 1. Reprint the document.
skewed, or the pages might be pushed
out of the tray and onto the floor. Any of 2. Extend the output bin extension.
the following conditions can cause this
defect: 3. If the defect is caused by
extreme paper curl, refer to the
● Extreme paper curl troubleshooting steps for "Output
curl."
● The paper in the tray is wrinkled or
deformed 4. Use a different paper type.

● The paper is a non-standard paper 5. Use freshly opened paper.

type, such as envelopes
6. Remove the paper from the output
● The output tray is too full tray before the tray gets too full.

7. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 4-60 Streak defects

Sample Description Possible solutions

Light vertical streaks that usually span

the length of the page. The defect 1. Reprint the document.
displays only in areas of fill, not in text
or sections with no printed content. 2. Remove the cartridge, and then
shake it to redistribute the toner.
Reinsert the toner cartridges into
the printer and close the cover. For
a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.

3. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

NOTE: Both light and dark vertical

streaks can occur when the printing
environment is outside the specified
range for temperature or humidity. Refer
to your printer's environmental
specifications for allowable temperature
and humidity levels.

320 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-60 Streak defects (continued)

Sample Description Possible solutions

Dark vertical lines which occur down the

length of the page. The defect might 1. Reprint the document.
occur anywhere on the page, in areas of
fill or in sections with no printed content. 2. Remove the cartridge, and then
shake it to redistribute the toner.
Reinsert the toner cartridges into
the printer and close the cover. For
a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.

3. Print a cleaning page.

4. Check the toner level in the

cartridge.

5. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Copy-quality troubleshooting
Learn about copy-quality troubleshooting.

NOTE: Copy-quality (CQ) problems are associated with the integrated-scanner assembly (ISA) portion
of an MFP printer. CQ defects appear on pages that are copied using the document feeder or flatbed
glass.

Identify the location and type of the CQ problem

Resolving CQ problems involves isolating the defect to the document feeder or flatbed glass.
Comparing printed output between the document feeder and the flatbed glass might determine the
ISA location that is causing the CQ defect.

NOTE: If a CQ defect appears on printed output from both the document feeder and the flatbed
glass, carefully inspect the original source for a print-quality (PQ) problem.

Document feeder isolation test

1. Mark a printed page in a way that clearly identifies it as the source document used in this isolation
procedure.

2. Place the source page in the document feeder, and then make a copy.

3. Mark the copied output page to clearly identify it as output from the document feeder.

4. Compare the original and copied pages. Defects appearing on the copied page are caused by a
problem in the document feeder.

Flatbed isolation test

1. Mark a printed page in a way that clearly identifies it as the source document used in this isolation
procedure.

2. Place the source page on the flatbed glass, and then make a copy.

3. Mark the copied output page to clearly identify it as output from the flatbed.

Copy-quality troubleshooting 321

 4. Compare the original and copied pages. Defects appearing on the copied page are caused by a
problem in the flatbed.

Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges

Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic
backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed
pages have streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.

View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and flatbed glass.

1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.

2. Open the scanner lid.

322 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft
cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.

CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly
on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the printer.

NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder,
be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).

4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.

Vertical lines, bands, or streaks

Learn about vertical lines, bands, or streaks copy-quality problems.

Vertical lines or streaks appear on copies and/or scans in the same direction that the paper feeds when
copying and/or scanning from the document feeder. Lines or streaks might be visible on the front and/or
the back side of the page. Copies and/or scans from the flatbed glass look normal. Printouts also look
normal.

The line or streak might be black or in color, and can also be present on fax or digital send output (for
example, when using Scan to folder or Scan to email features.

NOTE: HP has determined that 99% of all lines and streaks on copies made by feeding the original
documents through the document feeder are caused by debris on the document feeder glass strip.
Even small specks can cause the light reflected off the original to be distorted, resulting in a line, streak,
or smudge on copies or scans made from the document feeder.

Vertical lines, bands, or streaks 323

 Even if the document feeder glass strip and/or flatbed glass has been wiped clean, the defect might
persist. Persistent vertical lines, bands, or streaks when copying from the document feeder might mean
that the debris causing the print quality are not readily visible and cannot be removed with a quick
cleaning.

Use the procedures below to resolve persistent lines, bands, or streak copy-quality (CQ) problems.

Locate debris and thoroughly clean the document feeder glass

1. Place a blank sheet of paper in the document feeder and mark an X in the lower right corner as
shown.

Figure 4-94 Load the document feeder

2. Press the Start button to make a copy of the blank page.

3. Place the copied paper face-up on the flatbed glass with the X located as shown.

NOTE: Make sure the upper left corner of the copy is aligned with the upper left corner of the
flatbed glass.

Figure 4-95 Place the copy on the flatbed

4. Follow the line or streak on the paper to the area on the document feeder glass that is causing the
CQ problem.

324 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Figure 4-96 Identify the CQ defect location

5. Use a fingernail to loosen any stubborn debris.

WARNING! Use only a fingernail. Other objects can scratch the document feeder glass.

Clean this specific area again (with a lint-free cloth dampened with water), and then dry the glass
with a soft, lint-free cloth.

Figure 4-97 Clean the glass

6. Make another copy or scan to determine if the defect is gone.

Clean the duplexer scanner glass (model specific)

NOTE: Not all MFP printers use a background selector for duplex printing.

If a Side 2 Background Selector cannot be located for the printer (it might not include one) skip this
procedure.

1. Release the latch and open the document feeder jam-access door.

Vertical lines, bands, or streaks 325

 Figure 4-98 Open the jam-access door

2. Unlock the Side 2 Background Selector by pressing and holding both green tabs inward towards
each other.

Figure 4-99 Release the Side 2 Background Selector

3. While holding the green tabs, pull out and remove the Side 2 Background Selector.

Figure 4-100 Remove the Side 2 Background Selector

326 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 4. Rotate the top to reveal the white and black backside reflector (circled in blue).

NOTE: If the white and black areas do not come clean, try again using isopropyl alcohol, and then
wipe the surface thoroughly with a damp cloth to remove any residual alcohol. Dry the area with a
soft, dry cloth to prevent spotting.

Figure 4-101 Locate the backside reflector

5. With the background selector removed from the document feeder, clean the inside of the scan
module.

6. In the back area from where the background selector was removed, locate the Side 2 Scan Module
glass found under the top area.

NOTE: The glass surface of the Side 2 Scan module sits horizontally flat and might not be easily
viewable.

7. Use a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with water and apply pressure upwards behind the rollers to
clean the Side 2 Scan Module Glass, making sure to that the entire width of the glass is cleaned
from left to right.

NOTE: If needed, lens cleaner or non-abrasive glass cleaner can be applied to the cloth before
cleaning the glass. Spray only onto the cloth and not directly onto the glass or device. Do not spray
water or glass cleaner on the glass as it can seep under it and possibly damage the printer. Do not
use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on the glass; these can
damage it and/or leave residue on the glass resulting in degraded copy/scan quality.

8. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the Side 2 Background Selector.

9. Make another copy or scan to determine if the defect is gone.

Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality

Learn about printer settings to improve scan or copy quality.

Optimize printer settings to potentially improve scan or copy quality.

IMPORTANT: The printer settings described in this section are firmware dependent and might not be
available for a specific printer (for example, color adjustment settings do not apply to mono printers).

Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality 327

 Image Adjustment settings

NOTE: Settings > Print (SFP) or Copy/Print (MFP) > Image Adjustment > Background Cleanup.

Use the sliders to perform a Background Cleanup, adjust the image Darkness as well as changing the
Sharpness and Contrast.

Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy (for example, adjusting the Darkness and
Sharpness. Use the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint images from the background or to
remove a light background color.

● Darkness: Adjust this setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors.

● Contrast: Adjust this setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

● Background Cleanup: Adjust this setting if copying a faint image is a problem.

● Sharpness: Adjust this setting to clarify or soften the image. Increasing the sharpness might make
text appear crisper, but decreasing it would make photographs appear smoother.

Optimize Text/Picture settings

NOTE: Settings > Scan/Digital Send Settings > Optimize Text/Picture.

Use to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the output for text, printed
pictures, or a mixture.

Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content.

● Mixed: Use to optimize the setting for text and for pictures.

● Text: Use to optimize the text portion of the copy when text and/or pictures are on the original.

● Printed picture: Use to optimize line drawing and preprinted images such as magazine clippings or
pages from a book. If you see bands of irregular intensity on copies, try selecting Printed picture to
improve quality.

● Photographs: Use to optimize photographic prints.

Color/Black settings

NOTE: Settings > Scan/Digital Send Settings > Color/Black.

Use to enable or disable color scanning.(some highlighters will not auto detect as color).

● Automatically detect color or black: When pages without color are detected, the printer creates an
image of the page in 1-bit black if other settings allow. If the other settings don't allow (File Type, for
example), the image is in grayscale.

● Automatically detect color or gray: When pages without color are detected, the printer creates an
image of the page in grayscale. Select this option for the best image quality for non-color pages.

● Color: Scans the documents in color.

● Black: Scans documents in black and white with a compressed file size.

● Black/Gray: Scans or prints documents in grayscale.

328 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Light or faint copies (color models)
Learn how to resolve light or faint copy-quality problems.

Are you attempting to copy or scan highlighted text?

NOTE: When digitally sending or copying highlighted images or text objects, the image might appear
lighter than expected or does not show up at all with certain brands/types of highlighter pens.

Highlighters come in bright, often fluorescent colors. Fluorescent highlighter inks tend to reflect more
light than that which is absorbed by the paper source. This reflection might cause the image to not show
up as well as non-fluorescent colors depending upon the scanner/MFP being used.

The most common color for highlighters is yellow, but many other colors are also found such as pink,
blue, green, orange, and purples. Yellow is often the preferred color to use when making a photocopy as it
tends to not produce as much of a shadow on copies or scans.

There are different color and ink properties depending upon the brand of highlighters used. Due to these
differences, scanning of the images might vary greatly from not being seen at all to changing colors (for
example, orange highlighter might appear brown in the copy or scan or yellow highlighter might appear
green).

Automatic color detect

HP has a feature in all FutureSmart (LaserJet Enterprise Series only) printers which automatically
detects color on each page. Depending upon the amount of color information on a page, the scanner
might determine the page to be black and white due to a very, very small amount of color which might
be considered background artifacts. This helps to reduce the file size of sent files as well as toner usage
on a copied page. You might see small highlighted marks on pages print out in black and white or even
disappear.

The black and white effect is due to the printer not seeing enough color on the page, in which case the
whole image is rendered as a black and white page. The highlighted mark disappearing might be due to
the marker characteristics not being detected by the scanner.

Does the printer have the latest firmware version installed?

No or I don't know.

A Firmware enhancement has been introduced for certain LaserJets to help with the reproduction of
highlighted images.

NOTE: Some Multifunction Printers (MFPs) using FutureSmart firmware v3.5.3 or later have improved
color reproduction of fluorescent highlighters when scanning or copying.

Use the following steps to identify the installed firmware version, and then upgrade the firmware if
needed.

1. Print a configuration page (from the printer control panel).

2. On the printed configuration page look in the section marked Device Information, and then identify
the Firmware Datecode and Firmware Revision.

This is the current version of firmware installed on this printer.

3. In the US, go to www.hp.com/support/ljM406 or www.hp.com/support/ljM407 or www.hp.com/

support/ljM430MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljE40040 or
www.hp.com/support/ljE42540MFP.

Light or faint copies (color models) 329

 a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the appropriate product by name.

NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so
that the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.

b. Select the driver language and operating system.

c. Locate the firmware download. If the firmware version is more recent than the one shown on the
printed configuration page, select Download.

4. Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.

a. Select your country/region.

b. Select Drivers & Downloads.

c. Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then select Go.

TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a short video on
identifying the printer name and number.

d. Select the appropriate product by name.

NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so
that the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.

e. Select the driver language and operating system.

f. Locate the firmware download. If the firmware version is more recent than the one shown on the
printed configuration page, select Download.

5. Perform a firmware upgrade. See the Firmware upgrades topic in the product service manual.

6. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade
firmware version was installed.

Yes

These procedures help provide settings which affect the way highlighters are scanned or copied. A
firmware enhancement is available for certain printers that helps with the reproduction of highlighted
images.

● Enable Firmware Enhancement

1. From the Home screen, select the desired scanning application (for example, Copy, E-Mail, Save
to Network Folder).

2. Select More Options > Optimize Text/Picture > Text button (not slider). This enables the improved
color reproduction of fluorescent highlighters.

TIP: Administrators can set Text as the default setting on the device.

● Alternative Settings

See Modify printer settings to improve scan or copy quality on page 327 for more information.

330 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Performance and connectivity troubleshooting
Learn about performance and connectivity troubleshooting.

Solve fax or email problems

Learn about solving fax and email problems.

Fax or email troubleshooting information is not provided in this service manual. The most current
information is available in WISE. Search using model number then use "fax troubleshooting" as the
search term.

For HP Channel partners, open the HP Partner First Portal located at https://partner.hp.com, and then do
the following:

1. Select the Services & Support tab, and then select Technical Support.

2. Select Technical Documentation.

3. You will be taken to the WISE portal.

For HP service personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engines (WISE) sites:

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Solve performance problems

Review the following information and procedures to solve performance problems.

NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than
75-80gsm (20lb) plain paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick
up a page, which increases the reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases
the possibility of a mis-pick jam.

Performance and connectivity troubleshooting 331

 HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from
trays other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 75-80gsm (20lb) plain
paper.

Factors affecting print performance

Review the following information about factors affecting print performance.

Table 4-61 Solve performance problems

Problem Cause Solution

Pages print but are totally blank. The document might contain blank Check the original document to see if
pages. content is present on all of the pages.

Pages print but are totally blank. The printer might be malfunctioning. To check the printer, print a
Configuration page.

Pages print but are totally blank. Make sure that the printer is not feeding Make sure that the paper meets HP
multiple pages (especially if very thin specifications for this printer.
paper is used).
For a complete list of specific
HP-brand paper that this printer
supports, go to www.hp.com/support/
ljM406 or www.hp.com/support/ljM407
or www.hp.com/support/ljM430MFP
or www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP
or www.hp.com/support/ljE40040 or
www.hp.com/support/ljE42540MFP.

Pages print very slowly. Heavier paper types can slow the print Print on a different type of paper.
job.
NOTE: Some software programs
process print jobs slowly.

Pages print very slowly. Complex pages can print slowly. Proper fusing might require a slower
print speed to ensure the best print
NOTE: Some software programs quality.
process print jobs slowly.

Pages print very slowly. Large batches, narrow paper, and Print in smaller batches, on a different
special paper such as gloss, type of paper, or on a different size of
NOTE: Some software programs transparency, cardstock, and HP Tough paper.
process print jobs slowly. Paper can slow the print job.

Pages did not print. The printer might not be pulling paper Make sure paper is loaded in the tray
correctly. correctly.

Pages did not print. The paper is jamming in the printer. Clear the jam.

Pages did not print. The USB cable might be defective or ● Disconnect the USB cable at both
incorrectly connected. ends and reconnect it.

● Try printing a job that has printed in

the past.

● Try using a different USB cable.

Pages did not print. Other devices are running on the host The printer might not share a USB port.
computer. If an external hard drive or network
switchbox is connected to the same port
as the printer, the other device might be
interfering with the printer. To connect
and use the printer, disconnect the other
device or use two USB ports on the host
computer.

332 Chapter 4 Solve problems

 Table 4-61 Solve performance problems (continued)

Problem Cause Solution

Pages did not print. The print job might not have arrived at Check the printer status queue. Also, the
the printer. Printing message should appear on the
control panel display.

Print speeds
Print speed is the number of pages that print in one minute. Print speed depends on different engine-
process speeds or operational pauses between printed pages during normal printer operation. Factors
that determine the print speed of the printer include the following:

● Page formatting time

The printer must pause for each page to be formatted before it prints. Complex pages take more
time to format, resulting in reduced print speed. However, most jobs print at full engine speed.

● Media size

Legal-size media reduces print speed because it is longer than the standard Letter- or A4–size
media. A reduce print speed is used when printing on narrow media to prevent the edges of the
fuser from overheating.

● Media mode

Some media types require a reduced print speed to achieve maximum print quality on that media.
For example, glossy, heavy, and specialty media (for example, envelopes or photos) require a
reduced print speed. To maximize the print speed for special media types, make sure that the
correct media type in the print driver is selected.

● Printer temperature

To prevent printer damage, print speed is reduced if the printer reaches a specific internal
temperature (thermal slow down). The starting temperature of the printer, ambient environment
temperature, and the print job size effect the number of pages that can be printed before the printer
reduces the print speed. Thermal slow down reduces print speed by printing four pages and then
pausing for an amount of time before printing continues.

● Other print speed reduction factors

Other factors (especially during large print jobs) that can cause reduced print speeds include:

– Density control sequence; occurs every 150 pages and takes about 120 seconds

The printer does not print

If the printer does not print at all, try the following solutions.

1. Make sure the printer is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready.

● If the control panel does not indicate the printer is ready, turn the printer off and then on again.

● If the control panel indicates the printer is ready, try sending the job again.

2. If the control panel indicates the printer has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the job
again.

Print speeds 333

 3. Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the printer is connected to a network, check the
following items:

● Check the bottom LED next to the network connection on the printer. If the network is active,
the light is green.

● Make sure that a network cable and not a phone cord is used to connect to the network.

● Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.

4. Install the HP software for the printer. Using generic printer drivers can cause delays clearing jobs
from the print queue.

5. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and
open the Ports tab.

● If a network cable is used to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed on the
Ports tab matches the one on the printer configuration page.

● If a USB cable is used, and the printer is connected to a wireless network, make sure the box is
checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.

6. If a personal firewall system on the computer is used, it might be blocking communication with the
printer. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.

7. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or
interference might be delaying print jobs.

The printer prints slowly

If the printer prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.

1. Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this printer. For a list of
specifications, go to this Web site: www.hp.com/support/ljM406 or www.hp.com/support/ljM407
or www.hp.com/support/ljM430MFP or www.hp.com/support/ljM431MFP or www.hp.com/support/
ljE40040 or www.hp.com/support/ljE42540MFP.

2. When the printer is configured to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the printer prints
more slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not correct
for the type of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.

3. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or
interference might be delaying print jobs.

Solve connectivity problems

Review the following information and procedures to solve connectivity problems.

Solve USB connection problems

If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.

● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.

● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.65 ft). Try using a shorter cable.

● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if
necessary.

334 Chapter 4 Solve problems

Solve wired network problems
Review the following information and procedures to solve wired network problems.

Introduction
Check the following items to verify that the printer is communicating with the network. Before beginning,
print a configuration page from the printer control panel and locate the printer IP address that is listed
on this page.

Poor physical connection

Use the following procedure when the printer has a poor physical connection.

1. Verify that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.

2. Verify that cable connections are secure.

3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and verify that the amber activity
light and the green link-status light are lit.

4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer

Use the following procedure when the computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer.

1. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the printer
is selected. The printer IP address is listed on the printer configuration page.

2. If you installed the printer using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to
this printer, even if its IP address changes.

3. If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the
IP address.

4. If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.

The computer is unable to communicate with the printer

Use the following procedure when the computer is unable to communicate with the printer.

1. Test network communication by pinging the network.

a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.

● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.

● For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.

b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.

c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.

2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network
settings, the printer, and the computer are all configured for the same network.

The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these
settings, you must also change them for your network.

Solve wired network problems 335

 New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

Use the following procedure when the computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly.

1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.

2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.

The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

Use the following procedure when the printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect.

1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.

2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.

336 Chapter 4 Solve problems

5 Removal and replacement

When servicing the printer, several items must be considered to ensure a successful repair and to avoid
damage to the printer or personal injury. Learn about these considerations and find detailed instructions
for removing and replacing printer parts.

HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based
Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners

1. Select Services & Support (near the top of the screen).

2. Under Services Delivery, select Technical Support.

3. Select Technical Documentation.

Find information about the following topics

● Service manuals

● Service advisories

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Warranty and regulatory information

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

Removal and replacement 337

 ● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 5-1 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

338 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

Supplies and accessories

Learn about the supplies and accessories that are available for the printer.

To order cartridges, visit http://www.hp.com (some portions of the HP Web site are available in English
only). Ordering cartridges online is not supported in all countries/regions. However, many countries/
regions have information about ordering by telephone, locating a local store, and printing a shopping list.
In addition, go to hp.com/supplies to obtain information about purchasing HP products in your country/
region.

Use only the replacement cartridges that have the same cartridge number as the cartridge that is being
replaced. Find the cartridge number in the following places:

● On the label of the cartridge that is being replaced.

● On a sticker inside the printer. Open the cartridge door to locate the sticker.

● Open the printer software (HP Printer Assistant), and then click Shop > Shop For Supplies Online.

● Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS), and then click Tools > Supply Status (under the Product
Information item).

Table 5-2 Supplies part numbers

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

(new)

Toner cartridge HP 58A Black Original CF258-67901 CF258A

LaserJet toner cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 59A Black Original CF259-67901 CF259A

LaserJet toner cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 76A Black Original CF276-67901 CF276A

LaserJet toner cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 77A Black Original CF277-67901 CF277A

LaserJet toner cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 58X High Yield Black CF258-67902 CF258X

Original LaserJet toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 59X High Yield Black CF259-67902 CF259X

Original LaserJet toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 76X High Yield Black CF276-67902 CF276X

Original LaserJet toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 77X High Yield Black CF277-67902 CF277X

Original LaserJet toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge Black, managed toner 3PZ35-67901 W9024MC

cartridge

Supplies and accessories 339

 Table 5-3 Accessories

Description Part number (service) Product number

550-sheet paper feeder D9P29-67018 D9P29A

HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless 3JN69-61001 3JN69A

accessory

HP Accessibility Kit 2TD64-61001 2TD64A

HP Accessibility Assistant 2MU47-61001 2MU47A

Locking Tray Guides (managed printers only) 3PZ15-67909 NA

HP Jetdirect LAN Accessory Module 5851-8004 8FP31A

Customer self-repair parts

Learn about printer customer self-repair parts.

Customer self-repair (CSR) parts are available for many HP LaserJet printers to reduce repair time.

NOTE: More information about the CSR program and benefits can be found at www.hp.com/go/csr-
support and www.hp.com/go/csr-faq.

Genuine HP replacement parts can be ordered at www.hp.com/buy/parts or by contacting an HP-

authorized service or support provider. When ordering, one of the following will be needed: part number,
serial number (found on back of printer), product number, or printer name.

● Parts listed as A: Easy

● Parts listed as B: Difficult and/or require tools

● Parts listed as Mandatory: Customer installed self-replacement parts (unless the customer is willing
to pay for HP service personnel to perform the repair). For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot
support is not provided under the HP printer warranty.

● Parts listed as Optional: HP service personnel installed self-replacement parts by customer request
for no additional charge during the printer warranty period.

Table 5-4 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts

Kit name Description CSR level Self-replacement Part number

options

Tray 2 Replacement 250-sheet A Mandatory RM2-5392-010CN

paper input tray (Tray 2)

Tray 3 Replacement 550-sheet A Mandatory RM2-5413-000CN

paper input tray (optional Tray
3)

Tray 2 Separation Pad Separation assembly (Tray 2) A Mandatory 3PZ15-67964

Tray 3 Separation Pad Separation assembly A Mandatory 3PZ15-67967

(optional Tray 3)

Tray 1 Pickup Roller Tray pickup roller assembly A Mandatory 3PZ15-67966

(Multipurpose Tray 1)

Tray 2 Pickup Roller Tray pickup roller assembly A Mandatory 3PZ15-67965

(Tray 2)

340 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Table 5-4 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts (continued)

Kit name Description CSR level Self-replacement Part number

options

Tray 3 Pickup Roller Tray pickup roller assembly A Mandatory 3PZ15-67968

(optional Tray 3)

HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based
Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners

1. Select Services & Support (near the top of the screen).

2. Under Services Delivery, select Technical Support.

3. Select Technical Documentation.

Find information about the following topics

● Service manuals

● Service advisories

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Warranty and regulatory information

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

HP service and support 341

 ● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

Assembly locations
Learn about major printer assembly locations.

Printer front view (SFP)

Identify the parts on the front of the printer (SFP).

342 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1 Printer front view (SFP)
8
1
7

6
2

1
5
2

4
3

Number Description

1 Color non-touch control panel with 10-key keypad

2 Front door release button (access to the toner cartridge)

3 Power on/off button

4 Tray 3 (optional)

5 Tray 2

6 Tray 1

7 Output bin extension

8 Output bin

Printer back view (SFP)

Identify the parts on the back of the printer (SFP).

Printer back view (SFP) 343

 Figure 5-2 Printer rear view (SFP)

1
7
6 2
3
5
4

Number Description

1 USB port for job storage or connecting accessories

2 USB port for direct connection to a computer

3 Ethernet port

4 Power connection

5 Tray 3 (optional)

NOTE: Tray 3 extends when legal-size or A4-size paper is loaded.

6 Dust cover for Tray 2

NOTE: Dust cover flips up when legal-size or A4-size paper is loaded.

7 Serial number and product number label

8 Rear door (access for clearing jams)

Printer front view (MFP)

Identify the parts on the front of the printer (MFP).

344 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-3 Printer front view (MFP)
2
1

11 3
10
9
4
8
1
7
2

Number Description

1 Control panel (tilts up for easier viewing)

2 Document feeder

3 Scanner

4 Front door release button (access to the toner cartridge)

5 Power on/off button

6 Tray 3 (optional)

7 Tray 2

8 Tray 1

9 Output bin extension

10 Output bin

11 Walk-up USB port (for printing and scanning without a computer)

Printer back view (MFP)

Identify the parts on the back of the printer (MFP).

Printer back view (MFP) 345

 Figure 5-4 Printer rear view (MFP)

1
9 2

8 3

7
4

Number Description

1 USB port (for job storage and private printing)

2 USB interface port

3 Ethernet port

4 Fax "line in" port (for attaching the fax phone line to the printer)

5 Power connection

6 Tray 3 (optional)

NOTE: Tray 3 extends when legal-size or A4-size paper is loaded.

7 Dust cover for Tray 2

NOTE: Dust cover flips up when legal-size or A4-size paper is loaded.

8 Serial number and printer number label

9 Rear door (provides access for clearing jams)

Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts and accessories

Customer self-repair (CSR) A parts are parts that a customer replaces without assistance from a field
technician. These parts can be replaced without the use of any tools.

Removal and replacement: RM2-5392-010CN 250-sheet paper input tray

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 2 cassette.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 2 cassette.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

346 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-5 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5392-010CN Tray 2

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 347

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-5 Remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

348 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Install Tray 2
Follow these steps to install Tray 2.

■ Slide the tray straight into the printer to install it.

Figure 5-6 Install the tray

Removal and replacement: RM2-5413-000CN optional Tray 3 cassette

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 3 cassette.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 3 cassette.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-6 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5413-000CN Tray 3

Install Tray 2 349

 Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to remove optional Tray 3.

1. Pull the tray straight out of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-7 Pull the tray out of the printer

350 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Slightly lift up on the front of the tray to release it, and then continue to pull the tray out of the
accessory to remove it.

Figure 5-8 Release and remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 351

 3. Install optional Tray 3
Follow these steps to install optional Tray 3.

1. With the tray at a slight angle, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the accessory, and then
partially slide the tray into the accessory.

Figure 5-9 Install the tray

2. Push the tray straight into the accessory to close it

Figure 5-10 Close the tray

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67966 multipurpose tray roller

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 roller.

352 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-7 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67967 Tray 1 Pickup Roller

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the roller

Follow these steps to remove the roller.

An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

Remove the roller 353

 1. Press the door-release button, and then open the toner-cartridge door

Figure 5-11 Open the toner-cartridge door

2 1

2. Release two tabs between the roller collar and roller, and then rotate the top of the roller out and
away from the printer.

Figure 5-12 Release the roller

354 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove the roller.

Figure 5-13 Remove the roller

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 355

 3. Install the roller
Follow these steps to install the roller.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

An MFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

1. Position the pickup roller with the pins in the provided slots on the holder, and then rotate the top of
the roller up and toward the printer.

Figure 5-14 Install the roller

2. Continue to rotate the top of the roller toward the printer (callout 1), until two tabs (callout 2) snap
into place.

Figure 5-15 Engage two tabs

356 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Close the toner-cartridge door

Figure 5-16 Close the toner-cartridge door

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67965 Tray 2 paper pickup roller assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 2 pickup roller.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-8 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67965 Tray 2 Pickup Roller

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67965 Tray 2 paper pickup roller assembly 357
 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-17 Remove the tray

2. Remove the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2).

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

1. Carefully rotate the printer backward.

CAUTION: To avoid damage to the rear cassette cover, keep it in the closed position

358 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-18 Tilt the printer backward

2. Continue rotate the printer backward until it rests on the rear cover, bottom-side face forward.

CAUTION: MFP printers only: The document feeder is not captive and can unexpectedly open
when the printer is tilted backward.

Figure 5-19 Place the printer bottom-side face forward

Remove the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2) 359

 3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the roller holder toward the left side of the printer to
release it.

Figure 5-20 Release one tab

4. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 5-21 Remove the roller assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

360 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Install the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2)

Follow these steps to install the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2).

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

NOTE: A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

1. Position the roller holder assembly in the printer as shown, and then slide it toward the right side of
the printer.

Figure 5-22 Install the roller holder

Install the pickup roller assembly (Tray 2) 361

 2. Make sure that the tab snaps into place.

Figure 5-23 Check the tab

3. Carefully rotate the printer forward.

Figure 5-24 Rotate the printer forward

362 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Continue rotate the printer forward until it rests in the operational position.

Figure 5-25 Place the printer in the operational position

5. Install Tray 2
Follow these steps to install Tray 2.

■ Slide the tray straight into the printer to install it.

Figure 5-26 Install the tray

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67964 Tray 2 separation roller assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 2 separation roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 2 separation roller.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Install Tray 2 363

 Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-9 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67964 Separation assembly (Tray 2)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

364 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-27 Remove the tray

2. Remove the separation pad roller assembly (Tray 2)

Follow these steps to remove the separation pad roller assembly (Tray 2).

1. Press the locking lever (callout 1), and then pull the separation roller assembly straight up to release
it.

Figure 5-28 Release the assembly

Remove the separation pad roller assembly (Tray 2) 365

 2. Remove the assembly.

Figure 5-29 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

366 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Install the separation pad roller assembly (Tray 2)
Follow these steps to install the separation pad roller assembly (Tray 2).

1. Install the assembly in the slots in the cassette.

Figure 5-30 Install the assembly (1 of 2)

2. Push the separation roller assembly straight down until it snaps into place.

Figure 5-31 Install the assembly (2 of 2)

5. Install Tray 2
Follow these steps to install Tray 2.

Install the separation pad roller assembly (Tray 2) 367

 ■ Slide the tray straight into the printer to install it.

Figure 5-32 Install the tray

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67968 optional Tray 3 paper pickup roller

assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup roller.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-10 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67968 Tray pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

368 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to remove optional Tray 3.

1. Pull the tray straight out of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-33 Pull the tray out of the printer

Remove optional Tray 3 369

 2. Slightly lift up on the front of the tray to release it, and then continue to pull the tray out of the
accessory to remove it.

Figure 5-34 Release and remove the tray

2. Remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

1. Carefully turn the accessory over to expose the roller assembly.

Figure 5-35 Turn the accessory over

370 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Slide the roller holder to the right to compress the spring-loaded shaft and release the assembly.

Figure 5-36 Release the roller assembly

3. Rotate the end of the assembly up and away from the accessory.

Figure 5-37 Rotate the assembly up

Remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 371

 4. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 5-38 Remove the roller assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

372 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Install the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)
Follow these steps to install the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

1. Install the right end of the assembly on the spring-loaded shaft (callout 1), and then slide it to the
right to compress the shaft (callout 2).

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the pin on the back of the holder (callout 3) is inserted in the slot
(callout 4) in the lever arm. If the pin is not correctly installed, the accessory will not pick paper.

Figure 5-39 Install the roller assembly

2
3

Install the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 373

 2. Rotate the left end of the assembly down and into place (callout 1), and then slide the assembly to
the left (callout 2) to engage the drive end of the assembly with the drive shaft (callout 3).

Figure 5-40 Engage the assembly

3. Push down and then release the tray-roller actuator (callout 1) and observe the roller assembly. It
should move up and down (callout 2) in response to the actuator.

NOTE: If it does not, remove the roller assembly and reinstall it making sure that the pin on the
back of the assembly is in the lever arm. See the previous steps in this section.

Figure 5-41 Check the installation

2
1

5. Install optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to install optional Tray 3.

374 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. With the tray at a slight angle, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the accessory, and then
partially slide the tray into the accessory.

Figure 5-42 Install the tray

2. Push the tray straight into the accessory to close it

Figure 5-43 Close the tray

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67967 optional Tray 3 separation roller

assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 3 separation roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 3 separation roller.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67967 optional Tray 3 separation roller assembly 375
 Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-11 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67967 Tray 3 Separation Pad

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to remove optional Tray 3.

376 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Pull the tray straight out of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-44 Pull the tray out of the printer

2. Slightly lift up on the front of the tray to release it, and then continue to pull the tray out of the
accessory to remove it.

Figure 5-45 Release and remove the tray

2. Remove the separation roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Follow these steps to remove the separation roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

Remove the separation roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 377

 1. Press the locking lever (callout 1), and then pull the separation roller assembly straight up to release
it.

Figure 5-46 Release the assembly

1
2. Remove the assembly.

Figure 5-47 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

378 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Install the separation pad roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Follow these steps to install the separation pad roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

1. Install the assembly in the slots in the cassette.

Figure 5-48 Install the assembly (1 of 2)

Install the separation pad roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 379

 2. Push the separation roller assembly straight down until it snaps into place.

Figure 5-49 Install the assembly (2 of 2)

5. Install optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to install optional Tray 3.

1. With the tray at a slight angle, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the accessory, and then
partially slide the tray into the accessory.

Figure 5-50 Install the tray

380 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Push the tray straight into the accessory to close it

Figure 5-51 Close the tray

Document feeder / scanner

Learn about document feeder and scanner parts removal and replacement.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder top cover assembly with rollers
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder top cover assembly with rollers.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder top cover assembly with
rollers.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-12 Part information

Part number Part description

W1A77-67903 ADF top cover assembly (includes rollers)

Document feeder / scanner 381

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove the document feeder top cover assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder top cover assembly.

1. Open the document feeder top cover.

Figure 5-52 Open the document feeder top cover

382 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one hinge pin (callout 1).

Figure 5-53 Release one hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat blade screwdriver to lift up and release two hinge pins (callout 1), and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-54 Release two hinge pins

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 383

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ISA lift assembly and slider pin (MFP)
Learn how to remove and replace the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) lift assembly and slider pin.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ISA lift assembly and slider pin.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-13 Part information

Part number Part description

B3Q10-60128 ISA lift assembly

B3Q10-40041 ISA lift slider pin

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

384 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner ISA correctly opens and closes.

1. Remove the slider pin and ISA lift assembly (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the slider pin and ISA lift assembly (MFP only).

1. open the ISA, release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the
front of the printer to release it.

Figure 5-55 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

2. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Remove the slider pin and ISA lift assembly (MFP only) 385
 Figure 5-56 Remove the slider pin

3. Move the ISA out of the way, and then lower the support arm to the closed position.

CAUTION: The ISA hinges are not captive in the top cover mounting bosses. Do not allow the ISA
to slip off of the top cover.

Reinstallation tip: If the replacement lift assembly is in the closed position, place it in the open
position.

Figure 5-57 Lower the support arm

4. Before proceeding take note of the following.

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

386 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-58 Before proceeding take note

5. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-59 Remove one screw

Remove the slider pin and ISA lift assembly (MFP only) 387
 6. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-60 Release one tab

7. Remove the support arm.

Figure 5-61 Remove the support arm

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

388 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner assembly (MFP)

Learn how to remove and replace the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

Mean time to repair: 22 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

NOTE: The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly (SSA) and the
automatic document feeder (ADF).

Table 5-14 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-60117 Assy-duplex GSO (ISA/ADF assembly)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner assembly (MFP) 389

 ● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-62 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

390 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-63 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-64 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 391

 Figure 5-65 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-66 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

392 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-67 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-68 Release the left-side retainer arm

Remove the cartridge door assembly 393

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-69 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-70 Remove one screw

1 1

394 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-71 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-72 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only) 395
 1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-73 Raise the ISA

2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-74 Remove the ISA FFC cover

5. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

396 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-75 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-76 Release the tape

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 397

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-77 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-78 Release the ground wire

398 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-79 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-80 Remove the slider pin

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 399

 7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-81 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-82 Release the ISA

400 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-83 Remove the ISA

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 401

 Removal and replacement: External panels, covers, and doors
(base printer)
Learn how to remove and replace the printer external panels, covers, and doors.

Removal and replacement: Damper sheets

Learn how to remove and replace the damper sheets.

View a video of how to remove and replace the damper sheets.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-15 Part information

Part number Part description

Not orderable Sheets, damper (2)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the damper sheets

Follow these steps to remove the damper sheets.

402 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Remove the damper sheets from the rear cover.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that all of the residual adhesive is removed from the rear cover
damper sheet area. Residual adhesive can cause the replacement sheets to not adhere properly to
the door.

Figure 5-84 Remove the damper sheets

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 403

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Support shaft

Learn how to remove and replace the toner-cartridge door support shaft.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner-cartridge door support shaft.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-16 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3002-000CN Shaft, support

Required tools
● Optional: Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

1. Remove the support shaft

Follow these steps to remove the support shaft.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

404 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-85 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-86 Remove the support shaft

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 405

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Cartridge door assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the cartridge door assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the cartridge door assembly.

Mean time to repair: 6 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-17 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-2562-000CN Cartridge (front) door assembly (SFP)

RM2-2567-000CN Cartridge (front) door assembly (MFP)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

406 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

1. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-87 Release the support shaft

2 1

Remove the cartridge door assembly 407

 2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-88 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-89 Remove the guide

1 2

408 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-90 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-91 Release the door

2 3

Remove the cartridge door assembly 409

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-92 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-93 Remove the door

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

410 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Pressure-release link

Learn how to remove and replace the pressure-release link arm.

View a video of how to remove and replace the pressure release link arm.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-18 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-4479-000CN Link, pressure release

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

Removal and replacement: Pressure-release link 411

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

1. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-94 Release the support shaft

2 1

412 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-95 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-96 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 413

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-97 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-98 Release the door

2 3

414 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-99 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-100 Remove the door

2. Remove the pressure-release link

Follow these steps to remove the pressure-release link.

Remove the pressure-release link 415

 1. Rotate the pressure-release link until the keyed portion of the pin aligns with the slot in the holder.

Figure 5-101 Release the pressure-release link

2. Remove the pressure-release link.

Figure 5-102 Remove the pressure-release link

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

416 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the left cover.

Mean time to repair: 9 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-19 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-2960-000CN Cover, left (SFP)

RM2-2961-000CN Cover, left (MFP)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

Removal and replacement: Left cover 417

 ● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-103 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

418 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-104 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-105 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 419

 Figure 5-106 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-107 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

420 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-108 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-109 Release the left-side retainer arm

Remove the cartridge door assembly 421

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-110 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-111 Remove one screw

1 1

422 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-112 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-113 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 423

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right cover

Learn how to remove and replace the right cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the right cover.

Mean time to repair: 9 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-20 Part information

Part number Part description

Not orderable Right cover

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

424 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-114 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Remove Tray 2 425

 Figure 5-115 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-116 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

426 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-117 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-118 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 427

 Figure 5-119 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-120 Release the left-side retainer arm

428 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-121 Remove the door

3. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-122 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 429

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-123 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear door assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the rear door assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the rear door assembly.

430 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Mean time to repair: 13 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-21 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5405-000CN Rear door assembly

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 431

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-124 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-125 Release the support shaft

2 1

432 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-126 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-127 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 433

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-128 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-129 Release the door

2 3

434 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-130 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-131 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

Remove the left cover 435

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-132 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-133 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

436 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-134 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-135 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 437

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-136 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the rear door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the rear door assembly.

1. Inside the Tray 2 cavity, press the green jam access lever (callout 1), and then lower the duplex feed
assembly (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reach in from the front of the Tray 2 cavity and raise the feed assembly to the
up and locked position so that the rear cover will fit flat against the chassis.

Figure 5-137 Lower the duplex feed assembly

1
2

2. At the rear of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear door assembly
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Slide the duplex tray into the Tray 2 cavity.

438 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-138 Remove the door assembly

2
1

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Cassette rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the cassette rear cover.

Unpack the replacement assembly 439

 View a video of how to remove and replace the cassette rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 14 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-22 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3082-000CN Cover, cassette rear

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

440 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-139 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-140 Release the support shaft

2 1

Remove the cartridge door assembly 441

 2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-141 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-142 Remove the guide

1 2

442 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-143 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-144 Release the door

2 3

Remove the cartridge door assembly 443

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-145 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-146 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

444 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-147 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-148 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Remove the left cover 445

 Figure 5-149 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-150 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

446 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-151 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the rear door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the rear door assembly.

1. Inside the Tray 2 cavity, press the green jam access lever (callout 1), and then lower the duplex feed
assembly (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reach in from the front of the Tray 2 cavity and raise the feed assembly to the
up and locked position so that the rear cover will fit flat against the chassis.

Figure 5-152 Lower the duplex feed assembly

1
2

2. At the rear of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear door assembly
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Slide the duplex tray into the Tray 2 cavity.

Remove the rear door assembly 447

 Figure 5-153 Remove the door assembly

2
1

6. Remove the cassette rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the cassette rear cover.

NOTE: The figures in this procedure show a duplex rear cover assembly. However, the procedure is
valid for a simplex (not all printers have simplex models) rear cover.

1. Locate the left-side hinge retainer (callout 1).

Figure 5-154 Locate the hinge retainer

2. Carefully flex the cover to release the retainer (callout 1), and the left-side hinge pin (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: When the cover is correctly installed, it moves freely on the hinge pins.

448 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-155 Release the retainer and the hinge pin

3. Remove the cover.

Figure 5-156 Remove the cover

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 449

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Control panel mount top cover (MFP)

Learn how to remove and replace the MFP control panel mount cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the control panel mount top cover (MFP).

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-23 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67902 Cover, top control panel mount

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

450 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-157 Open the ISA

Remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only) 451

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-158 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-159 Release two tabs

452 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-160 Remove the cover

5. Remove the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-161 Remove the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 453

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover (MFP)

Learn how to remove and replace the top cover (MFP).

View a video of how to remove and replace the top cover.

Mean time to repair: 36 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-24 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3207-000CN Cover, top (MFP)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

454 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-162 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Remove Tray 2 455

 Figure 5-163 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-164 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

456 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-165 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-166 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 457

 Figure 5-167 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-168 Release the left-side retainer arm

458 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-169 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-170 Remove one screw

1 1

Remove the left cover 459

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-171 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-172 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

460 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-173 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-174 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only) 461
 1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-175 Raise the ISA

2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-176 Remove the ISA FFC cover

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

462 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-177 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-178 Release the tape

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 463

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-179 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-180 Release the ground wire

464 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-181 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-182 Remove the slider pin

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 465

 7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-183 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-184 Release the ISA

466 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-185 Remove the ISA

7. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-186 Open the ISA

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 467
 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-187 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-188 Release two tabs

468 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-189 Remove the cover

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-190 Remove one screw

1
2

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 469
 6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-191 Disconnect two FFC

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-192 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

470 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-193 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

8. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-194 Disconnect one cable

Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only) 471
 2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-195 Remove the cover and cable

3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-196 Remove the FFC

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

472 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-197 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

Figure 5-198 Remove the support arm

Remove the top cover (MFP) 473

 3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-199 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

474 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Learn how to remove and replace the cable guide (MFP).

View a video of how to remove and replace the cable guide.

Mean time to repair: 38 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-25 Part information

Part number Part description

RC5-7024-000CN Guide, USB cable

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

475
 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-200 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-201 Release the support shaft

2 1

476 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-202 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-203 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 477

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-204 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-205 Release the door

2 3

478 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-206 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-207 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

Remove the left cover 479

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-208 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-209 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

480 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-210 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-211 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 481

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-212 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-213 Raise the ISA

482 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-214 Remove the ISA FFC cover

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

Figure 5-215 Disconnect three FFCs

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 483

 2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-216 Release the tape

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-217 Release the ground wire

1 3

484 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-218 Release the ground wire

5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-219 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 485

 Figure 5-220 Remove the slider pin

7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-221 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

486 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-222 Release the ISA

9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-223 Remove the ISA

7. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 487
 Figure 5-224 Open the ISA

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-225 Remove one screw

488 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-226 Release two tabs

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-227 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 489
 5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-228 Remove one screw

1
2

6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-229 Disconnect two FFC

490 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-230 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

Figure 5-231 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

8. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only) 491
 1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-232 Disconnect one cable

2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-233 Remove the cover and cable

492 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-234 Remove the FFC

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-235 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

Remove the top cover (MFP) 493

 Figure 5-236 Remove the support arm

3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-237 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Remove the cable guide (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the cable guide (MFP only).

494 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Turn the top cover over, release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide as shown to release it.

Figure 5-238 Release the cable guide

1
2

2. Remove the guide.

Figure 5-239 Remove the guide

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 495

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover

Learn how to remove and replace the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) cable cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ISA cable cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-26 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67978 Cover, ISA/fax FFC cables

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

496 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-240 Raise the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only) 497
 2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-241 Remove the ISA FFC cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

498 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Top cover (SFP)
Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the top cover.

Mean time to repair: 14 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-27 Part information

Part number Part description

RC5-7026-000CN Cover, top (SFP)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Removal and replacement: Top cover (SFP) 499

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-242 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-243 Release the support shaft

2 1

500 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-244 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-245 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 501

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-246 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-247 Release the door

2 3

502 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-248 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-249 Remove the door

3. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Remove the right cover 503

 Figure 5-250 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-251 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

4. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

504 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-252 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-253 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Remove the left cover 505

 Figure 5-254 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

5. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-255 Remove one screw

506 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-256 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

Figure 5-257 Remove the cover

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 507

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Keypad and indication covers (SFP)

Learn how to remove and replace the keypad and indication covers.

View a video of how to remove and replace the keypad and indication covers.

Mean time to repair: 16 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-28 Part information

Part number Part description

RC5-7025-000CN Keypad cover

RL2-3790-000CN Cover, indication

508 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-258 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

Remove Tray 2 509

 1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-259 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-260 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

510 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-261 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-262 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 511

 Figure 5-263 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-264 Release the left-side retainer arm

512 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-265 Remove the door

3. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-266 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 513

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-267 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

4. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-268 Remove one screw

1 1

514 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-269 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-270 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

5. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 515

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-271 Remove one screw

2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-272 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

516 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-273 Remove the cover

6. Remove the keypad cover and indication cover

Follow these steps to remove the keypad cover and indication cover.

1. Starting with a corner of the keypad cover, gently peel it away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-274 Remove the keypad

2. Rotate the top edge of the indication cover away from the printer to release it.

Reinstallation tip: Use two-sided tape to secure the upper edge of the indication cover to the top
cover.

Remove the keypad cover and indication cover 517

 Figure 5-275 Remove the cover

3. Remove the indicator cover.

Figure 5-276 Remove the cover

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

518 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper delivery tray (output bin)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper delivery tray (output bin).

View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP output bin.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP output bin.

Mean time to repair: 16 minutes SFP, 38 minutes MFP

Service level: Medium for SFP and MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-29 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-3231-000CN Paper delivery tray (output bin)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

Removal and replacement: Paper delivery tray (output bin) 519

 ● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-277 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

520 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-278 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-279 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 521

 Figure 5-280 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-281 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

522 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-282 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-283 Release the left-side retainer arm

Remove the cartridge door assembly 523

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-284 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-285 Remove one screw

1 1

524 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-286 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-287 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Remove the right cover 525

 Figure 5-288 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-289 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

526 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-290 Raise the ISA

2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-291 Remove the ISA FFC cover

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 527

 Figure 5-292 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-293 Release the tape

528 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-294 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-295 Release the ground wire

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 529

 5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-296 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-297 Remove the slider pin

530 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-298 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-299 Release the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 531

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-300 Remove the ISA

7. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-301 Open the ISA

532 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-302 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-303 Release two tabs

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 533
 4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-304 Remove the cover

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-305 Remove one screw

1
2

534 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-306 Disconnect two FFC

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-307 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 535
 Figure 5-308 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

8. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-309 Disconnect one cable

536 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-310 Remove the cover and cable

3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-311 Remove the FFC

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

Remove the top cover (MFP) 537

 1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-312 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

Figure 5-313 Remove the support arm

538 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-314 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-315 Remove one screw

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 539

 2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-316 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

Figure 5-317 Remove the cover

11. Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin)

Follow these steps to remove the paper delivery tray (output bin).

540 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

■ Release one tab (callout 1), release two bosses (callout 2), and then remove the paper delivery tray
(output bin; callout 3).

Figure 5-318 Remove the cover

2 3

Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin) 541

 12. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Internal parts and assemblies (base

printer)
Learn how to remove and replace the base printer internal parts and assemblies.

Removal and replacement: Fuser

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

542 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-30 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-2554-000CN Fuser assembly (110-127V)

RM2-2555-000CN Fuser assembly (220-240V)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 543

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-319 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-320 Release the support shaft

2 1

544 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-321 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-322 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 545

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-323 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-324 Release the door

2 3

546 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-325 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-326 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

Remove the left cover 547

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-327 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-328 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

548 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-329 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-330 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 549

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-331 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the rear door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the rear door assembly.

1. Inside the Tray 2 cavity, press the green jam access lever (callout 1), and then lower the duplex feed
assembly (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reach in from the front of the Tray 2 cavity and raise the feed assembly to the
up and locked position so that the rear cover will fit flat against the chassis.

Figure 5-332 Lower the duplex feed assembly

1
2

2. At the rear of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear door assembly
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Slide the duplex tray into the Tray 2 cavity.

550 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-333 Remove the door assembly

2
1

6. Remove the fuser

Follow these steps to remove the fuser.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-334 Disconnect one connector

Remove the fuser 551

 2. Pull the upper connector cover (callout 1) straight off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-335 Remove the cover

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-336 Disconnect two connectors

552 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-337 Remove four screws

5. Pull the pressure-release link arm (callout 1) to release it from the fuser.

Reinstallation tip: When the fuser is installed, make sure that the pressure-release arm is
correctly connected to the fuser (callout 2)

Figure 5-338 Release the pressure-release arm

1
2

Remove the fuser 553

 6. Slide the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-339 Remove the fuser

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

554 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the registration assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP registration assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP registration assembly.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes SFP, 50 minutes MFP

Service level: Medium SFP, Difficult MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-31 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-2577-000CN Registration assembly

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly 555

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-340 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-341 Release the support shaft

2 1

556 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-342 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-343 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 557

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-344 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-345 Release the door

2 3

558 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-346 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-347 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

Remove the left cover 559

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-348 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-349 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

560 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-350 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-351 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 561

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-352 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the rear door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the rear door assembly.

1. Inside the Tray 2 cavity, press the green jam access lever (callout 1), and then lower the duplex feed
assembly (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Reach in from the front of the Tray 2 cavity and raise the feed assembly to the
up and locked position so that the rear cover will fit flat against the chassis.

Figure 5-353 Lower the duplex feed assembly

1
2

2. At the rear of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear door assembly
(callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Slide the duplex tray into the Tray 2 cavity.

562 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-354 Remove the door assembly

2
1

6. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-355 Open the ISA

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 563
 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-356 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-357 Release two tabs

564 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-358 Remove the cover

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-359 Remove one screw

1
2

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 565
 6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-360 Disconnect two FFC

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-361 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

566 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-362 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

7. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-363 Raise the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only) 567
 2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-364 Remove the ISA FFC cover

8. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

Figure 5-365 Disconnect three FFCs

568 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-366 Release the tape

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-367 Release the ground wire

1 3

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 569

 4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-368 Release the ground wire

5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-369 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

570 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-370 Remove the slider pin

7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-371 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 571

 8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-372 Release the ISA

9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-373 Remove the ISA

9. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

572 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-374 Disconnect one cable

2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-375 Remove the cover and cable

Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only) 573
 3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-376 Remove the FFC

10. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-377 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

574 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-378 Remove the support arm

3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-379 Remove the top cover

1 2

11. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 575

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-380 Remove one screw

2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-381 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

576 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-382 Remove the cover

12. Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin)

Follow these steps to remove the paper delivery tray (output bin).

Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin) 577

 ■ Release one tab (callout 1), release two bosses (callout 2), and then remove the paper delivery tray
(output bin; callout 3).

Figure 5-383 Remove the cover

2 3

578 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

13. Remove the fuser
Follow these steps to remove the fuser.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-384 Disconnect one connector

2. Pull the upper connector cover (callout 1) straight off of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-385 Remove the cover

Remove the fuser 579

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-386 Disconnect two connectors

4. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-387 Remove four screws

5. Pull the pressure-release link arm (callout 1) to release it from the fuser.

Reinstallation tip: When the fuser is installed, make sure that the pressure-release arm is
correctly connected to the fuser (callout 2)

580 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-388 Release the pressure-release arm

1
2

6. Slide the fuser straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-389 Remove the fuser

14. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

Remove the registration assembly 581

 1. Carefully rotate the printer backward until it rests on the rear side, bottom-side face forward.

Figure 5-390 Place the printer bottom-side face forward

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-391 Remove one screw and the guide

3. Move the end of pressure-release link arm out of the way.

NOTE: Doing this makes the other end of the pressure-release arm easier to move out of the way
of the later in this procedure.

582 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-392 Move the link arm out of the way

4. Place the printer with the bottom side down, look inside the toner-cartridge cavity, and then remove
two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-393 Remove two screws

Remove the registration assembly 583

 5. Move the end of pressure-release link arm (callout 1) out of the way.

Figure 5-394 Move the pressure-release arm out of the way

6. Rotate the left end of the registration up and out of the printer (callout 1), and then slide it to the left
to release the gear end of the assembly (callout 2).

Figure 5-395 Release the assembly

584 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the assembly.

Figure 5-396 Remove the assembly

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 585

 Removal and replacement: Main motor (M1)
Learn how to remove and replace the main motor (M1).

View a video of how to remove and replace the main motor.

Mean time to repair: 12 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-32 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-9531-000CN Assembly, main motor

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

586 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-397 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-398 Release the support shaft

2 1

Remove the cartridge door assembly 587

 2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-399 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-400 Remove the guide

1 2

588 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-401 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-402 Release the door

2 3

Remove the cartridge door assembly 589

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-403 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-404 Remove the door

3. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

590 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-405 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-406 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

4. Remove the main motor (M1)

Follow these steps to remove the main motor (M1).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 5), remove four screws (callout 1 to callout 4), and the remove the
main motor (M1).

Reinstallation tip: When the motor is installed, make sure that the screws are installed in the order
(callout 1 - 4).

Remove the main motor (M1) 591

 Figure 5-407 Remove the motor

1
2

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Power switch printed circuit assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the power switch printed circuit assembly (PCA).

592 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the power switch.

Mean time to repair: 12 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-33 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-8506-000CN Power switch PC board assembly

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 593

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-408 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-409 Release the support shaft

2 1

594 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-410 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-411 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 595

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-412 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-413 Release the door

2 3

596 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-414 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-415 Remove the door

3. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Remove the right cover 597

 Figure 5-416 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-417 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

4. Remove the power switch PCA

Follow these steps to remove the power switch PCA.

598 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-418 Release one tab

2. Remove the switch lever.

Figure 5-419 Remove the switch lever

Remove the power switch PCA 599

 3. Release the wire harness from the guide (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-420 Disconnect one connector

4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the power switch PCA.

CAUTION: Do not damage the tab (callout 1) when releasing the it. The tab must snap over the
PCA when it is reinstalled.

Reinstallation tip: The PCA must be securely installed in the holder. Make sure that the tab on the
holder snaps in place over the edge of the PCA, and that the two alignment pins are installed in the
holes on the PCA.

Figure 5-421 Release one tab and remove the PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

600 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fax PCA and cable (MFP)

Learn how to remove and replace the fax printed circuit assembly (PCA) and cable.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fax PCA.

Mean time to repair: 12 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-34 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67911 Cable, FFC fax to formatter

3PZ55-67980 Fax PCA with plug kit (USA)

Removal and replacement: Fax PCA and cable (MFP) 601

 Table 5-34 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67981 Fax PCA with plug kit (EURO)

3PZ55-67982 Fax PCA with plug kit (BRAZIL)

3PZ55-67983 Fax PCA with plug kit (AP)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

If possible, send a fax to the printer.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-422 Remove the tray

602 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly
Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-423 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-424 Remove the support shaft

Remove the cartridge door assembly 603

 3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-425 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-426 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

604 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-427 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-428 Release the left-side retainer arm

Remove the cartridge door assembly 605

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-429 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-430 Remove one screw

1 1

606 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-431 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-432 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the fax PCA and cable (Fax models only)

Follow these steps to remove the fax PCA and cable (Fax models only).

Remove the fax PCA and cable (Fax models only) 607
 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-433 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fax PCA and cable.

Figure 5-434 Remove three screws

608 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Optional step: If you are replacing the fax PCA or the cable, disconnect the cable from the PCA.

Figure 5-435 Disconnect the cable

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 609

 Removal and replacement: Fax cable guide (MFP)
Learn how to remove and replace the fax cable guide.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fax cable guide.

Mean time to repair: 11 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-35 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67979 Guide, fax FFC

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

If possible, send a fax to the printer.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

610 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-436 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-437 Release the support shaft

2 1

Remove the cartridge door assembly 611

 2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-438 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-439 Remove the guide

1 2

612 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-440 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-441 Release the door

2 3

Remove the cartridge door assembly 613

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-442 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-443 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

614 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-444 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-445 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Remove the left cover 615

 Figure 5-446 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the fax cable guide (fax models only)

Follow these steps to remove the fax cable guide (fax models only).

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-447 Remove the cable from the guide

616 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-448 Release one tab

3. Lower the guide to release it from the formatter.

Figure 5-449 Lower the guide

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 617

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: USB port and cable (MFP)

Learn how to remove and replace the USB port and cable.

View a video of how to remove and replace the USB port and cable.

Mean time to repair: 11 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-36 Part information

Part number Part description

5851-7008 USB A F panel mount to WTB 250mm (MFP)

NOTE: This is the USB port and cable located at the front of the printer
under the control panel.

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

618 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print a job from the walkup USB PCA.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-450 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Remove Tray 2 619

 Figure 5-451 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-452 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

620 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-453 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-454 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 621

 Figure 5-455 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-456 Release the left-side retainer arm

622 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-457 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-458 Remove one screw

1 1

Remove the left cover 623

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-459 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-460 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the USB port and cable (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the USB port and cable (MFP).

624 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-461 Disconnect one connector

2
1

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the USB port and cable.

Figure 5-462 Remove the USB port and cable

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 625

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Island of Data (IOD)

Learn how to remove and replace the Island of Data (IOD).

View a video of how to remove and replace the IOD.

Mean time to repair: 13 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-37 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67908 Island of Data (IOD)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

626 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that the toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-463 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Remove Tray 2 627

 Figure 5-464 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-465 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

628 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-466 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-467 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 629

 Figure 5-468 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-469 Release the left-side retainer arm

630 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-470 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-471 Remove one screw

1 1

Remove the left cover 631

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-472 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-473 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the Island of Data (IOD)

Follow these steps to remove the Island of Data (IOD).

632 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-474 Remove the wire harness

1
1

2
2

2. Do one of the following:

● SFP: Remove the wire harness (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

● MFP: Remove the wire harnesses (callout 3) from the guides (callout 4).

Figure 5-475 Remove the wire harness

1
4

2 3

Remove the Island of Data (IOD) 633

 3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the IOD (callout 2) away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-476 Press the wire down and release the tab

1 1

2 2

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then connect the cable to the replacement part (callout
2).

Figure 5-477 Remove the IOD

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

634 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC)

Learn how to remove and replace the embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC).

View a video of how to remove and replace the eMMC.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-38 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67905 eMMC 4GB SFP

B5L32-60002 eMMC 16GB (MFP)

Required tools
● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC) 635

 Post service test
Make sure that the toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-478 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

636 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-479 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-480 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 637

 Figure 5-481 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-482 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

638 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-483 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-484 Release the left-side retainer arm

Remove the cartridge door assembly 639

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-485 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-486 Remove one screw

1 1

640 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-487 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-488 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC)

Follow these steps to remove the embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC).

■ Carefully pull the eMMC away from the formatter to remove it.

NOTE: If replacing the formatter, retain the eMMC for installation on the replacement formatter.

Remove the embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC) 641

 Figure 5-489 Remove the eMMC

1
1

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the formatter printed circuit assembly (PCA).

View a video of how to remove and replace the formatter.

Mean time to repair: 14 minutes

642 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of
printer it is installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.

Issues that can occur from swapping a formatter include:

● Serial number, product number, product name, page count, and supported cartridges information
change and might make a product unusable

● 33.02.01 Used board/Disk installed errors

If a used formatter is installed and causes this issue, the partner must cover the costs of the repair in
the form of a product replacement. There is no method in the field to recover a printer where a used
formatter is installed.

For more information, see HP LaserJet Enterprise, HP LaserJet Managed, HP PageWide Enterprise, HP
PageWide Managed - 33.02.01 error or printer name and/or product number changes after replacing
the formatter.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-39 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67903 Formatter (SFP)

3PZ15-67904 Formatter (China/India; SFP)

3PZ55-67906 Formatter (MFP)

3PZ55-67907 Formatter (China/India; MFP)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Formatter PCA 643

 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-490 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

644 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-491 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-492 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 645

 Figure 5-493 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-494 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

646 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-495 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-496 Release the left-side retainer arm

Remove the cartridge door assembly 647

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-497 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-498 Remove one screw

1 1

648 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-499 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-500 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only)
Follow these steps to remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only).

Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only) 649
 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-501 Remove the cable from the guide

2. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-502 Release one tab

650 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Lower the guide to release it from the formatter.

Figure 5-503 Lower the guide

4. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fax PCA and cable.

Figure 5-504 Remove three screws

5. Remove the embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC)

Follow these steps to remove the embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC).

■ Carefully pull the eMMC away from the formatter to remove it.

NOTE: If replacing the formatter, retain the eMMC for installation on the replacement formatter.

Remove the embedded Multi-Media Card (eMMC) 651

 Figure 5-505 Remove the eMMC

1
1

6. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

CAUTION: Under NO circumstances should a formatter from a different printer be installed during
the repair or troubleshooting processes. The formatter stores important data specific to the model of
printer it is installed in and is not deigned to be swapped or repurposed in any way. Return a used
formatter to HP.

IMPORTANT: For replacement formatter installations: Make sure that the eMMC and TPM
components are removed from the discarded formatter, and then installed on the replacement
formatter.

A factory installed TPM must remain with the printer it is originally installed in. If the TPM is removed
the printer will not function (reinstall the original TPM). If a TPM cannot be reinstalled or is damaged,
a whole unit replacement printer is required (for security reasons there is no method for in-the-field
recovery of the printer).
NOTE: The formatter PCA on other models might look differently and have a different number of
connections. However, the procedure is correct for all models.

1. Carefully pull the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (callout 1) away from the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-506 Remove the TPM

1 1

652 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Do one of the following:

● SFP: Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).

● MFP: Disconnect eight connectors (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Take note of any empty connectors before removing the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-507 SFP/MFP: Disconnect the connectors

3. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-508 Remove three screws

1
1

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,

Unpack the replacement assembly 653

 touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fan (FM1)

Learn how to remove and replace the fan (FM1).

View a video of how to remove and replace the fan.

Mean time to repair: 11 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-40 Part information

Part number Part description

RK2-8068-000CN Fan assembly

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

654 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Listen for the fan to rotate when the printer power is turned on.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-509 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Remove Tray 2 655

 Figure 5-510 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-511 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

656 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-512 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-513 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 657

 Figure 5-514 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-515 Release the left-side retainer arm

658 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-516 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-517 Remove one screw

1 1

Remove the left cover 659

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-518 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-519 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the fan (FM1).

660 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the retainer (callout
2).

Figure 5-520 Disconnect one connector

2. Release two tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-521 Release two tabs

3. Remove the fan.

Reinstallation tip: The fan must be correctly installed so that air is drawn into the printer. Make
sure that the two arrows embossed on the right-side of the fan body—which indicate air flow
direction—face upward and into the printer.

Remove the fan (FM1) 661

 Figure 5-522 Remove the fan

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fan holder (FM1)

Learn how to remove and replace the fan holder (FM1) .

662 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the fan holder.

Mean time to repair: 13 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-41 Part information

Part number Part description

RC4-2891-000CN Duct, fan (FM1)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Listen for the fan to rotate when the printer power is turned on.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 663

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-523 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-524 Release the support shaft

2 1

664 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-525 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-526 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 665

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-527 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-528 Release the door

2 3

666 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-529 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-530 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

Remove the left cover 667

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-531 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-532 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

668 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-533 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the fan (FM1).

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the retainer (callout
2).

Figure 5-534 Disconnect one connector

Remove the fan (FM1) 669

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-535 Release two tabs

3. Remove the fan.

Reinstallation tip: The fan must be correctly installed so that air is drawn into the printer. Make
sure that the two arrows embossed on the right-side of the fan body—which indicate air flow
direction—face upward and into the printer.

Figure 5-536 Remove the fan

5. Remove the fan holder (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the fan holder (FM1).

1. Release one wire harness from the retainers (SFP shown; callout 1) on the fan holder.

NOTE: The MFP has two wire harnesses in the retainers.

670 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 TIP: It might be easier to release the wire harness by first disconnecting the connector.

Figure 5-537 Release the wire harness (SFP shown)

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-538 Remove one screw

3. Release one tab at the top-left side of the fan holder (callout 1), and then rotate the top-left side
corner of the holder away from the printer.

TIP: Use a flat-blade screwdriver to slightly flex the top of the holder down to make it easier to
engage this tab.

Remove the fan holder (FM1) 671

 Figure 5-539 Release one tab

4. Slightly flex the right side of the holder to release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the
holder away from the printer (callout 2).

Figure 5-540 Release one tab

672 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 5. Lift the holder up to release two alignment tabs on the bottom of the holder, and then remove the
holder.

Figure 5-541 Remove the holder

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 673

 Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP laser scanner assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP laser scanner assembly.

Mean time to repair: 18 minutes SFP, 40 minutes MFP

Service level: Medium SFP, Medium MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-42 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-2891-000CN Laser scanner assembly

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

674 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-542 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-543 Release the support shaft

2 1

Remove the cartridge door assembly 675

 2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-544 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-545 Remove the guide

1 2

676 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-546 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-547 Release the door

2 3

Remove the cartridge door assembly 677

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-548 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-549 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

678 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-550 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-551 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Remove the left cover 679

 Figure 5-552 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-553 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

680 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-554 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-555 Open the ISA

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 681
 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-556 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-557 Release two tabs

682 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-558 Remove the cover

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-559 Remove one screw

1
2

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 683
 6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-560 Disconnect two FFC

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-561 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

684 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-562 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-563 Raise the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only) 685
 2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-564 Remove the ISA FFC cover

7. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-565 Disconnect one cable

686 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-566 Remove the cover and cable

3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-567 Remove the FFC

8. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 687

 Figure 5-568 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-569 Release the tape

688 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-570 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-571 Release the ground wire

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 689

 5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-572 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-573 Remove the slider pin

690 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-574 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-575 Release the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 691

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-576 Remove the ISA

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-577 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

692 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-578 Remove the support arm

3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-579 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 693

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-580 Remove one screw

2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-581 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

694 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-582 Remove the cover

11. Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin)

Follow these steps to remove the paper delivery tray (output bin).

Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin) 695

 ■ Release one tab (callout 1), release two bosses (callout 2), and then remove the paper delivery tray
(output bin; callout 3).

Figure 5-583 Remove the cover

2 3

696 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

12. Remove the laser scanner assembly
Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly.

A SFP printer is shown in this section. However, the procedure is correct for all printer models.

1. Disconnect one flat-flexible cable (FFC) (callout 1), and one connector (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Transfer the antistatic foam pad (callout 2) from the discarded laser/scanner
assembly to the replacement assembly.

Figure 5-584 Disconnect one FFC and one connector

2. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the laser scanner assembly.

Figure 5-585 Remove the laser scanner

Remove the laser scanner assembly 697

 13. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter FFC

Learn how to remove and replace the formatter flat-flexible cable (FFC).

View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP formatter FFC.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP formatter FFC.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes SFP, 52 MFP

Service level: Medium SFP, Difficult MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

698 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Table 5-43 Part information

Part number Part description

RK2-6920-000CN Cable, flexible flat Frmtr to DCC (SFP)

RK2-6931-000CN Cable, flexible flat Frmtr to DCC (MFP)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● – Socket screwdriver 5.5 mm (.216 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-586 Remove the tray

Remove Tray 2 699

 2. Remove the cartridge door assembly
Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-587 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-588 Remove the support shaft

700 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-589 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-590 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 701

 Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-591 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-592 Release the left-side retainer arm

702 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-593 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-594 Remove one screw

1 1

Remove the left cover 703

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-595 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-596 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

704 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-597 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-598 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 705
 Figure 5-599 Open the ISA

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-600 Remove one screw

706 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-601 Release two tabs

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-602 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 707
 5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-603 Remove one screw

1
2

6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-604 Disconnect two FFC

708 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-605 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

Figure 5-606 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only) 709
 1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-607 Raise the ISA

2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-608 Remove the ISA FFC cover

7. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

710 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-609 Disconnect one cable

2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-610 Remove the cover and cable

Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only) 711
 3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-611 Remove the FFC

8. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

Figure 5-612 Disconnect three FFCs

712 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-613 Release the tape

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-614 Release the ground wire

1 3

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 713

 4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-615 Release the ground wire

5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-616 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

714 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-617 Remove the slider pin

7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-618 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 715

 8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-619 Release the ISA

9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-620 Remove the ISA

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

716 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-621 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

Figure 5-622 Remove the support arm

Remove the top cover (MFP) 717

 3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-623 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-624 Remove one screw

718 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-625 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

Figure 5-626 Remove the cover

11. Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only)
Follow these steps to remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only).

Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only) 719
 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-627 Remove the cable from the guide

2. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-628 Release one tab

720 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Lower the guide to release it from the formatter.

Figure 5-629 Lower the guide

4. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fax PCA and cable.

Figure 5-630 Remove three screws

12. Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 721

 ■ Carefully pull the TPM (callout 1) away from the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-631 Remove the TPM

1 1

13. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

1. Do one of the following:

● SFP: Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).

● MFP: Disconnect eight connectors (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Take note of any empty connectors before removing the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-632 SFP/MFP: Disconnect the connectors

722 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-633 Remove three screws

1
1

14. Remove the formatter bracket

Follow these steps to remove the formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness (callout 2) from the guide
(callout 3).

Figure 5-634 SFP/MFP: Remove the wire harness

3
3 2
2 1

Remove the formatter bracket 723

 2. Release the front edge (callout 1), and then rotate the wire guide up to remove it.

Figure 5-635 Remove the wire guide

3. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-636 Remove three screws

1 1

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Do one of the following:

● SFP: One screw is larger than the other screw. Make sure screws are installed in the correct
locations.

● MFP: These two screws are longer than the previous three screws.

724 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-637 Remove two screws

1 2

1
2

15. Remove the formatter FFC

Follow these steps to remove the formatter FFC.

1. Carefully pull up on the FFC (callout 1) to release it from the guide—the FFC is attached to the guide
with two-sided tape.

CAUTION: The FFC is still attached to the DC controller. Do not attempt to completely remove the
FFC.

Figure 5-638 Release the FFC

2. Disconnect and remove the formatter FFC (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: The FFC connector (callout 2) is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that uses a
hinged retainer to secure the FFC. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the FFC.

Remove the formatter FFC 725

 Figure 5-639 Disconnect and remove the formatter FFC

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: DC controller

Learn how to remove and replace the DC controller (DCC).

726 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP DCC.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP DCC.

Mean time to repair: 31 minutes SFP, 58 minutes MFP

Service level: Medium SFP, Difficult MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-44 Part information

Part number Part description

RM3-7584-000CN DC controller

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Remove Tray 2 727

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-640 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-641 Release the support shaft

2 1

728 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-642 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-643 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 729

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-644 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-645 Release the door

2 3

730 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-646 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-647 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

Remove the left cover 731

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-648 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-649 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

732 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-650 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-651 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 733

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-652 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-653 Open the ISA

734 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-654 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-655 Release two tabs

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 735
 4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-656 Remove the cover

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-657 Remove one screw

1
2

736 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-658 Disconnect two FFC

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-659 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 737
 Figure 5-660 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-661 Raise the ISA

738 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-662 Remove the ISA FFC cover

7. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-663 Disconnect one cable

Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only) 739
 2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-664 Remove the cover and cable

3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-665 Remove the FFC

8. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

740 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-666 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-667 Release the tape

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 741

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-668 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-669 Release the ground wire

742 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-670 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-671 Remove the slider pin

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 743

 7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-672 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-673 Release the ISA

744 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-674 Remove the ISA

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-675 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

Remove the top cover (MFP) 745

 Figure 5-676 Remove the support arm

3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-677 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

746 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-678 Remove one screw

2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-679 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 747

 Figure 5-680 Remove the cover

11. Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only)
Follow these steps to remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only).

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-681 Remove the cable from the guide

748 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-682 Release one tab

3. Lower the guide to release it from the formatter.

Figure 5-683 Lower the guide

Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only) 749
 4. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fax PCA and cable.

Figure 5-684 Remove three screws

12. Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

■ Carefully pull the TPM (callout 1) away from the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-685 Remove the TPM

1 1

13. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

1. Do one of the following:

● SFP: Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).

● MFP: Disconnect eight connectors (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Take note of any empty connectors before removing the formatter PCA.

750 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-686 SFP/MFP: Disconnect the connectors

2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-687 Remove three screws

1
1

14. Remove the formatter bracket

Follow these steps to remove the formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness (callout 2) from the guide
(callout 3).

Figure 5-688 SFP/MFP: Remove the wire harness

3
3 2
2 1

Remove the formatter bracket 751

 2. Release the front edge (callout 1), and then rotate the wire guide up to remove it.

Figure 5-689 Remove the wire guide

3. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-690 Remove three screws

1 1

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Do one of the following:

● SFP: One screw is larger than the other screw. Make sure screws are installed in the correct
locations.

● MFP: These two screws are longer than the previous three screws.

752 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-691 Remove two screws

1 2

1
2

15. Remove the DC controller

Follow these steps to remove the DC controller.

CAUTION: Replacement DC controller installations only: DO NOT skip this step. See for information
about how to pair a formatter and DC controller.

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and six connectors (callout 2).

IMPORTANT: One FFC (callout 3) is fastened to the guide with two sided tape. This FFC is removed
later in this procedure

Figure 5-692 Disconnect three FFCs and six connectors

2
3

Remove the DC controller 753

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-693 Remove two screws

3. Separate the DC controller from the printer.

CAUTION: Carefully pull up on the FFC (callout 1) to release it from the guide, and then remove the
DC controller.

Figure 5-694 Remove the DC controller

4. Disconnect and remove one FFC, and then install this FFC on the replacement DC controller.

IMPORTANT: The FFC connector is a Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connector that uses a hinged
retainer to secure the FFC. The hinged retainer must be opened to release the FFC.

754 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-695 Remove the FFC

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Connecting PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the connecting printed circuit assembly (PCA).

Unpack the replacement assembly 755

 View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP connecting PCA.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP connecting PCA.

Mean time to repair: 22 minutes SFP, 44 minutes MFP

Service level: Medium SFP, Medium MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-45 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7510-000CN Connecting PCA assembly (duplex)

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● – Socket screwdriver 5.5 mm (.216 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

756 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-696 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-697 Release the support shaft

2 1

Remove the cartridge door assembly 757

 2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-698 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-699 Remove the guide

1 2

758 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-700 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-701 Release the door

2 3

Remove the cartridge door assembly 759

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-702 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-703 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

760 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-704 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-705 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Remove the left cover 761

 Figure 5-706 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-707 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

762 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-708 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-709 Open the ISA

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 763
 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-710 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-711 Release two tabs

764 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-712 Remove the cover

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-713 Remove one screw

1
2

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 765
 6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-714 Disconnect two FFC

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-715 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

766 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-716 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-717 Raise the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only) 767
 2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-718 Remove the ISA FFC cover

7. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-719 Disconnect one cable

768 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-720 Remove the cover and cable

3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-721 Remove the FFC

8. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 769

 Figure 5-722 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-723 Release the tape

770 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-724 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-725 Release the ground wire

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 771

 5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-726 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-727 Remove the slider pin

772 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-728 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-729 Release the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 773

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-730 Remove the ISA

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-731 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

774 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-732 Remove the support arm

3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-733 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 775

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-734 Remove one screw

2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-735 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

776 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-736 Remove the cover

11. Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin)

Follow these steps to remove the paper delivery tray (output bin).

Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin) 777

 ■ Release one tab (callout 1), release two bosses (callout 2), and then remove the paper delivery tray
(output bin; callout 3).

Figure 5-737 Remove the cover

2 3

778 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

12. Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only)
Follow these steps to remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only).

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-738 Remove the cable from the guide

2. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-739 Release one tab

Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only) 779
 3. Lower the guide to release it from the formatter.

Figure 5-740 Lower the guide

4. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fax PCA and cable.

Figure 5-741 Remove three screws

13. Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

780 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Carefully pull the TPM (callout 1) away from the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-742 Remove the TPM

1 1

14. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

1. Do one of the following:

● SFP: Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).

● MFP: Disconnect eight connectors (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Take note of any empty connectors before removing the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-743 SFP/MFP: Disconnect the connectors

Remove the formatter PCA 781

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-744 Remove three screws

1
1

15. Remove the formatter bracket

Follow these steps to remove the formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness (callout 2) from the guide
(callout 3).

Figure 5-745 SFP/MFP: Remove the wire harness

3
3 2
2 1

782 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release the front edge (callout 1), and then rotate the wire guide up to remove it.

Figure 5-746 Remove the wire guide

3. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-747 Remove three screws

1 1

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Do one of the following:

● SFP: One screw is larger than the other screw. Make sure screws are installed in the correct
locations.

● MFP: These two screws are longer than the previous three screws.

Remove the formatter bracket 783

 Figure 5-748 Remove two screws

1 2

1
2

16. Remove the connecting PCA

Follow these steps to remove the connecting PCA.

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1) from the DC controller, and then release it from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-749 Disconnect one FFC

2. Disconnect nine connectors (callout 1).

TIP: Some of these connectors might be easier to disconnect if the wire harnesses are removed
from the guides.

784 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-750 Disconnect nine connectors

3. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-751 Remove one screw

Remove the connecting PCA 785

 4. Release two holders (callout 1), and then remove the connecting PCA (callout 2).

Figure 5-752 Remove the connecting PCA

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

786 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner FFC
Learn how to remove and replace the laser scanner flat-flexible cable (FFC).

View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP laser scanner FFC.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP laser scanner FFC.

Mean time to repair: 19 minutes SFP, 41 minutes MFP

Service level: Medium SFP, Medium MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-46 Part information

Part number Part description

Not orderable Laser scanner FFC

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

● – Socket screwdriver 5.5 mm (.216 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner FFC 787

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-753 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-754 Release the support shaft

2 1

788 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-755 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-756 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 789

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-757 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-758 Release the door

2 3

790 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-759 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-760 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

Remove the left cover 791

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-761 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-762 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

792 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-763 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-764 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 793

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-765 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-766 Open the ISA

794 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-767 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-768 Release two tabs

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 795
 4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-769 Remove the cover

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-770 Remove one screw

1
2

796 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-771 Disconnect two FFC

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-772 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 797
 Figure 5-773 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-774 Raise the ISA

798 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-775 Remove the ISA FFC cover

7. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-776 Disconnect one cable

Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only) 799
 2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-777 Remove the cover and cable

3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-778 Remove the FFC

8. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

800 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-779 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-780 Release the tape

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 801

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-781 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-782 Release the ground wire

802 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-783 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-784 Remove the slider pin

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 803

 7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-785 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-786 Release the ISA

804 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-787 Remove the ISA

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-788 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

Remove the top cover (MFP) 805

 Figure 5-789 Remove the support arm

3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-790 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

806 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-791 Remove one screw

2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-792 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 807

 Figure 5-793 Remove the cover

11. Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin)

Follow these steps to remove the paper delivery tray (output bin).

808 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

■ Release one tab (callout 1), release two bosses (callout 2), and then remove the paper delivery tray
(output bin; callout 3).

Figure 5-794 Remove the cover

2 3

Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin) 809

 12. Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only)
Follow these steps to remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only).

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-795 Remove the cable from the guide

2. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-796 Release one tab

810 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. Lower the guide to release it from the formatter.

Figure 5-797 Lower the guide

4. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fax PCA and cable.

Figure 5-798 Remove three screws

13. Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 811

 ■ Carefully pull the TPM (callout 1) away from the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-799 Remove the TPM

1 1

14. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

1. Do one of the following:

● SFP: Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).

● MFP: Disconnect eight connectors (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Take note of any empty connectors before removing the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-800 SFP/MFP: Disconnect the connectors

812 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-801 Remove three screws

1
1

15. Remove the formatter bracket

Follow these steps to remove the formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness (callout 2) from the guide
(callout 3).

Figure 5-802 SFP/MFP: Remove the wire harness

3
3 2
2 1

Remove the formatter bracket 813

 2. Release the front edge (callout 1), and then rotate the wire guide up to remove it.

Figure 5-803 Remove the wire guide

3. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-804 Remove three screws

1 1

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Do one of the following:

● SFP: One screw is larger than the other screw. Make sure screws are installed in the correct
locations.

● MFP: These two screws are longer than the previous three screws.

814 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-805 Remove two screws

1 2

1
2

16. Remove the tag-cable assembly (toner-cartridge memory)

Follow these steps to remove the tag-cable assembly (toner-cartridge memory).

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-806 Disconnect one connector

Remove the tag-cable assembly (toner-cartridge memory) 815

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-807 Remove one screw

3. Remove the tag-cable assembly.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the assembly is flat against the chassis. If the assembly is not
correctly installed, it might not make proper contact with the toner cartridge.

Figure 5-808 Remove the tag-cable assembly

17. Remove the laser scanner FFC

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner FFC.

816 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release it from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-809 Disconnect one FFC

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2).

Figure 5-810 Remove one screw and the sheet-metal plate

Remove the laser scanner FFC 817

 3. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-811 Disconnect one FFC

4. Slightly flex the holder (callout 1), and then release the FFC ferrite (callout 2).

Figure 5-812 Release the ferrite

1 1

5. Remove the FFC.

Reinstallation tip: Install the ferrite on the replacement FFC.

818 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-813 Remove the FFC

18. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply

Learn how to remove and replace the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).

Unpack the replacement assembly 819

 View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP HVPS.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP HVPS.

Mean time to repair: 28 minutes SFP, 55 minutes MFP

Service level: Medium SFP, Difficult MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-47 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-7508-000CN High-voltage power supply PCA

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

820 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-814 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-815 Release the support shaft

2 1

Remove the cartridge door assembly 821

 2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-816 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-817 Remove the guide

1 2

822 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-818 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-819 Release the door

2 3

Remove the cartridge door assembly 823

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-820 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-821 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

824 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-822 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-823 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Remove the left cover 825

 Figure 5-824 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-825 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

826 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-826 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-827 Open the ISA

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 827
 2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-828 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-829 Release two tabs

828 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-830 Remove the cover

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-831 Remove one screw

1
2

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 829
 6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-832 Disconnect two FFC

7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-833 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

830 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-834 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-835 Raise the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only) 831
 2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-836 Remove the ISA FFC cover

7. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-837 Disconnect one cable

832 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-838 Remove the cover and cable

3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-839 Remove the FFC

8. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 833

 Figure 5-840 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-841 Release the tape

834 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-842 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-843 Release the ground wire

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 835

 5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-844 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-845 Remove the slider pin

836 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-846 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-847 Release the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 837

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-848 Remove the ISA

9. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-849 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

838 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-850 Remove the support arm

3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-851 Remove the top cover

1 2

10. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 839

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-852 Remove one screw

2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-853 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

840 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-854 Remove the cover

11. Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only)
Follow these steps to remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only).

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-855 Remove the cable from the guide

Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only) 841
 2. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-856 Release one tab

3. Lower the guide to release it from the formatter.

Figure 5-857 Lower the guide

842 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 4. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fax PCA and cable.

Figure 5-858 Remove three screws

12. Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

■ Carefully pull the TPM (callout 1) away from the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-859 Remove the TPM

1 1

13. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

1. Do one of the following:

● SFP: Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).

● MFP: Disconnect eight connectors (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Take note of any empty connectors before removing the formatter PCA.

Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 843

 Figure 5-860 SFP/MFP: Disconnect the connectors

2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-861 Remove three screws

1
1

14. Remove the formatter bracket

Follow these steps to remove the formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness (callout 2) from the guide
(callout 3).

Figure 5-862 SFP/MFP: Remove the wire harness

3
3 2
2 1

844 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release the front edge (callout 1), and then rotate the wire guide up to remove it.

Figure 5-863 Remove the wire guide

3. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-864 Remove three screws

1 1

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Do one of the following:

● SFP: One screw is larger than the other screw. Make sure screws are installed in the correct
locations.

● MFP: These two screws are longer than the previous three screws.

Remove the formatter bracket 845

 Figure 5-865 Remove two screws

1 2

1
2

15. Remove the HVPS

Follow these steps to remove the HVPS.

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1) on the DC controller, and then release it from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-866 Disconnect one FFC

846 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-867 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-868 Remove two screws

Remove the HVPS 847

 4. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the HVPS away from the printer.

Figure 5-869 Release one tab

5. Slide the HVPS up and away from the holder to remove it.

Figure 5-870 Remove the HVPS

TIP: For reinstallation, the loop on the end of the springs needs to fit into the slots on the bottom
of the board. When properly installed, the springs will touch the metal contacts on back side of the
HVPS PCA.

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

848 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply

Learn how to remove and replace the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).

View a video of how to remove and replace the SFP LVPS.

View a video of how to remove and replace the MFP LVPS.

Mean time to repair: 34 minutes SFP, 61 minutes MFP

Service level: Medium SFP, Difficult MFP

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-48 Part information

Part number Part description

RM3-7417-000CN LV power supply PCA (110-127V)

RM3-7418-000CN LV power supply PCA (220-240V)

Removal and replacement: Low-voltage power supply 849

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-871 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

850 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-872 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-873 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 851

 Figure 5-874 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-875 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

852 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-876 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-877 Release the left-side retainer arm

Remove the cartridge door assembly 853

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-878 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-879 Remove one screw

1 1

854 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-880 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-881 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Remove the right cover 855

 Figure 5-882 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-883 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

856 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-884 Open the ISA

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-885 Remove one screw

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 857
 3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-886 Release two tabs

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-887 Remove the cover

858 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-888 Remove one screw

1
2

6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-889 Disconnect two FFC

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 859
 7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-890 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

Figure 5-891 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

6. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

860 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-892 Raise the ISA

2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-893 Remove the ISA FFC cover

7. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only).

NOTE: MFP models only. The integrated scanner assembly (ISA) includes the sub-scanner assembly
(SSA) and the automatic document feeder (ADF).

1. Disconnect three FFCs (callout 1), and then remove the ferrite (callout 2) from the holder.

CAUTION: The ferrite is not captive on the FFC. Do not lose the ferrite while handling the ISA.

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 861

 Figure 5-894 Disconnect three FFCs

2. Release the tape (callout 1) that holds the flat cables to the top cover.

Figure 5-895 Release the tape

862 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release the ground wire (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-896 Release the ground wire

1 3

4. Release the ground wire (callout 1) from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-897 Release the ground wire

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 863

 5. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the ISA slider pin (callout 2) towards the front of the
printer to release it.

Figure 5-898 Release one tab and rotate the slider pin

6. Remove the slider pin.

Reinstallation tip: Align the keyed portion of the locking pin with the slot and hole in the support
arm.

Figure 5-899 Remove the slider pin

864 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-900 Rotate the ISA towards the rear of the printer

8. Slide the ISA as shown to release it.

Figure 5-901 Release the ISA

Remove the integrated scanner assembly (MFP only) 865

 9. Remove the ISA.

Figure 5-902 Remove the ISA

8. Remove the top cover (MFP)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (MFP).

1. Release the USB cable (callout 1) from the cable guide.

Figure 5-903 Release the USB cable

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the support arm (callout 2).

CAUTION: The support arm is spring loaded and can unexpectedly spring into the open position.
To avoid injury, do not place a finger in the screw well when the support arm is in the closed
position.

866 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-904 Remove the support arm

3. Remove five screws (callout 1), release three bosses (callout 2), and then remove the top cover
(callout 3).

Figure 5-905 Remove the top cover

1 2

9. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

Remove the top cover (SFP only) 867

 1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-906 Remove one screw

2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-907 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

868 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-908 Remove the cover

10. Remove the fan (FM1)

Follow these steps to remove the fan (FM1).

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from the retainer (callout
2).

Figure 5-909 Disconnect one connector

Remove the fan (FM1) 869

 2. Release two tabs (callout 1).

Figure 5-910 Release two tabs

3. Remove the fan.

Reinstallation tip: The fan must be correctly installed so that air is drawn into the printer. Make
sure that the two arrows embossed on the right-side of the fan body—which indicate air flow
direction—face upward and into the printer.

Figure 5-911 Remove the fan

11. Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only)
Follow these steps to remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only).

870 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the cable from the guide (callout 2).

Figure 5-912 Remove the cable from the guide

2. Release one tab (callout 1).

Figure 5-913 Release one tab

Remove the fax cable guide and fax PCA (fax models only) 871
 3. Lower the guide to release it from the formatter.

Figure 5-914 Lower the guide

4. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the fax PCA and cable.

Figure 5-915 Remove three screws

12. Remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Follow these steps to remove the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).

872 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Carefully pull the TPM (callout 1) away from the formatter to remove it.

Figure 5-916 Remove the TPM

1 1

13. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

1. Do one of the following:

● SFP: Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).

● MFP: Disconnect eight connectors (callout 1).

IMPORTANT: Take note of any empty connectors before removing the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-917 SFP/MFP: Disconnect the connectors

Remove the formatter PCA 873

 2. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter PCA.

Figure 5-918 Remove three screws

1
1

14. Remove the formatter bracket

Follow these steps to remove the formatter bracket.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness (callout 2) from the guide
(callout 3).

Figure 5-919 SFP/MFP: Remove the wire harness

3
3 2
2 1

874 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Release the front edge (callout 1), and then rotate the wire guide up to remove it.

Figure 5-920 Remove the wire guide

3. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-921 Remove three screws

1 1

4. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the formatter bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Do one of the following:

● SFP: One screw is larger than the other screw. Make sure screws are installed in the correct
locations.

● MFP: These two screws are longer than the previous three screws.

Remove the formatter bracket 875

 Figure 5-922 Remove two screws

1 2

1
2

15. Remove the LVPS

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1) on the LVPS, and then release the wire harnesses from the
guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-923 Disconnect two connectors

876 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-924 Remove one screw

3. Release one tab at the top-left side of the fan holder (callout 1), and then rotate the top-left side
corner of the holder away from the printer.

Reinstallation tip: Use a flat blade screwdriver to slightly flex the top of the holder down to make it
easier to disengage this tab.

Figure 5-925 Release one tab

Remove the LVPS 877

 4. Slightly flex the right side of the holder to release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the
holder away from the printer (calout 2).

Figure 5-926 Release one tab

5. Lift the holder up to release two alignment tabs on the bottom of the holder, and then remove the
holder.

Figure 5-927 Remove the holder

878 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

6. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-928 Remove three screws

7. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-929 Remove two screws

Remove the LVPS 879

 8. Rotate the bottom of the LVPS away from the printer, and then remove the LVPS.

Figure 5-930 Remove the LVPS

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

880 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Control-panel assembly (SFP)
Learn how to remove and replace the control-panel assembly (SPF).

View a video of how to remove and replace the control-panel assembly

Mean time to repair: 19 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-49 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-2959-000CN Control panel kypd/FFC assembly

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

Removal and replacement: Control-panel assembly (SFP) 881

 ■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-931 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-932 Release the support shaft

2 1

882 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-933 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

Figure 5-934 Remove the guide

1 2

Remove the cartridge door assembly 883

 4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-935 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Figure 5-936 Release the door

2 3

884 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-937 Release the left-side retainer arm

7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-938 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

Remove the left cover 885

 1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-939 Remove one screw

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-940 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

886 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-941 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

Figure 5-942 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

Remove the right cover 887

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-943 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the top cover (SFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (SFP only).

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 5-944 Remove one screw

888 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. At the right side of the printer, release the one boss (callout 1), and then release one tab (callout 2).

Figure 5-945 Release one boss and one tab

1 2

3. Starting at the front of the printer, lift the cover to release two tabs (callout 1), release two tabs
along the center of the cover (callout 2), and then release four bosses (callout 3) to remove the top
cover.

TIP: Open the rear door to make releasing the bosses (callout 3) easier.

Figure 5-946 Remove the cover

6. Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin)

Follow these steps to remove the paper delivery tray (output bin).

Remove the paper delivery tray (output bin) 889

 ■ Release one tab (callout 1), release two bosses (callout 2), and then remove the paper delivery tray
(output bin; callout 3).

Figure 5-947 Remove the cover

2 3

890 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

7. Remove the control-panel assembly (SFP)
Follow these steps to remove the control-panel assembly (SFP).

1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then remove the FFC (callout 2) from the guide (callout 3).

Figure 5-948 Remove the FFC from the guide

2. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-949 Remove two screws

Remove the control-panel assembly (SFP) 891

 3. Lift the back edge of the control panel assembly (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear of the
printer to remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-950 Remove the control panel assembly

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

892 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Control panel assembly (MFP) and control panel sub
assemblies
Learn how to remove and replace the control panel assembly (MFP).

View a video of how to remove and replace the control-panel assembly.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-50 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67901 Control panel assembly

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Removal and replacement: Control panel assembly (MFP) and control panel sub assemblies 893
 Figure 5-951 Open the ISA

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-952 Remove one screw

894 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-953 Release two tabs

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-954 Remove the cover

Remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only) 895

 5. Remove the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-955 Remove the cover

2. Remove the control panel (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel (MFP only).

1. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-956 Remove one screw

1
2

896 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Lift the latch to disconnect one FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-957 Disconnect one flat cable

3. Slide the control panel assembly to the right.

Figure 5-958 Slide the control panel display

Remove the control panel (MFP only) 897

 4. Rotate the assembly toward the front of the printer, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 5-959 Remove the control-panel assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

898 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Install the control panel assembly.

■ When installing the MFP control panel assembly, align the hinge pins (callout 1) on the assembly with
the hinge guides (callout 2) on the control panel base, and then align the grooves (callout 3) on the
control panel assembly with the teeth (callout 4) on the gear on the control panel base.

Figure 5-960 Install the control panel assembly

3
4
1

Removal and replacement: Control panel interconnect board (MFP)

Learn how to remove and replace the MFP control panel interconnect board (ICB).

View a video of how to remove and replace the control panel ICB.

Mean time to repair: 4 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-51 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67903 CP interconnect board and ground clip kit

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 899

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-961 Open the ISA

900 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-962 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-963 Release two tabs

Remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only) 901

 4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-964 Remove the cover

5. Remove the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-965 Remove the cover

2. Remove the control panel interconnect board (ICB)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel interconnect board (ICB).

902 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-966 Remove one screw

1
2

2. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-967 Disconnect two FFC

Remove the control panel interconnect board (ICB) 903

 3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the ICB.

Figure 5-968 Remove the ICB

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

904 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Install the control panel assembly.

■ When installing the MFP control panel assembly, align the hinge pins (callout 1) on the assembly with
the hinge guides (callout 2) on the control panel base, and then align the grooves (callout 3) on the
control panel assembly with the teeth (callout 4) on the gear on the control panel base.

Figure 5-969 Install the control panel assembly

3
4
1

Removal and replacement: Control panel mount base and interconnect board
chassis (MFP)
Learn how to remove and replace the MFP control panel mount base and the interconnect board (ICB)
chassis mount.

View a video of how to remove and replace the control panel mount base and the ICB chassis
mount.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Easy

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 905

 Table 5-52 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67904 Control panel ICB chassis mount

3PZ55-67984 Control panel mount base

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

Figure 5-970 Open the ISA

906 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-971 Remove one screw

3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-972 Release two tabs

Remove the control panel mount cover (MFP only) 907

 4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-973 Remove the cover

5. Remove the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-974 Remove the cover

2. Remove the control panel (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel (MFP only).

908 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-975 Remove one screw

1
2

2. Lift the latch to disconnect one FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-976 Disconnect one flat cable

Remove the control panel (MFP only) 909

 3. Slide the control panel assembly to the right.

Figure 5-977 Slide the control panel display

4. Rotate the assembly toward the front of the printer, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 5-978 Remove the control-panel assembly

3. Remove the control panel mount base (MFP only)

Follow these steps to remove the control panel mount base (MFP only).

910 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

1. Release one connector (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the interconnect
board (ICB) (callout 3).

Figure 5-979 Remove the ICB

2. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-980 Remove two screws

3. Lift the control panel mount base to remove it.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the flat cables and release them through the opening in the mount
base.

Remove the control panel mount base (MFP only) 911

 Figure 5-981 Remove control panel mount base

4. Slide the chassis mount assembly toward the back of the control panel base to release it from four
bosses.

Figure 5-982 Release the chassis mount assembly

912 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 5. Separate the chassis mount assembly (callout 1) from the mount base (callout 2).

Figure 5-983 Remove the chassis mount assembly

2
1

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 913

 5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Install the control panel assembly.

■ When installing the MFP control panel assembly, align the hinge pins (callout 1) on the assembly with
the hinge guides (callout 2) on the control panel base, and then align the grooves (callout 3) on the
control panel assembly with the teeth (callout 4) on the gear on the control panel base.

Figure 5-984 Install the control panel assembly

3
4
1

Removal and replacement: Control panel cable and cable cover (MFP)
Learn how to remove and replace the MFP control panel cable and cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the control panel cable and cover.

Mean time to repair: 19 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-53 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67910 Cable, flexible flat control panel to frmtr

914 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Table 5-53 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

3PZ55-67905 Cover, control-panel FFC

Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-985 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

Remove Tray 2 915

 NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-986 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-987 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

916 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-988 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-989 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 917

 Figure 5-990 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-991 Release the left-side retainer arm

918 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-992 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-993 Remove one screw

1 1

Remove the left cover 919

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-994 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-995 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only).

1. Open the integrated scanner assembly (ISA).

NOTE: The ISA might already have been removed. If so, skip ISA related steps.

If the control panel is not fully tilted forward, tilt it forward now until it stops.

920 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-996 Open the ISA

2. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-997 Remove one screw

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 921
 3. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the control-panel mount cover.

Figure 5-998 Release two tabs

4. Rotate the control-panel mount cover up towards the control panel to release it, and then remove
the cover.

Figure 5-999 Remove the cover

922 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

5. Remove one grounding screw (callout 1), and then move the ground cable (callout 2) out of the way.

Figure 5-1000 Remove one screw

1
2

6. Disconnect two FFC (callout 1).

Figure 5-1001 Disconnect two FFC

Remove the control panel display and mount base (MFP only) 923
 7. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the interconnect board (ICB).

Figure 5-1002 Remove the ICB

8. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then lift the control panel display and mount base together to
remove them.

CAUTION: Carefully unfold the FFC and release it through the opening in the mount base.

Figure 5-1003 Remove two screws and remove the control panel assembly

5. Remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the integrated scanner assembly (ISA) FFC cover (MFP only).

924 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. If the ISA is not already raised, raise it now.

Figure 5-1004 Raise the ISA

2. Release the tab (callout 1), rotate the front edge of the cover up (callout 2), and then slide it toward
the front of the printer to remove it (callout 3).

Figure 5-1005 Remove the ISA FFC cover

6. Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only)
Follow these steps to remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only).

Remove the control panel flat cable and cover (MFP only) 925
 1. Disconnect one FFC (callout 1), and then release the cable from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 5-1006 Disconnect one cable

2. Lift up the control-panel FFC cover to remove the cover and cable.

Figure 5-1007 Remove the cover and cable

926 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 3. If you are replacing the FFC or the cover, remove the FFC (callout 1) from the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-1008 Remove the FFC

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 927

 8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Install the control panel assembly.

■ When installing the MFP control panel assembly, align the hinge pins (callout 1) on the assembly with
the hinge guides (callout 2) on the control panel base, and then align the grooves (callout 3) on the
control panel assembly with the teeth (callout 4) on the gear on the control panel base.

Figure 5-1009 Install the control panel assembly

3
4
1

Removal and replacement: RM2-5375-000CN Tray 2 sensor assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 2 sensor assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 2 sensor assembly.

Mean time to repair: 22 minutes

Service level: Medium

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-54 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5375-000CN Tray 2 sensor assembly

928 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Required tools
● Small flat-blade screwdriver

● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that toner toner-cartridge door correctly opens and closes.

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

1. Remove Tray 2
Follow these steps to remove Tray 2.

■ Pull the tray straight out of the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1010 Remove the tray

2. Remove the cartridge door assembly

Follow these steps to remove the cartridge door assembly.

NOTE: If the toner cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the printer, remove it now.

1. Release the support shaft (callout 1), and then slide it toward the center of the door (callout 2).

TIP: It might be easier to release the support shaft by using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Remove Tray 2 929

 Reinstallation tip: Make sure that the support shaft is fully installed and correctly orientated so
that it does not interfere with the door opening and closing.

Figure 5-1011 Release the support shaft

2 1

2. Remove the support shaft.

Figure 5-1012 Remove the support shaft

3. Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the guide out of the printer (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful, the tab (callout 1) can be easily broken.

930 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1013 Remove the guide

1 2

4. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to gently pry the white-plastic door arm (callout 1) off of the
gray-plastic pressure-release link (callout 2) to release the door arm.

Figure 5-1014 Release the pressure-release link

5. With the door in the partially closed position, slightly raise the left end (callout 1; raise it over the
sheet-metal hinge boss), and then slide the door to the left (callout 2) to release the right hinge
(callout 3).

CAUTION: The door is still attached to the printer by the left-side retainer arm. Do not attempt to
completely remove the door.

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalling the door, there are two right-side hinge pins (not shown in
callout 3). Keep a finger pressed on the left-side retainer arm so that it does not disengage from the
door.

Remove the cartridge door assembly 931

 Figure 5-1015 Release the door

2 3

6. Rotate the door away from the printer until the keyed pin on the left-side retainer arm can
disengage from the door.

Figure 5-1016 Release the left-side retainer arm

932 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 7. Remove the door.

Figure 5-1017 Remove the door

3. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

NOTE: If installed, the rear USB cover and network cover must be removed.

1. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1018 Remove one screw

1 1

Remove the left cover 933

 2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Figure 5-1019 Release two bosses and three tabs

2
2

1
1

3. At the front of the printer, do one of the following:

● SFP: Release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

● MFP: Release one tab (callout 3), two bosses (callout 4), and then remove the cover (callout 5).

CAUTION: Be careful when releasing the upper bosses on the SFP cover. One portion of the
cover (callout 6) is fragile and is easily broken.

Figure 5-1020 Remove the cover

5 6
1 4

4. Remove the right cover

Follow these steps to remove the right cover.

1. At the front of the printer, release two bosses (callout 1), and then release three tabs (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: Remove, and then reinstall the cover if the switch or button does not correctly
function.

934 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Figure 5-1021 Release two bosses and three tabs

2 2

1 1

2. Open the rear door, release two bosses (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 5-1022 Remove the cover

2
2
1 1

5. Remove the Tray 2 sensor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 2 sensor assembly.

1. Grasp the white flanges on the Tray 1 pickup roller shaft, and then rotate the shaft clockwise (up to
90 degrees) to access the roller holder locking lever

Reinstallation tip: Take note of the original roller position. When the roller is reinstalled, make sure
to return the roller to its original position.

Remove the Tray 2 sensor assembly 935

 Figure 5-1023 Rotate the Tray 1 pickup roller shaft

2. Raise the jam access door (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the roller and holder
as shown (callout 3) to move it out of the way.

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

Figure 5-1024 Slide the roller and holder out of the way

2 3

936 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Remove the Tray 1 separation pad (callout 1).

Figure 5-1025 Remove the Tray 1 separation pad

4. Do the following:

a. Remove four screws (callout 1/2/3/4).

IMPORTANT: When the stay is reinstalled, make sure that the screws are installed in the
correct order (callout 1/2/3/4 in order).

b. Release two hooks (callout 5), and then remove the front stay (callout 6).

Reinstallation tip: When reinstalled, the bosses (callout 7) must engage the holes in the stay.
Make sure that the stay is not positioned on top of the bosses.

Figure 5-1026 Remove the front stay

9
6

1 3 4 8 2

Remove the Tray 2 sensor assembly 937

 5. Rotate each spring (callout 1) down, and then unhook the springs from the hooks (callout 2).

Figure 5-1027 Remove the springs (1 of 2)

2
2
2

1
1
1

Figure 5-1028 Remove the springs (2 of 2)

1 1

2 2

938 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

6. Remove two screws (M4 tapping; callout 1), and then release two bosses (callout 2).

Figure 5-1029 Remove two screw and release two bosses

7. Separate the Tray 1 pickup assembly (callout 1) from the printer (as shown below).

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. The assembly is still connected to
the printer by a wire harness (callout 2).

Figure 5-1030 Separate the Tray 1 pickup assembly from the printer

2
2

Remove the Tray 2 sensor assembly 939

 8. Slightly flex the pickup guide (callout 1) to release the left-side and right side bosses (callout 2), and
then remove the pickup guide.

Figure 5-1031 Remove the pickup guide

1 2

9. Remove one screw (callout 1), release two bosses (callout 2), and then remove the guide and sensor
lever (callout 2) assembly.

Figure 5-1032 Remove the guide and sensor lever assembly

1 3 2

10. Slide the sensor lever (callout 1) as shown, and then remove it from the guide (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: After reinstalling the guide and lever assembly on the printer, check the
following:

● Verify that the sensor lever (callout 1) returns to the home position when the lever is manually
moved to the forward position and released (sensor lever spring return; callout 3).

940 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ● Verify that the sensor lever (callout 1) returns to the home position when the lever is manually
moved to the rear position and released (sensor lever weight return; callout 4).

If the sensor lever does not return to the home position, remove the guide and lever assembly, and
then remove and reinstall the lever.

Figure 5-1033 Remove the sensor lever

1
1
4

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 941

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Input device - 550-sheet paper feeder

Learn how to remove and replace the 550-sheet paper feeder parts and assemblies.

Removal and replacement: D9P29-67018 optional 550-sheet paper feeder

Learn how to remove and replace the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-55 Part information

Part number Part description

D9P29-67018 550-sheet paper feeder

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove the optional 550-sheet feeder Tray 3

Follow these steps to remove the optional 550-sheet feeder Tray 3.

942 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 ■ Carefully lift the printer off of the paper feeder assembly.

Figure 5-1034 Remove the printer

2. Remove the accessory from its package

Follow these steps to remove the accessory from its package.

1. Save all packaging for recycling.

2. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

3. Install the optional 550-sheet feeder Tray 3

Follow these steps to install the optional 550-sheet feeder Tray 3.

Remove the accessory from its package 943

 1. Remove the orange shipping tape.

Figure 5-1035 Remove shipping tape

2. Carefully place the printer on the paper feeder assembly.

Figure 5-1036 Install the printer

944 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

3. Pull Tray 3 out of the paper feeder assembly to remove it.

Figure 5-1037 Remove Tray 3

HEW
LETT
-PACK
ARD

4. Adjust the Tray 3 sliding paper guides.

Figure 5-1038 Adjust the paper guides

Install the optional 550-sheet feeder Tray 3 945

 5. Load paper in Tray 3.

Figure 5-1039 Load paper

6. Slide Tray 3 into the paper feeder assembly to install it.

Figure 5-1040 Install Tray 3

Removal and replacement: RM2-5413-000CN optional Tray 3 cassette

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 3 cassette.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 3 cassette.

946 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-56 Part information

Part number Part description

RM2-5413-000CN Tray 3

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to remove optional Tray 3.

Remove optional Tray 3 947

 1. Pull the tray straight out of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-1041 Pull the tray out of the printer

2. Slightly lift up on the front of the tray to release it, and then continue to pull the tray out of the
accessory to remove it.

Figure 5-1042 Release and remove the tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

948 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Install optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to install optional Tray 3.

1. With the tray at a slight angle, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the accessory, and then
partially slide the tray into the accessory.

Figure 5-1043 Install the tray

Install optional Tray 3 949

 2. Push the tray straight into the accessory to close it

Figure 5-1044 Close the tray

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67968 optional Tray 3 paper pickup roller

assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 3 pickup roller.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-57 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67968 Tray pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

950 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to remove optional Tray 3.

1. Pull the tray straight out of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-1045 Pull the tray out of the printer

Remove optional Tray 3 951

 2. Slightly lift up on the front of the tray to release it, and then continue to pull the tray out of the
accessory to remove it.

Figure 5-1046 Release and remove the tray

2. Remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Follow these steps to remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

1. Carefully turn the accessory over to expose the roller assembly.

Figure 5-1047 Turn the accessory over

952 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Slide the roller holder to the right to compress the spring-loaded shaft and release the assembly.

Figure 5-1048 Release the roller assembly

3. Rotate the end of the assembly up and away from the accessory.

Figure 5-1049 Rotate the assembly up

Remove the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 953

 4. Remove the roller assembly.

Figure 5-1050 Remove the roller assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

954 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

4. Install the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3)
Follow these steps to install the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

CAUTION: Do not touch the spongy portion of the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause paper
handling problems. HP recommends washing your hands before handling the assembly.

1. Install the right end of the assembly on the spring-loaded shaft (callout 1), and then slide it to the
right to compress the shaft (callout 2).

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the pin on the back of the holder (callout 3) is inserted in the slot
(callout 4) in the lever arm. If the pin is not correctly installed, the accessory will not pick paper.

Figure 5-1051 Install the roller assembly

2
3

Install the pickup roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 955

 2. Rotate the left end of the assembly down and into place (callout 1), and then slide the assembly to
the left (callout 2) to engage the drive end of the assembly with the drive shaft (callout 3).

Figure 5-1052 Engage the assembly

3. Push down and then release the tray-roller actuator (callout 1) and observe the roller assembly. It
should move up and down (callout 2) in response to the actuator.

NOTE: If it does not, remove the roller assembly and reinstall it making sure that the pin on the
back of the assembly is in the lever arm. See the previous steps in this section.

Figure 5-1053 Check the installation

2
1

5. Install optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to install optional Tray 3.

956 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. With the tray at a slight angle, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the accessory, and then
partially slide the tray into the accessory.

Figure 5-1054 Install the tray

2. Push the tray straight into the accessory to close it

Figure 5-1055 Close the tray

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67967 optional Tray 3 separation roller

assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 3 separation roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 3 separation roller.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Removal and replacement: 3PZ15-67967 optional Tray 3 separation roller assembly 957
 Service level: CSR A

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cord before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 5-58 Part information

Part number Part description

3PZ15-67967 Tray 3 Separation Pad

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to make sure the printer is functioning correctly.

1. Remove optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to remove optional Tray 3.

958 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 1. Pull the tray straight out of the printer until it stops.

Figure 5-1056 Pull the tray out of the printer

2. Slightly lift up on the front of the tray to release it, and then continue to pull the tray out of the
accessory to remove it.

Figure 5-1057 Release and remove the tray

2. Remove the separation roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Follow these steps to remove the separation roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

Remove the separation roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 959

 1. Press the locking lever (callout 1), and then pull the separation roller assembly straight up to release
it.

Figure 5-1058 Release the assembly

1
2. Remove the assembly.

Figure 5-1059 Remove the assembly

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

960 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available,
touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive
assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out
of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Install the separation pad roller assembly (optional Tray 3)

Follow these steps to install the separation pad roller assembly (optional Tray 3).

1. Install the assembly in the slots in the cassette.

Figure 5-1060 Install the assembly (1 of 2)

Install the separation pad roller assembly (optional Tray 3) 961

 2. Push the separation roller assembly straight down until it snaps into place.

Figure 5-1061 Install the assembly (2 of 2)

5. Install optional Tray 3

Follow these steps to install optional Tray 3.

1. With the tray at a slight angle, align the sides of the tray with the rails in the accessory, and then
partially slide the tray into the accessory.

Figure 5-1062 Install the tray

962 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement

2. Push the tray straight into the accessory to close it

Figure 5-1063 Close the tray

Install optional Tray 3 963

964
6 Parts and diagrams

Printer parts information including exploded assembly diagrams and part number lists.

HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based
Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners

1. Select Services & Support (near the top of the screen).

2. Under Services Delivery, select Technical Support.

3. Select Technical Documentation.

Find information about the following topics

● Service manuals

● Service advisories

● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Install and configure

● Printer specifications

● Warranty and regulatory information

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

Parts and diagrams 965

 ● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 6-1 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

966 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

 Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

Supplies and accessories

Learn about the supplies and accessories that are available for the printer.

To order cartridges, visit http://www.hp.com (some portions of the HP Web site are available in English
only). Ordering cartridges online is not supported in all countries/regions. However, many countries/
regions have information about ordering by telephone, locating a local store, and printing a shopping list.
In addition, go to hp.com/supplies to obtain information about purchasing HP products in your country/
region.

Use only the replacement cartridges that have the same cartridge number as the cartridge that is being
replaced. Find the cartridge number in the following places:

● On the label of the cartridge that is being replaced.

● On a sticker inside the printer. Open the cartridge door to locate the sticker.

● Open the printer software (HP Printer Assistant), and then click Shop > Shop For Supplies Online.

● Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS), and then click Tools > Supply Status (under the Product
Information item).

Table 6-2 Supplies part numbers

Item Description Part number (service) Product number

(new)

Toner cartridge HP 58A Black Original CF258-67901 CF258A

LaserJet toner cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 59A Black Original CF259-67901 CF259A

LaserJet toner cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 76A Black Original CF276-67901 CF276A

LaserJet toner cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 77A Black Original CF277-67901 CF277A

LaserJet toner cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 58X High Yield Black CF258-67902 CF258X

Original LaserJet toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 59X High Yield Black CF259-67902 CF259X

Original LaserJet toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 76X High Yield Black CF276-67902 CF276X

Original LaserJet toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge HP 77X High Yield Black CF277-67902 CF277X

Original LaserJet toner
cartridge

Toner cartridge Black, managed toner 3PZ35-67901 W9024MC

cartridge

Supplies and accessories 967

 Table 6-3 Accessories

Description Part number (service) Product number

550-sheet paper feeder D9P29-67018 D9P29A

HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless 3JN69-61001 3JN69A

accessory

HP Accessibility Kit 2TD64-61001 2TD64A

HP Accessibility Assistant 2MU47-61001 2MU47A

Locking Tray Guides (managed printers only) 3PZ15-67909 NA

HP Jetdirect LAN Accessory Module 5851-8004 8FP31A

Customer self-repair parts

Learn about printer customer self-repair parts.

Customer self-repair (CSR) parts are available for many HP LaserJet printers to reduce repair time.

NOTE: More information about the CSR program and benefits can be found at www.hp.com/go/csr-
support and www.hp.com/go/csr-faq.

Genuine HP replacement parts can be ordered at www.hp.com/buy/parts or by contacting an HP-

authorized service or support provider. When ordering, one of the following will be needed: part number,
serial number (found on back of printer), product number, or printer name.

● Parts listed as A: Easy

● Parts listed as B: Difficult and/or require tools

● Parts listed as Mandatory: Customer installed self-replacement parts (unless the customer is willing
to pay for HP service personnel to perform the repair). For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot
support is not provided under the HP printer warranty.

● Parts listed as Optional: HP service personnel installed self-replacement parts by customer request
for no additional charge during the printer warranty period.

Table 6-4 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts

Kit name Description CSR level Self-replacement Part number

options

Tray 2 Replacement 250-sheet A Mandatory RM2-5392-010CN

paper input tray (Tray 2)

Tray 3 Replacement 550-sheet A Mandatory RM2-5413-000CN

paper input tray (optional Tray
3)

Tray 2 Separation Pad Separation assembly (Tray 2) A Mandatory 3PZ15-67964

Tray 3 Separation Pad Separation assembly A Mandatory 3PZ15-67967

(optional Tray 3)

Tray 1 Pickup Roller Tray pickup roller assembly A Mandatory 3PZ15-67966

(Multipurpose Tray 1)

Tray 2 Pickup Roller Tray pickup roller assembly A Mandatory 3PZ15-67965

(Tray 2)

968 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

 Table 6-4 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts (continued)

Kit name Description CSR level Self-replacement Part number

options

Tray 3 Pickup Roller Tray pickup roller assembly A Mandatory 3PZ15-67968

(optional Tray 3)

How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.

The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts.
A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the
associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a
field replacement unit (FRU).

NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay
careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the
selected part number is for the correct printer model.

NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as
a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.

How to use parts lists and diagrams 969

 Document feeder and image scanner
Parts diagram and part list for the document feeder and image scanner.

Figure 6-1 Document feeder and image scanner

1

3
4

Table 6-5 Document feeder and image scanner

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 3PZ55-60117 Assy-duplex GSO (ISA/ADF assembly) 1

2 W1A77-67903 ADF top cover assembly (includes rollers) 1

3 B3Q10-40041 ISA lift slider pin 1

4 B3Q10-60128 ISA lift assembly 1

970 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Covers (M406/M407/E40040)
Parts diagram and parts list for the SFP printer covers.

Figure 6-2 Covers (M406/M407/E40040)

1

A01
4

A03

A03

18

A02 6
7

14 16

10
11

12

A04

Parts and diagrams: Covers (M406/M407/E40040) 971

 Table 6-6 Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RL2-3790-000CN Cover, indication 1

2 RC5-7025-000CN Keypad cover 1

4 RC5-7026-000CN Cover, top (SFP) 1

5 RM2-2959-000CN Control panel kypd/FFC assembly 1

6 RC4-3231-000CN Paper delivery tray (output bin) 1

8 RM2-2562-000CN Cartridge (front) door assembly (SFP) 1

10 RC4-4479-000CN Link, pressure release 1

11 RC4-3002-000CN Shaft, support 1

12 RM2-2960-000CN Cover, left (SFP) 1

14 RC4-3082-000CN Cover, cassette rear 1

16 RM2-5405-000CN Rear door assembly (duplex) 1

18 RM2-5666-000CN Paper re-pick assembly 1

Not shown 7121-8686 HP logo jewel 1

972 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Covers (M430/M431/E42540)
Parts diagram and parts list for the MFP printer covers.

Figure 6-3 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

21

20
19 A02

18
17
16
2
15

14
3

13
4
A01

11

6
7

5
A03

Parts and diagrams: Covers (M430/M431/E42540) 973

 Table 6-7 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RC4-3207-000CN Cover, top (MFP) 1

2 RC5-7024-000CN Guide, USB cable 1

3 RC4-3231-000CN Paper delivery tray (output bin) 1

5 RM2-2567-000CN Cartridge (front) door assembly (MFP) 1

6 RC4-4479-000CN Link, pressure release 1

7 RC4-3002-000CN Shaft, support 1

8 RM2-2961-000CN Cover, left (MFP) 1

9 RC4-3082-000CN Cover, cassette rear 1

11 RM2-5405-000CN Rear door assembly (duplex) 1

13 RM2-5666-000CN Paper re-pick assembly 1

14 3PZ55-67901 Control panel assembly 1

15 3PZ55-67984 Control panel mount base 1

16 3PZ55-67904 Control panel ICB chassis mount 1

17 3PZ55-67903 CP interconnect board and ground clip kit 1

18 3PZ55-67902 Cover, top control panel mount 1

19 3PZ55-67910 Cable, flexible flat control panel to frmtr 1

20 3PZ55-67905 Cover, control-panel FFC 1

21 3PZ55-67978 Cover, ISA/fax FFC cables 1

not shown 7121-8686 HP logo jewel 1

974 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 3)
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.

Figure 6-4 Internal assemblies (1 of 3)

MFP A25 A21
A25

A20

A05
15
A24
(J802)
16 (J105) A06
13
12 A02
A01 A22

A19 A18 (J811) 2

3
A24
(J4) A03

14 A04
A24
19
(J10)
3

SFP A25
A18
17

18

19

A24 A17
A26
9
A24
A15
A07

(J1) (J2)
A23
A14

(J201)
A09
A16 A13 A08
(J16) (J3) A12 A11 A28

8 A10
SFP A28
7
(J16) (J3)
4
8
MFP

A27

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (1 of 3) 975

 Table 6-8 Internal assemblies (1 of 3)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

2 RM2-2891-000CN Laser scanner assembly 1

4 RC4-2891-000CN Duct, fan (FM1) 1

5 RK2-8068-000CN Fan assembly 1

6 RM3-7417-000CN LV power supply PCA (110-127V) 1

6 RM3-7418-000CN LV power supply PCA (220-240V) 1

7 RM2-7508-000CN High-voltage power supply PCA 1

8 RK2-6931-000CN Cable, flexible flat Frmtr to DCC (MFP) 1

8 RK2-6920-000CN Cable, flexible flat Frmtr to DCC (SFP) 1

9 RM3-7584-000CN DC controller 1

12 3PZ55-67980 Fax PCA with plug kit (USA) 1

12 3PZ55-67981 Fax PCA with plug kit (EURO) 1

12 Fax PCA with plug kit (BRAZIL) 1

3PZ55-67982

12 3PZ55-67983 Fax PCA with plug kit (AP) 1

13 3PZ55-67911 Cable, FFC fax to formatter 1

14 3PZ55-67979 Guide, fax FFC 1

15 3PZ55-67906 Formatter (MFP) 1

15 3PZ55-67907 Formatter (China/India; MFP) 1

16 B5L32-60002 eMMC 16GB (MFP) 1

17 3PZ15-67903 Formatter (SFP) 1

17 3PZ15-67904 Formatter (China/India; SFP) 1

18 3PZ15-67905 eMMC 4GB (SFP) 1

19 3PZ15-67908 Island of Data (IOD) 1

976 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 3)
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.

Figure 6-5 Internal assemblies (2 of 3)

A04

A15
1 (J110) (J13)
(J705)

(J102)

(J106)
A03

A02 A16
2
A05
A13 A01

(M1)
A12 (J203) (J102)
See
9 (J405) Covers (SFP)
A16
M FP
(J406) (J6)
(J407) 3

8
A06
A08
A14 (J109)

(J701)

A07

M FP

A16 4 A09
A10
7

A11
10
11

Table 6-9 Internal assemblies (2 of 3)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 RM2-7510-000CN Connecting PCA assembly (duplex) 1

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (2 of 3) 977

 Table 6-9 Internal assemblies (2 of 3) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

2 RM2-9531-000CN Assembly, main motor 1

4 RM2-8506-000CN Power switch PC board assembly 1

5 RM2-5392-010CN Tray 2 1

6 3PZ15-67964 Tray 2 Separation Pad 1

9 RM2-2554-000CN Fuser assembly (110-127V) 1

9 RM2-2555-000CN Fuser assembly (220-240V) 1

10 RM2-5375-000CN Tray 2 sensor assembly 1

11 5851-7008 USB A F panel mount to WTB 250mm (MFP) 1

Not shown 9170-2659 Ferrite, motor 1

Not shown 3PZ15-67909 Locking Tray Guides (managed printers only) 1

978 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 3)
Parts diagram and parts list for the internal printer assemblies.

Figure 6-6 Internal assemblies (3 of 3)

A03

1 A04

A02 (J103)

(J691)
2
4
3
A01
A08

A05

A06

A09

6
7

10 8

A09

Table 6-10 Internal assemblies (3 of 3)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

1 3PZ15-67966 Tray 1 Pickup Roller 1

Parts and diagrams: Internal assemblies (3 of 3) 979

 Table 6-10 Internal assemblies (3 of 3) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

2 RL2-0657-000CN Pad, multipurpose separation (Tray 1) 1

3 RU8-2935-000CN Spring, compression (mp pad) 1

4 VS1-7258-007CN Connector, drawer 1

5 RC4-3133-000CN Holder, transfer roller right 1

6 RM1-4023-000CN Roller, transfer 1

7 RC4-3134-000CN Holder, transfer roller left 1

8 RM2-2577-000CN Registration assembly 1

9 3PZ15-67965 Tray 2 Pickup Roller 1

980 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers
Parts diagram and part list for the 550-sheet paper feeder covers.

Figure 6-7 550-sheet paper feeder covers

4

1
3

A01

A01

Table 6-11 550-sheet paper feeder covers

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

4 D9P29-67018 550-sheet paper feeder 1

Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder covers 981

 Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body
Parts diagram and part list for the 550-sheet paper feeder main body.

Figure 6-8 550-sheet paper feeder main body

9
A01 (J691)
A12
(J600)

A14 4 A17
A06 (J601)
1

(SW2) (J604) A16

(J605)
2 A15
A07
A13
A16
A03
A16 A02 3
5

A02
A05

A04
A16

7 6

A09

A11
A08

A10

Table 6-12 550-sheet paper feeder main body

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

6 RM2-5413-000CN Tray 3 1

7 3PZ15-67968 Tray 3 Pickup Roller 1

982 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-12 550-sheet paper feeder main body (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

8 3PZ15-67967 Tray 3 Separation Pad 1

Not shown 3PZ15-67909 Locking Tray Guides (managed printers only) 1

Parts and diagrams: 550-sheet paper feeder main body 983

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 6-13 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

550-sheet paper feeder D9P29-67018 550-sheet paper feeder covers

on page 981

ADF top cover assembly (includes rollers) W1A77-67903 Document feeder and image
scanner on page 970

Assembly, main motor RM2-9531-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Assy-duplex GSO (ISA/ADF assembly) 3PZ55-60117 Document feeder and image

scanner on page 970

CP interconnect board and ground clip kit 3PZ55-67903 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Cable, FFC fax to formatter 3PZ55-67911 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Cable, flexible flat Frmtr to DCC (MFP) RK2-6931-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Cable, flexible flat Frmtr to DCC (SFP) RK2-6920-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Cable, flexible flat control panel to frmtr 3PZ55-67910 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Cartridge (front) door assembly (MFP) RM2-2567-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Cartridge (front) door assembly (SFP) RM2-2562-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Connecting PCA assembly (duplex) RM2-7510-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Connector, drawer VS1-7258-007CN Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Control panel ICB chassis mount 3PZ55-67904 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Control panel assembly 3PZ55-67901 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Control panel kypd/FFC assembly RM2-2959-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Control panel mount base 3PZ55-67984 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Cover, ISA/fax FFC cables 3PZ55-67978 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Cover, cassette rear RC4-3082-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Cover, cassette rear RC4-3082-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Cover, control-panel FFC 3PZ55-67905 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

984 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-13 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, indication RL2-3790-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Cover, left (MFP) RM2-2961-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Cover, left (SFP) RM2-2960-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Cover, top (MFP) RC4-3207-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Cover, top (SFP) RC5-7026-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Cover, top control panel mount 3PZ55-67902 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

DC controller RM3-7584-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Duct, fan (FM1) RC4-2891-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Fan assembly RK2-8068-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Fax PCA with plug kit (AP) 3PZ55-67983 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Fax PCA with plug kit (BRAZIL) 3PZ55-67982 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Fax PCA with plug kit (EURO) 3PZ55-67981 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Fax PCA with plug kit (USA) 3PZ55-67980 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Ferrite, motor 9170-2659 Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Formatter (China/India; MFP) 3PZ55-67907 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Formatter (China/India; SFP) 3PZ15-67904 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Formatter (MFP) 3PZ55-67906 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Formatter (SFP) 3PZ15-67903 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Fuser assembly (110-127V) RM2-2554-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Fuser assembly (220-240V) RM2-2555-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Guide, USB cable RC5-7024-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Guide, fax FFC 3PZ55-67979 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Alphabetical parts list 985

 Table 6-13 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

HP logo jewel 7121-8686 Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

HP logo jewel 7121-8686 Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

High-voltage power supply PCA RM2-7508-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Holder, transfer roller left RC4-3134-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Holder, transfer roller right RC4-3133-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

ISA lift assembly B3Q10-60128 Document feeder and image

scanner on page 970

ISA lift slider pin B3Q10-40041 Document feeder and image

scanner on page 970

Island of Data (IOD) 3PZ15-67908 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Keypad cover RC5-7025-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

LV power supply PCA (110-127V) RM3-7417-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

LV power supply PCA (220-240V) RM3-7418-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Laser scanner assembly RM2-2891-000CN Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Link, pressure release RC4-4479-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Link, pressure release RC4-4479-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Locking Tray Guides (managed printers only) 3PZ15-67909 Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Locking Tray Guides (managed printers only) 3PZ15-67909 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 982

Pad, multipurpose separation (Tray 1) RL2-0657-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Paper delivery tray (output bin) RC4-3231-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Paper delivery tray (output bin) RC4-3231-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Paper re-pick assembly RM2-5666-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Paper re-pick assembly RM2-5666-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Power switch PC board assembly RM2-8506-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

986 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-13 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Rear door assembly (duplex) RM2-5405-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Rear door assembly (duplex) RM2-5405-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Registration assembly RM2-2577-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Roller, transfer RM1-4023-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Shaft, support RC4-3002-000CN Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

Shaft, support RC4-3002-000CN Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

Spring, compression (mp pad) RU8-2935-000CN Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Tray 1 Pickup Roller 3PZ15-67966 Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Tray 2 RM2-5392-010CN Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Tray 2 Pickup Roller 3PZ15-67965 Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Tray 2 Separation Pad 3PZ15-67964 Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Tray 2 sensor assembly RM2-5375-000CN Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

Tray 3 RM2-5413-000CN 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 982

Tray 3 Pickup Roller 3PZ15-67968 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 982

Tray 3 Separation Pad 3PZ15-67967 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 982

USB A F panel mount to WTB 250mm (MFP) 5851-7008 Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

eMMC 16GB B5L32-60002 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

eMMC 4GB 3PZ15-67905 Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

Alphabetical parts list 987

 Numerical parts list
Table 6-14 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

3PZ55-67982 Fax PCA with plug kit (BRAZIL) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ15-67903 Formatter (SFP) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ15-67904 Formatter (China/India; SFP) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ15-67905 eMMC 4GB Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ15-67908 Island of Data (IOD) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ15-67909 Locking Tray Guides (managed printers only) Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

3PZ15-67909 Locking Tray Guides (managed printers only) 550-sheet paper feeder main
body on page 982

3PZ15-67964 Tray 2 Separation Pad Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

3PZ15-67965 Tray 2 Pickup Roller Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

3PZ15-67966 Tray 1 Pickup Roller Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

3PZ15-67967 Tray 3 Separation Pad 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 982

3PZ15-67968 Tray 3 Pickup Roller 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 982

3PZ55-60117 Assy-duplex GSO (ISA/ADF assembly) Document feeder and image

scanner on page 970

3PZ55-67901 Control panel assembly Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

3PZ55-67902 Cover, top control panel mount Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

3PZ55-67903 CP interconnect board and ground clip kit Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

3PZ55-67904 Control panel ICB chassis mount Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

3PZ55-67905 Cover, control-panel FFC Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

3PZ55-67906 Formatter (MFP) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ55-67907 Formatter (China/India; MFP) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ55-67910 Cable, flexible flat control panel to frmtr Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

988 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-14 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

3PZ55-67911 Cable, FFC fax to formatter Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ55-67978 Cover, ISA/fax FFC cables Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

3PZ55-67979 Guide, fax FFC Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ55-67980 Fax PCA with plug kit (USA) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ55-67981 Fax PCA with plug kit (EURO) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ55-67983 Fax PCA with plug kit (AP) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

3PZ55-67984 Control panel mount base Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

5851-7008 USB A F panel mount to WTB 250mm (MFP) Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

7121-8686 HP logo jewel Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

7121-8686 HP logo jewel Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

9170-2659 Ferrite, motor Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

B3Q10-40041 ISA lift slider pin Document feeder and image

scanner on page 970

B3Q10-60128 ISA lift assembly Document feeder and image

scanner on page 970

B5L32-60002 eMMC 16GB Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

D9P29-67018 550-sheet paper feeder 550-sheet paper feeder covers

on page 981

RC4-2891-000CN Duct, fan (FM1) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RC4-3002-000CN Shaft, support Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RC4-3002-000CN Shaft, support Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RC4-3082-000CN Cover, cassette rear Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RC4-3082-000CN Cover, cassette rear Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RC4-3133-000CN Holder, transfer roller right Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

RC4-3134-000CN Holder, transfer roller left Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

Numerical parts list 989

 Table 6-14 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

RC4-3207-000CN Cover, top (MFP) Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RC4-3231-000CN Paper delivery tray (output bin) Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RC4-3231-000CN Paper delivery tray (output bin) Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RC4-4479-000CN Link, pressure release Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RC4-4479-000CN Link, pressure release Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RC5-7024-000CN Guide, USB cable Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RC5-7025-000CN Keypad cover Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RC5-7026-000CN Cover, top (SFP) Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RK2-6920-000CN Cable, flexible flat Frmtr to DCC (SFP) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RK2-6931-000CN Cable, flexible flat Frmtr to DCC (MFP) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RK2-8068-000CN Fan assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RL2-0657-000CN Pad, multipurpose separation (Tray 1) Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

RL2-3790-000CN Cover, indication Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RM1-4023-000CN Roller, transfer Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

RM2-2554-000CN Fuser assembly (110-127V) Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

RM2-2555-000CN Fuser assembly (220-240V) Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

RM2-2562-000CN Cartridge (front) door assembly (SFP) Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RM2-2567-000CN Cartridge (front) door assembly (MFP) Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RM2-2577-000CN Registration assembly Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

RM2-2891-000CN Laser scanner assembly Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RM2-2959-000CN Control panel kypd/FFC assembly Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RM2-2960-000CN Cover, left (SFP) Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

990 Chapter 6 Parts and diagrams

Table 6-14 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

RM2-2961-000CN Cover, left (MFP) Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RM2-5375-000CN Tray 2 sensor assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

RM2-5392-010CN Tray 2 Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

RM2-5405-000CN Rear door assembly (duplex) Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RM2-5405-000CN Rear door assembly (duplex) Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RM2-5413-000CN Tray 3 550-sheet paper feeder main

body on page 982

RM2-5666-000CN Paper re-pick assembly Covers (M406/M407/E400405)

on page 972

RM2-5666-000CN Paper re-pick assembly Covers (M430/M431/E42540)

on page 974

RM2-7508-000CN High-voltage power supply PCA Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RM2-7510-000CN Connecting PCA assembly (duplex) Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

RM2-8506-000CN Power switch PC board assembly Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

RM2-9531-000CN Assembly, main motor Internal assemblies (2 of 3) on

page 977

RM3-7417-000CN LV power supply PCA (110-127V) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RM3-7418-000CN LV power supply PCA (220-240V) Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RM3-7584-000CN DC controller Internal assemblies (1 of 3) on

page 976

RU8-2935-000CN Spring, compression (mp pad) Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

VS1-7258-007CN Connector, drawer Internal assemblies (3 of 3) on

page 979

W1A77-67903 ADF top cover assembly (includes rollers) Document feeder and image
scanner on page 970

Numerical parts list 991

 A Certificate of Volatility

View the product certificates of volatility.

Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printers.

992 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility SFP (1 of 2)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP LaserJet Enterprise Managed Hewlett Packard Company
M406 (Enterprise) M406dn = 3PZ15A E40040 = 3PZ35A 11311 Chinden Blvd
E40040 (Managed) M407dn = 3PZ16A Boise, ID 83714
M407 (Ent. China)

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Operation system and Steps to clear memory:
print/scan buffer When the printer is powered off
DDR3 - DRAM 1024MB the memory is erased.
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear this
backup/restore data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI Flash
8MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear this
factory product configuration data
data required for the device to
function. User modifications
are limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
EMMC 4GB Yes No OS and user data Firmware update

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Certificate of Volatility 993

 Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility SFP (2 of 2)

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Frequency:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

994 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility MFP (1 of 2)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP LaserJet Enterprise Managed Hewlett Packard Company
M430 (Enterprise) M430f = 3PZ55A E42540f = 3PZ75A 11311 Chinden Blvd
E42540 (Managed) M431f = 3PZ56A Boise, ID 83714
M431 (Ent. CH/IN)

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Operation system and Steps to clear memory:
print/scan buffer When the printer is powered off
DDR3 - DRAM 2048MB the memory is erased.
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear this
backup/restore data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SCAN EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store Scan/Customer settings There are no steps to clear this
data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
SPI Flash
8MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear this
factory product configuration data
data required for the device to
function. User modifications
are limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.

Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
EMMC 16GB Yes No OS and user data Firmware update

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:

Certificate of Volatility 995

 Figure A-4 Certificate of Volatility MFP (2 of 2)
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Frequency:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

996 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Glossary of terms

802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the
IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).

802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up
to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer
interferences from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.

AC
An electric current that reverses its direction many times a second at regular intervals. For example, the
110V line current found in a typical US electrical wall receptacle.

AC Control Module (PageWide)

The AC Control Module controls the heating elements in the airflow assembly. Function include: voltage
monitoring (ensuring correct operation in a low-quality-power environment), isolation (low voltage heater
control signals are isolated from the high voltage AC power for safety), AC switching (power is switched
on/off to the heater), and heating element configuration (heating element configuration is changed
between series and parallel for temperature predictability).

ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a device that automatically feeds an original sheet (or multiple
sheets) of paper into the image scanner. The document feeder is a component of the integrated
scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).

Airflow System (PageWide)

The airflow system conditions the printed pages to avoid page curling due to the ink on the page. The
airflow system functionally consists of a fan and heating elements. The pressurized air is blown on the
page through the nozzles that are placed on the paper path of the airflow system between print and
eject zone.

BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically.
This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assigns an IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless
workstation” computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD
A Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is the scanner module which enables a scan job. A CCD locking
mechanism is used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.

CIS
A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red, green,
and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the
optical system captures each color in a single row of Charged Coupled Device (CCD) sensors that cover
the entire page width.

Glossary of terms 997

 Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints
an entire set before printing additional copies.

Control Panel
The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where the user can control and/or monitor
the printer. The control panel is found on the front of the printer.

Coverage
Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5%
coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has
complicated images or a large amount of text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner
usage will be as much as the coverage.

DC
An electric current flowing in one direction only. Typically a low voltage load current supplied to an
electrical assembly.

DCC
The DC controller (DCC) controls the operation of the printer sub-systems and electrical components.
the DCC sends out various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based
on the print command and image data that the host computer sends the formatter.

Default
The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.

DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server
provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for
allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

Digital Send Software

Digital send software allows a mufti-function printer (MFP) to scan and send information quickly and
securely to email, network folders, other printers, and fax services.

DIMM
A Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all
data within the printer, such as printing data and received fax data.

DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally,
higher DPI results in a higher resolution (more visible detail in the image and a larger file size).

Duplex
A mechanism that automatically turns over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on
both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during
one print cycle.

998 Glossary of terms

Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the
printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
the printer limit is 2,400 pages a day (assuming 20 working days/month).

Dynamic Security
Dynamic Security is a toner cartridge design and process for authenticating genuine HP supplies. HP
printers use toner cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP
chip or modified or non-HP circuitry might not work (now or in the future).

e-Duplex
Single-pass electronic duplex (e-Duplex) printer use two separate scan modules to scan the front-side
and back-side of an e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document feeder.

EMC
EMC is a measure of a device's ability to operate as intended in its shared operating environment while,
at the same time, not affecting the ability of other equipment within the same environment to operate as
intended.

EMI
EMI is the electromagnetic energy which affects the functioning of an electronic device. Electronic
devices (like printers) are a source of EMI. Because it is rare for electronics to operate in isolation,
products are generally engineered to function in the presence of some amount of EMI.

eMMC
An embedded Multi-Media Card is a compact memory device consisting of NAND flash memory and a
simple storage controller.

Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates
the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first
system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation,
which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a PostScript (PS) code file which is used for storing font and vector
graphic image information.

ESD
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two electrically charged objects
caused by contact, an electrical short, or dielectric breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.

Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines
wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access
control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet
has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to present.

Ferrite
A ferrite are used to reduce the amount of radio frequency noise (or interference) in a wire or cable. A
ferrite enables proper EMC/EMI performance for regulatory purposes.

Glossary of terms 999

 FFC
Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) are designed for Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) to PCA connections (for
example, connecting a fax PCA to the formatter).

FIH
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction printers (MFPs) to use third-
party devices to extend the capabilities of the MFP.

Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and
upgrade the firmware.

Flash memory
Flash memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

Flow integrated scanner assembly

A printer scanner assembly that includes a slide-out external physical keyboard.

Formatter (LaserJet)
The formatter controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and
coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA, storing font and customer
configuration information, communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel
functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel.

FTP
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a protocol designed for transferring files over the Internet.
Files stored on an FTP server can be accessed using an FTP client, such as a web browser, FTP software
program, or a command line interface.

Fuser Unit
The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that adheres the toner onto the printed page. It consists of a
heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and
pressure to make sure that the toner stays on the paper permanently (which is why paper is warm when
it comes out of a laser printer).

Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. A
gateway is used to connect two different computer networks, especially a connection to the Internet.

Grayscale
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of a color image printed in monochrome. Colors
are represented by a range of gray shades from white to black.

Halftone
Halftone is a way of reproducing a photograph or other image in which the various tones of gray or color
are produced by variously sized dots of ink or toner. Halftone simulates grayscale by varying the number
of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller
number of dots.

HDD
A Hard-Disk Drive (HDD) (commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk) is a non-volatile storage
device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

1000 Glossary of terms

IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.

Image scanner
The image scanner (or Sub Scanner Assembly) contains the components to digitally scan an original
source document. The image scanner is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and
image scanner).

IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and
communicate with other devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.

IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs,
media size, resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP
also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing
solution.

ISA
The Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA) includes the document feeder and image scanner.

ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body
composed of representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.

JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or
quality. It was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for
other images.

JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.

LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying
directory services running over TCP/IP.

LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that can indicate the status of a printer
(formatter LEDs) or a component in a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner that helps capture an image.

LEDM
Low end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the
dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol,
event, security, and discovery methods.

Glossary of terms 1001

 LPDC
Late point differentiation configuration (LPDC) allows the channel partner to configure the speed to the
printer depending on the customer’s order. LPDC configuration is stored on the Trusted Platform Module
(TPM).

LVPS - SMPS
Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS) and Switching Mode Power Supplies (SMPS) supply direct current
(DC) voltages to various printer components and assemblies.

MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC
address is a unique 48–bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (for
example, 00–00–0c-34–11–4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by
the manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on a large network.

MEt
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety
of font- and data-compression methods. MEt is available only in Printer Command Language (PCL) mode;
it is not functional when printing in PostScript (PS) mode.

MFP
A Multi Function Printer (MFP) is a printer that incorporates multiple functionality in a single physical
body. For example, an MFP printer can scan, digitally send, fax, copy, and print.

MHV
Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC connectors (DC voltage
between 500 V and 5 kV).

Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a
carrier signal to decode transmitted information.

MPCA (PageWide)
The MPCA integrates both formatter (LaserJet) and engine control electronics (DC controller) into a
single assembly. The Main PCA (MPCA) controls printer functions like receiving and processes print
data, developing and coordinating data placement, storing font and customer configuration information,
communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer
status information through the control panel.

NAND
NAND is not an acronym (the term is short for NOT AND a Boolean operator and logic gate). NAND
(flash) memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

NVRAM
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) is used to store I/O and information about the print
environment configuration (stored data even when the power is turned off).

OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam
emitted from a laser printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging
unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should
be replaced appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning
mechanism, and paper.

1002 Glossary of terms

Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or
translated to produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.

PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete, electronic components
must be assembled to form a functional printed circuit assembly or PCA.

PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer
protocol. PCL has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.

PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF
represents two dimension documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.

PJL
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL
and PostScript (PS). With standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions like
dynamic I/O switching, context-sensitive switching, and isolation of print environment settings from one
print job to the next.

PML
Printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back
from the printer through the I/O ports.

PostScript (PS)
PostScript (PS) is a Page Description Language (PDL) and programming language used primarily in
electronic and desktop publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning
the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.

Print Media
Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or
copier.

Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.

Printhead (PageWide)
The printhead converts the digital firing instructions from the printer electronics into properly formed
and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors.

Printhead Wiper (PageWide)

The printhead wiper system keeps the printhead nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the printer
as it performs the wiping and capping functions. The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue
and particulates. The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage and when the printer is
idle.

Glossary of terms 1003

 Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer
between two computing endpoints.

RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the printer memory device where the data in current use is kept so it
can be quickly retrieved by the device's processor. This memory is an important factor in avoiding errors
and printing documents properly. Printer memory is used to store and process print jobs as they are
sent to the printer from a computer. After printing, the job is cleared from the memory to make room
for more print jobs. Printer memory is directly linked to two print characteristics: speed and print quality.
More memory allows you to print faster and print larger, high-quality graphics.

Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the
resolution.

SCB
The Scanner Control Board (SCB) controls the functions of the image scanner components in the Sub
Scanner Assembly (SSA).

Service fluid and aerosol management systems (PageWide)

There are two types of service fluid, shipping fluid and ink. The service fluid management system is
contained entirely within the duplex module. Service fluid is discharged as droplets from the printhead,
and then collected in a container inside the duplex module. Some of the droplets are called aerosol
because they are lighter than air. Aerosol can float inside the printer and collect on the lens of optical
sensors, producing false failures. The aerosol management system transports the aerosol and collects
it in a safe place. Aerosol management consists of an aerosol fan, mounted on the rear wall of the air
flow assembly, which creates air flow that pulls the aerosol through the holes in the platen and into the
aerosol filter inside the duplex module.

SFP
A single-function printer only processes print jobs sent from a host computer or from an USB port on the
printer.

SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports,
and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated
inter-process communication mechanism.

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP
is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message are specified
and the message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email
message to the server.

SODIMM
Small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) is a thin profile memory storage device (a smaller
alternative to a standard DIMM device).

SSA
The Sub-Scanner Assembly is the image scanner component of the Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA;
which includes the document feeder and the image scanner).

1004 Glossary of terms

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the
address is the network address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.

TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bit mapped image format. TIFF describes image
data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics
of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for
pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge
A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used
in laser printers and photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be
fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.

TPM
The HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a security accessory for printers. The TPM strengthens
protection of encrypted credentials and data stored on your printer. Certificate private keys are both
generated by and protected by the TPM. Once installed, the printer and the TPM are sealed and the
printer owns the TPM. The TPM may not be moved to another device without losing its ownership from
the original printer. Installing a TPM accessory might necessitate a firmware upgrade. The TPM prevents
the printer from starting if the TPM is missing. If the TPM is removed from the printer, a control-panel
error message appears indicating that the TPM is missing.

NOTE: The TPM is not a service part for some printer models. Check the printer service manual to determine if
the TPM is a replaceable service part.

TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-
compliant software, a scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for
Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The
first part of the address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.

USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to
connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Walk-up USB
Some printers support direct printing from a USB flash drive (the walk-up USB port is usually near the
control panel).

Glossary of terms 1005

 Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by
transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been
used by paper makers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other
government documents to discourage counterfeiting.

XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new
document format developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic
documents. It is an XML-based specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-
independent document format.

ZIF Connector
Zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors use a mechanical locking method to secure Flat Flexible Cables
(FFCs) to a Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA).

1006 Glossary of terms

Index

Symbols/Numerics blank pages components

troubleshooting 332 clutches 56
10/100/1000 functions
Bonjour DC controller 53
theory of operations 51
identifying 105 fans 56
550-sheet paper feeder covers
browser requirements low-voltage power supply 57
whole unit replacement 981
HP Embedded Web motors 55
550-sheet paper feeder main body
Server 105 sensors 57
whole unit replacement 982
solenoids 56
550-sheet tray
C switches 56
jams 252, 284
configuration
550-sheet trays cables
base printer 5
jams MFP 270 USB, troubleshooting 332
printer 1
jams SFP 237 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
configuration page
panel 198
determine installed
A Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control-
firmware 83
panel menu 198
accessories 339, 967 find information 153
cartridge
accessories, toner part solve problems 153
life detection 73
numbers 339, 967 configurations, M430/M431/
memory chip 73
acoustic specifications 18 E40040 5
presence detection 73
assemblies 550-sheet paper configurations, M430/M431/
replacing 22
feeder E42540 6
toner level detection 73
remove and replace 942 connectivity and performance
cartridges, toner part
assemblies base printer, remove troubleshooting 331
numbers 339, 967
and replace 542 connector error
caution iv
assembly locations 342 65.WX.YZ error 237
certificate of volatility 992
authorized service providers, connector locations
Channel partners
parts 338, 966 external plug and port
WISE v, 78, 337, 341, 965
auto on / auto off mode diagrams 147
checklists
setup and operation 48 printed circuit assembly
pre-troubleshooting 79, 80
automatic cleaning page intervals diagrams 144
circuit base printer, diagrams 153
set up 25 control panel 51
cleaning
locating MFP 3, 344
tray 1 rollers and separation
B locating SFP 2, 342
pad 26
backup error solve problems 219
tray 2 rollers 34
32.WX.YZ error 236 control panel messages 231
tray 2 rollers and separation
reset error 236 control panel, MFP system
pad 30
restore error 236 diagnostics
tray 3 rollers and separation
Backup/Restore (Maintenance) solve problems 219
pad 37
menu control-panel menu
cleaning page 198
control-panel menu 198 Maintenance 198
automatic 25
base printer control-panel menu)
print 24, 311
configuration 5 Service (Maintenance) 199
clutches
information 2 Troubleshooting
theory of operation 53, 56
specifications 8 (Maintenance) 200
cold rest
basic printer operation 46 USB Firmware Upgrade
reset 208
bin, output (Maintenance) 199
component diagnostics
locating MFP 3, 344 conventions used iv
solve problems 140
locating SFP 2, 342

Index 1007
 copy settings engine 217 Embedded Jetdirect error
HP Embedded Web diagrams 80.WX.YZ error 237
Server 105, 106, 109 use parts lists and Embedded Web Server (EWS)
copy-quality problems diagrams 969 features 105
light or faint copies 329 diagrams, block network connection 105
modify printer settings to solve problems 142 engine
improve scan or copy diagrams, cross section 142 diagnostics 217
quality 327 diagrams, external plug and port test page 217
vertical lines, bands, or locations 147 engine control system
streaks 323 diagrams, general circuit base theory of operation 53
copy-quality troubleshooting 321 printer 153 engine error (LaserJet)
Copy/Print (Settings) menu (MFP) diagrams, major component 46.WX.YZ error 236
control-panel menu 115 locations 149 63.WX.YZ error 237
CoV diagrams, printed circuit assembly engine error (PageWide)
certificate of volatility 992 connector locations 144 61.WX.YZ error 237
covers diagrams, timing chart 152 engine laser/scanner system
remove and replace 402 digital send settings theory of operation 64
covers MFP HP Embedded Web engine test
parts 973 Server 105, 106, 109 solve problems 87, 217
covers SFP digital sending error (firmware) event log error (firmware)
parts 971 44.WX.YZ error 236 42.WX.YZ error 236
covers, locating SFP 3, 343 dimensions, MFP printer 15 exploded parts views, use parts
CPMD 231 dimensions, SFP printer 13 lists and diagrams 969
cross section diagrams disable cartridge check (not Explorer, versions supported
550-sheet paper feeder 142 available for this printer) HP Embedded Web
base printer 142 solve problems 139 Server 105
CSR parts document feeder external panels
part numbers 340, 968 paper-feeding problems remove and replace 402
customer self-repair (CSR) A parts (MFP) 303 external plug and port diagrams
and accessories 346 remove and replace parts 381 locations 147
customer self-repair parts whole unit replacement 970
part numbers 340, 968 document feeder / scanner F
theory of operations 45
factory settings
D document feeder and scanner
reset 208, 210
information 1
DC controller faint copies
specifications 1
theory of operation 53 copy-quality problems 329
document feeder error
DC controller communication error fan error
31.WX.YZ error 236
55.WX.YZ error 237 58.WX.YZ error 237
doors
DC controller firmware error fans
remove and replace 402
70.WX.YZ error 237 theory of operation 53, 56
drum cleaning
defeating Fax (Settings) menu (MFP)
image formation 72
interlocks 217 control-panel menu 177
duplexer
defeating interlocks fax functions
clear jams 264, 293
solve problems 137, 217 theory of operations 51
jams MFP 270
definitions and terms fax problems
jams SFP 237
glossary 997 get help from WISE 331
duplexer error
determine problem source 79 fax settings
69.WX.YZ error 237
development HP Embedded Web
image formation 70 Server 105, 106, 111
E
devices, input firmware
information 18 electrical specifications 18 determine the installed
diagnostics email problems version 83
component, solve get help from WISE 331 theory of operations 52
problems 140

1008 Index
firmware communication error fuser heater protection I
49.WX.YZ error 237 theory of operation 64
I/O functions
firmware install error fusing
theory of operations 51
99.WX.YZ error 237 image formation 71
image capture system
hard disk error 237
scanning MFP only 46
remote firmware upgrade G
image defects, repetitive
error 237
General (Settings) menu ruler 305
firmware locations
control-panel menu 160 image formation development
active and repository 210
general configuration theory of operation 70
firmware upgrade
HP Embedded Web image formation drum cleaning
firmware version
Server 105, 106, 108 theory of operation 72
determine 83
glossary image formation fusing
firmware upgrade)
terms and definitions 997 theory of operation 71
embedded web server 83
image formation laser-beam
USB flash drive, control H exposure
panel 83
hard disk partition error theory of operation 69
USB flash drive, pre-boot
98.WX.YZ error 237 image formation primary charging
menu 83
high-voltage power supply theory of operation 69
firmware, upgrade
circuits 60 image formation separation
downloading 83
fuser bias 61 theory of operation 71
firmware, version determine
theory of operation 60 image formation transfer
find information 83
high-voltage power supply circuits theory of operation 70
firmware, version determining 83
theory of operation 60 image quality
flash memory
high-voltage power supply fuser check toner-cartridge
theory of operations 52
bias status 310
flatbed
theory of operation 61 tray 1 rollers and separation
scanning and image capture
HP Embedded Web Server pad, clean 26
MFP only 46
copy settings 105, 106, 109 tray 2 rollers and separation
flowcharts
digital send settings 105, 106, pad, clean 30
troubleshooting 79, 81
109 tray 2 rollers, clean 34
format disk
fax settings 105, 106, 111 tray 3 rollers and separation
solve problems 210
general configuration 105, pad, clean 37
formatter
106, 108 image-formation process
locating MFP 4, 345
HP Web Services 105, 106, 113 theory of operation 66
locating SFP 3, 343
information pages 105-107 image-quality
formatter control system 48
network settings 105, 106, 113 troubleshooting 304
functions
other links list 105, 106, 109 individual component test (not
low-voltage power supply 57
print settings 105, 106, 109 available for this printer)
fuser
scan settings 105, 106, 109 solve problems 142
circuits 62
security settings 105, 106, 112 information
control functions 62
supplies 111 document feeder and
heater protection 64
troubleshooting tools 105, 106, scanner 1
jams 261, 289
111 input devices 18
fuser circuits
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) printer 1
theory of operation 62
features 105 printer base 2
fuser control
network connection 105 information pages
theory of operation 61
HP internal users configuration page 153
fuser control functions
WISE v, 78, 337, 341, 965 HP Embedded Web
theory of operation 62
HP Web Services Server 105-107
fuser error
enabling 105, 106, 113 Jetdirect page 153
41.WX.YZ error 236
initial rotation period 46, 47
laser scanner error 236
input accessory error
paper path error 236
67.WX.YZ error 237
fuser error (LaserJet)
50.WX.YZ error 237

Index 1009
 input devices 550-sheet trays MFP 270 laser/scanner safety
information 18 550-sheet trays SFP 237 theory of operation 66
remove and replace, 550-sheet auto-navigation 238, 270 last rotation period 46, 47
paper feeder 942 auto-navigation MFP 270 light copies
input/output error auto-navigation SFP 237 copy-quality problems 329
40.WX.YZ error 236 causes of 238, 271 lines, bands, streaks
input/output functions causes of MFP 270 copy-quality problems 323
theory of operations 51 causes of SFP 237 local area network (LAN)
installation duplexer 264, 293 locating MFP 4, 345
printer 19 duplexer MFP 270 low-voltage power supply
installation, base printer 22 duplexer SFP 237 functions 59
installation, document feeder / fuser 261, 289 over-current/over-voltage
scanner 19 locations 238, 270 protection 59
installation, input devices 37 locations MFP 270 safety 59
interface ports locations SFP 237 theory of operation 57
locating MFP 4, 345 output bin 267, 296 low-voltage power supply
locating SFP 3, 343 output bin MFP 270 functions
interlocks output bin SFP 237 theory of operation 59
defeating 217 Top cover 257 low-voltage power supply safety
internal assemblies (1 of 3), Tray 1 239, 271 theory of operation 59
parts 975 Tray 1 MFP 270
internal assemblies (2 of 3), Tray 1 SFP 237 M
parts 977 Tray 2 244, 276
maintenance
internal assemblies (3 of 3), Tray 2 MFP 270
printer 19
parts 979 Tray 2 SFP 237
maintenance, base printer 22
internal assemblies 550-sheet Tray 3 252, 284
maintenance, document feeder /
paper feeder 942 Jetdirect page
scanner 19
internal assemblies base solve problems 153
maintenance, input devices 37
printer 542 job accounting error (firmware)
major component diagrams
internal diagnostics error 48.WX.YZ error 236
locations 149
90.WX.YZ error 237 job management error
major component locations
video display error 237 (firmware) 236
diagrams 149
internal parts 550-sheet paper job pipeline error
Manage Supplies (Settings) menu
feeder (firmware) 236
control-panel menu 188
remove and replace 942 job parser error (firmware)
manual sensor test, tray/bin (not
internal parts base printer, remove 47.WX.YZ error 236
available for this printer)
and replace 542 printer calibration error 236
solve problems 142
internal test and information
manual sensor tests (not available
pages K
for this printer)
solve problems 153
keyboard 51 solve problem 142
Internet Explorer, versions
keypad memory
supported
locating SFP 2, 342 toner cartridge 73
HP Embedded Web
Memory Enhancement technology
Server 105 L theory of operations 52
Memory Enhancement technology
J laser scanner error (LaserJet)
(MEt) 48
51.WX.YZ error 237
jam detection, Tray 3 memory error
52.WX.YZ error 237
theory of operation 77 82.WX.YZ error 237
laser-beam exposure
jam error (LaserJet) EMMC error 237
image formation 69
13.WX.YZ error 236 hard disk error 237
laser/scanner
jam error (PageWide) memory functions
failure detection 65
13.WX.YZ error 236 theory of operations 52
safety 66
jams memory, E40040
laser/scanner failure detection
550-sheet tray 252, 284 included 9
theory of operation 65

1010 Index
memory, E42540 Netscape Navigator, versions P
included 12 supported
page error
memory, M406/M407 HP Embedded Web
21.WX.YZ error 236
included 8 Server 105
pages
memory, M430/M431 network port
blank 332
included 10 locating SFP 3, 343
not printing 332
menu, control panel network settings
printing slowly 332
Backup/Restore (Maintenance) HP Embedded Web
pages per minute, E40040 9
menu 198 Server 105, 106, 113
pages per minute, E42540 12
Backup/Restore menu 198 Networking (Settings) menu
pages per minute, M406/M407 8
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 198 control-panel menu 191
pages per minute, M430/M431 10
Copy/Print (Settings) menu networks, E40040
panels, external
(MFP) 115 supported 9
remove and replace 402
Fax (Settings) menu (MFP) 177 networks, E42540
paper
General (Settings) menu 160 supported 12
jams 238, 271
Manage Supplies (Settings) networks, M406/M407
jams MFP 270
menu) 188 supported 8
jams SFP 237
Networking (Settings) networks,M430/M431
selecting 312
menu 191 supported 10
paper feeder control
Print (Settings) menu (SFP) 115 note iv
theory of operation 75
Reports menu 158 NVRAM
paper feeder, 550-sheet
Scan/Digital Send (Settings) theory of operations 52
main body replacement
menu (MFP) 166
parts 982
Service (Maintenance) O
whole unit replacement
menu 199
on/off button part 981
Service menu 198
locating MFP 3, 344 paper handling
Settings menu 159
locating SFP 2, 342 solve problems 237
Supplies menu 197
operating-environment range paper handling error (LaserJet)
Support Tools menu 198
printer 18 56.WX.YZ error 237
Trays menu 197
operation paper jams
Troubleshooting (Maintenance)
Sleep delay 48 550-sheet tray 252, 284
menu 200
Sleep mode 48 550-sheet trays MFP 270
USB Firmware Upgrade
operation sequence 46, 47 550-sheet trays SFP 237
(Maintenance) menu 199
operations duplexer 264, 293
USB Firmware Upgrade
toner cartridge memory 73 duplexer MFP 270
menu 198
orderable parts 338, 966 duplexer SFP 237
menus control panel, control panel
other functions, Tray 3 fuser 261, 289
Calibrate/Cleaning) 198
theory of operation 77 locations 238, 270
menus, control panel
other links list locations MFP 270
Calibrate/Cleaning 198
HP Embedded Web locations SFP 237
motor error (LaserJet)
Server 105, 106, 109 output bin 267, 296
59.WX.YZ error 237
output accessory error output bin MFP 270
motors
66.WX.YZ error 237 output bin SFP 237
theory of operation 53, 55
output bin Top cover 257
clear jams 267, 296 Tray 1 239, 271
N
clear jams MFP 270 Tray 1 MFP 270
Near Field Communication error clear jams SFP 237 Tray 1 SFP 237
81.WX.YZ error 237 locating MFP 3, 344 Tray 2 244, 276
Bluetooth error 237 locating SFP 2, 342 Tray 2 MFP 270
external I/O card error 237 over-current/over-voltage Tray 2 SFP 237
internal EIO error 237 protection Tray 3 252, 284
wireless error 237 theory of operation 59 paper path sensors test (not
OXPd/Web kit error available for this printer)
45.WX.YZ error 236 solve problems 142

Index 1011
 paper path test power switch printing
solve problems 140 locating MFP 3, 344 period in operation
part numbers locating SFP 2, 342 sequence 46, 47
customer self-repair pre-boot menu options 88 troubleshooting 332
parts 340, 968 pre-troubleshooting checklist 79, Process Cleaning Page 198
partial clean (disk) 80 product number
solve problems 210 primary charging locating SFP 3, 343
parts 338, 966 image formation 69 location MFP 4, 345
550-sheet paper feeder Print (Settings) menu (SFP)
covers 981 control-panel menu 115 R
550-sheet paper feeder main print a cleaning page 24, 311
RAM
body 982 print bar error (PageWide)
theory of operations 52
covers MFP 973 62.WX.YZ error 237
real-time clock error
covers SFP 971 print settings
11.WX.YZ error 236
document feeder and scanner HP Embedded Web
rear door
whole units 970 Server 105, 106, 109
locating MFP 4, 345
use parts lists and print-quality troubleshooting 305
removal and replacement 337
diagrams 969 print/stop test
remove and replace
parts and diagrams, using 969 solve problems 139, 141
550-sheet paper feeder,
parts internal 550-sheet paper printed circuit assembly diagrams
internal parts and
feeder connector locations 144
assemblies 942
remove and replace 942 printer
external panels, covers, and
parts internal base printer, remove information, configuration, and
doors 402
and replace 542 specifications 1
remove and replace parts
parts list and diagrams, how to installation and
document feeder /
use 969 maintenance 19
scanner 381
parts, internal assemblies (1 of operating-environment
remove and replace, internal parts
3) 975 range 18
and assemblies base
parts, internal assemblies (2 of resets 208
printer 542
3) 977 space requirements 17
repetitive image defect ruler 305
parts, internal assemblies (3 of printer information, configuration,
replacement parts
3) 979 and specifications
customer self-repair
parts, order by authorized service document feeder and scanner
parts 340, 968
providers 338, 966 specifications 1
replacing
parts, orderable 338, 966 document feeder and scanner
toner cartridge 22
parts, ordering 338, 966 views 1
Reports menu
performance and connectivity printer installation and
control-panel menu 158
troubleshooting 331 maintenance
resets
periods of the operation base printer 22
printer 208
sequence 46, 47 document feeder / scanner 19
revision history iii
personal identification number input devices 37
(PIN) printer job language (PJL) 48, 50 S
service menu 204 printer management language
PJL (printer job language) 48, 50 (PML) 48, 50 scan or copy quality improvement
PML (printer management printer memory error copy-quality problems 327
language) 48, 50 20.WX.YZ error 236 scan settings
ports printer resets HP Embedded Web
locating MFP 4, 345 solve problems 208 Server 105, 106, 109
power printer settings Scan/Digital Send (Settings) menu
consumption 18 copy-quality problems 327 (MFP)
power connection printer, base control-panel menu 166
locating MFP 4, 345 configuration 5 scanner
locating SFP 3, 343 information 2 remove and replace parts 381
power management specifications 8 scanner and document feeder
theory of operation 49 information 1

1012 Index
 specifications 1 Settings menu paper does not feed
scanner error control-panel menu 159 automatically 237, 304
30.WX.YZ error 236 sleep delay paper does not feed from Tray
scanner, image operation 48 2-X 237, 301
whole unit replacement sleep mode paper handling 237
part 970 operation 48 paper path sensors test (not
scanner/document feeder sleep settings 48 available for this
theory of operations 45 solenoids printer) 142
scanning theory of operation 53, 56 paper path test 140
image capture MFP only 46 solve connectivity problems 334 performance and connectivity
seal, toner cartridge solve performance problems 331 troubleshooting 331
theory of operation 73 factors affecting print print-quality
security performance 332 troubleshooting 305
dynamic security 74 print speeds 333 print/stop test 139, 141
security error printer does not print 333 printed circuit assembly
33.WX.YZ error 236 printer prints slowly 334 connector location
security settings solve problems diagrams 144
HP Embedded Web circuit diagrams 153 printer does not pick up
Server 105, 106, 112 configuration page 153 paper 237
sensor error control panel 219 printer does not pick up paper
54.WX.YZ error 237 control panel messages 231 or misfeeds 237
58.WX.YZ error 237 copy-quality printer feeds incorrect page
sensors troubleshooting 321 size 237, 300
theory of operation 53, 57 CPMD 231 printer picks up multiple sheets
separation cross section diagrams 142 of paper 237
image formation 71 defeating interlocks 137, 217 printer pulls from incorrect
serial number diagrams, block 142 tray 237, 301
locating MFP 4, 345 disable cartridge check (not printer resets 208
locating SFP 3, 343 available for this printer will not duplex or
Service (Maintenance) menu printer) 139 duplexes incorrectly 237,
control-panel menu 199 engine test 87, 217 301
service and support external plug and port location service menu 204
WISE v, 78, 337, 341, 965 diagrams 147 system diagnostics, MFP
service ID firmware upgrade 83 control panel 219
restore 208 firmware, determine timing chart diagrams 152
service menu version 83 tray/bin manual sensor test (not
personal identification number format disk and partial clean available for this
(PIN) 204 functions 210 printer) 142
solve problems 204 image-quality troubleshooting tools 87
Settings (Copy/Print, MFP) menu troubleshooting 304 solving
control-panel menu 115 individual component direct-connect problems 334
Settings (Fax) menu (MFP) diagnostics 140 space requirements
control-panel menu 177 individual component test (not printer 17
Settings (General) menu available for this specifications
control-panel menu 160 printer) 142 base printer 8
Settings (Manage Supplies) menu) internal test and information document feeder and
control-panel menu 188 pages 153 scanner 1
Settings (Networking) menu LED diagnostics 138 electrical and acoustic 18
control-panel menu 191 major component locations printer 1
Settings (Print, SFP) menu diagrams 149 specifications, document feeder
control-panel menu 115 manual sensor test (not and scanner
Settings (Scan/Digital Send) menu available for this printer information,
(MFP) printer) 142 configuration, and
control-panel menu 166 output is curled or specifications 1
wrinkled 237, 302 standby period 46, 47

Index 1013
 supplies 339, 967 laser/scanner failure presence detection 73
HP Embedded Web Server 111 detection 65 replacing 22
replacing toner cartridge 22 laser/scanner safety 66 seal 73
supplies error (LaserJet) low-voltage power supply 57 theory of operation 72
10.WX.YZ error 236 low-voltage power supply toner level and cartridge life
supplies error (PageWide) functions 59 detection 73
17.WX.YZ error 236 low-voltage power supply toner level detection 73
Supplies menu safety 59 toner cartridge design
control-panel menu 197 motors 53, 55 theory of operation 72
Support Tools menu over-current/over-voltage toner cartridges, part
control-panel menu 198 protection 59 numbers 339, 967
switches paper feeder control 75 toner level and cartridge life
theory of operation 53, 56 scanning and image detection
system error (LaserJet) capture 46 theory of operation 73
62.WX.YZ error 237 seal, toner cartridge 73 Top covers
system requirements sensors 53, 57 jams 257
HP Embedded Web solenoids 53, 56 touchscreen control panel 51
Server 105 switches 53, 56 transfer
toner cartridge 72 image formation 70
T toner cartridge design 72 tray
toner level and cartridge life location assemblies, 550-sheet
terms and definitions
detection 73 paper feeder 18
glossary 997
Tray 3 74 Tray 1
tests
Tray 3 jam detection 77 jams 239, 271
disable cartridge check 217
Tray 3 other functions 77 jams MFP 270
engine 217
Tray 3 paper path 74 jams SFP 237
theory of operation 45
theory of operations tray 1 rollers and separation pad
clutches 53, 56
10/100/1000 functions 51 cleaning 26
DC controller 53
ADF / scanner 45 Tray 2
engine control system 53
base printer 46 jams 244, 276
engine laser/scanner
document feeder / jams MFP 270
system 64
scanner 45 jams SFP 237
fans 53, 56
fax functions 51 tray 2 rollers
fuser circuits 62
firmware 52 cleaning 34
fuser control 61
flash memory 52 tray 2 rollers and separation pad
fuser control functions 62
I/O functions 51 cleaning 30
fuser heater protection 64
input devices 74 Tray 3
high-voltage power supply 60
input/output functions 51 electrical components 76
high-voltage power supply
Memory Enhancement jam detection 77
circuits 60
technology 52 jams 252, 284
high-voltage power supply fuser
memory functions 52 motor control 76
bias 61
NVRAM 52 other functions 77
image formation
printer, base 46 paper feeder control 75
development 70
RAM 52 paper path 74
image formation drum
scanner / document Tray 3 paper path
cleaning 72
feeder 45 theory of operation 74
image formation fusing 71
USB functions 51 tray 3 rollers and separation pad
image formation laser-beam
USB hosts functions 51 cleaning 37
exposure 69
wireless functions 51 tray motor error (LaserJet)
image formation primary
timing chart, diagrams 152 60.WX.YZ error 237
charging 69
tip iv tray/bin, manual sensor test (not
image formation
toner cartridge available for this printer)
separation 71
diagnostic test 217 solve problems 142
image formation transfer 70
life detection 73 Tray3
image-formation process 66
memory chip 73 theory of operation 74

1014 Index
trays tray/bin manual sensor test (not web browser requirements
locating MFP 3, 344 available for this HP Embedded Web
locating SFP 2, 342 printer) 142 Server 105
Trays menu USB cables 332 Web-based Interactive Search
control-panel menu 197 wired network 334, 335 Engine (WISE)
trays, E40040 Troubleshooting (Maintenance) HP internal users and Channel
capacity 9 menu partners v, 78, 337, 341, 965
included 9 control-panel menu 200 weight, MFP printer 15
trays, E42540 troubleshooting tools weight, SFP printer 13
capacity 12 control panel messages 231 wireless functions
included 12 copy-quality theory of operations 51
trays, M406/M407 troubleshooting 321 WISE
capacity 8 CPMD 231 email problems 331
included 8 determine the problem fax problems 331
trays, M430/M431 source 79 HP internal users and Channel
capacity 10 diagrams, block 142 partners v, 78, 337, 341, 965
included 10 firmware upgrade 83
troubleshooting HP Embedded Web
blank pages 332 Server 105, 106, 111
check toner-cartridge image-quality
status 310 troubleshooting 304
checklist 79, 80 individual component
control panel 219 diagnostics 140
defeating interlocks 137, 217 performance and connectivity
direct-connect problems 334 troubleshooting 331
disable cartridge check (not print-quality
available for this troubleshooting 305
printer) 139 solve problems 87
engine test 87, 217
flowchart 79, 81 U
format disk and partial clean
upgrade, product firmware 83
functions 210
USB Firmware Upgrade
individual component test (not
(Maintenance) menu
available for this
control-panel menu 199
printer) 142
USB functions
jams 238, 271
theory of operations 51
jams MFP 270
USB hosts functions
jams SFP 237
theory of operations 51
LED diagnostics 138
USB port
manual sensor test (not
troubleshooting 332
available for this
printer) 142 V
network problems 334, 335
pages not printing 332 vertical lines, bands, or streaks
pages printing slowly 332 copy-quality problems 323
paper path sensors test (not views, document feeder and
available for this scanner
printer) 142 printer information,
paper path test 140 configuration, and
print/stop test 139, 141 specifications 1
printer resets 208
service menu 204 W
system diagnostics, MFP waiting period 46, 47
control panel 219 warning iv

Index 1015